














                                  TOPS-20
                                  TOPS-20
                        Operator's Command Language
                        Operator's Command Language
                              Reference Manual
                              Reference Manual


|                         Electronic Distribution






                                 July 1990
|                                July 1990


                  This  manual  describes   all   operator
                  commands that use the Operator Interface
                  Command Language (OPR), LCP,  Privileged
                  Commands, and PTYCON commands.

                  Change bars in margins indicate material
                  that has been added or changed since the
                  previous   release   of   this   manual.
                  Bullets  indicate that material has been
                  deleted.

                  This manual supersedes the manual of the
|                 same name and order number, AA-H600C-TM.


                  OPERATING SYSTEM:
                  OPERATING SYSTEM:  TOPS-20 (KL Model B) Version 7.0

                  SOFTWARE:
                  SOFTWARE:  GALAXY Version 6



                  digital equipment corporation
                  maynard, massachusetts



   First Printing, January 1980
   Updated, April 1982
   Updated, December 1982
   Revised, September 1985
   Revised, June, 1988
|  Software Update Tape 3, July 1990



   The information in this document is subject to change  without  notice
   and  should  not  be  construed  as  a commitment by Digital Equipment
   Corporation.  Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no  responsibility
   for any errors that may appear in this document.

   The software described in this document is furnished under  a  license
   and  may  only  be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
   license.

   No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
   equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
   affiliated companies.


   Copyright  C 1980,  1982,   1985,   1988,   1990   Digital   Equipment
   Corporation.

   All Rights Reserved.
   Printed in U.S.A.



   The Reader's Comments form on the last page of this document  requests
   the   user's   critical  evaluation  to  assist  in  preparing  future
   documentation.

   The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

   CI             DECtape     LA50             SITGO-10
   DDCMP          DECUS       LN01             TOPS-10
   DEC            DECwriter   LN03             TOPS-20
   DECmail        DELNI       MASSBUS          TOPS-20AN
   DECnet         DELUA       PDP              UNIBUS
   DECnet-VAX     HSC         PDP-11/24        UETP
   DECserver      HSC-50      PrintServer      VAX
   DECserver 100  KA10        PrintServer 40   VAX/VMS
   DECserver 200  KI          Q-bus            VT50
   DECsystem-10   KL10        ReGIS
   DECSYSTEM-20   KS10        RSX              d i g i t a l





                                      CONTENTS



   PREFACE


   CHAPTER 1       INTRODUCTION


   CHAPTER 2       THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR

           2.1     INTRODUCTION TO THE OPERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . 2-1
           2.2     RUNNING OPR AND EXITING FROM IT  . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.2.1     Issuing OPR Commands to and from Remote Stations 2-5
           2.2.2     Multiple OPRs on the System  . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
           2.3     RUNNING SEMI-OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
           2.3.1     SEMI-OPR Limitations and Restrictions  . . . . . 2-7
           2.3.2     SEMI-OPR Commands  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
           2.4     OPR COMMAND FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
           2.4.1     ? (Question Mark) - Listing Available Commands . 2-9
           2.4.2     ESCape - Using Recognition . . . . . . . . . .  2-11
           2.4.3     <CTRL/H> - Reprinting Faulty Commands  . . . .  2-13
           2.4.4     Continuing OPR Command Lines . . . . . . . . .  2-14
           2.5     OPR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-15
           2.5.1     ORION-To-OPR Messages  . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-15
           2.5.2     OPR Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-16


   CHAPTER 3       OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

                   ABORT - Aborting Jobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
                   ALIGN - Aligning Printer Paper . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
                   BACKSPACE - Backspacing Files by Page  . . . . .  3-13
                   CANCEL - Canceling Requests  . . . . . . . . . .  3-18
                   CLOSE - Closing the Log Buffer File  . . . . . .  3-22
                   CONTINUE - Restarting a Stopped Job  . . . . . .  3-24
                   DEFINE - Defining a Node . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-30
                   DEFINE - Defining Aliases for Printer 
                   Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-34
                   DISABLE - Stopping System Process Features . . .  3-39
                   DISMOUNT - Dismounting a Structure or Tape-drive  3-48
                   ENABLE - Allowing System Process Features  . . .  3-52
                   ENTER - Entering Another Command Level . . . . .  3-61
                   EXIT - Leaving OPR Level . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-63
                   FORWARDSPACE - Forward Spacing into Pages  . . .  3-64
                   HELP - Getting Help on OPR Commands  . . . . . .  3-68
                   HOLD - Holding Job Requests in the Queue . . . .  3-70
                   IDENTIFY - Identifying Tape Mounts . . . . . . .  3-73
                   MODIFY - Modifying the Priority of Requests  . .  3-77
                   MOUNT - Mounting Structures  . . . . . . . . . .  3-80
                   NEXT - Specifying the Next Request to Run  . . .  3-83


                                    iii



                   PUSH - Pushing Out of OPR Command Level  . . . .  3-88
                   RELEASE - Releasing Job Requests Held in the 
                   Queue  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-90
                   REPORT - Reporting Comments to SYSERR  . . . . .  3-93
                   REQUEUE - Rescheduling Job Requests  . . . . . .  3-95
                   RESPOND - Responding to Messages . . . . . . . . 3-101
                   ROUTE - Routing Output Between Nodes . . . . . . 3-104
                   SEND - Sending Messages  . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
                   SET - Setting Parameters for System Devices  . . 3-115
                     SET BATCH-STREAM - Setting Batch Stream 
                     Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
                     SET CARD-PUNCH - Setting Card Punch Parameters 3-119
                     SET DISK-DRIVE - Setting Disk-Drive Parameters 3-123
                     SET JOB - Setting Characteristics for Jobs . . 3-126
                     SET NODE - Setting Node Parameters . . . . . . 3-128
                     SET ONLINE - Setting a Device On-Line  . . . . 3-132
                     SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH - Setting 
                     Paper-Tape-Punch Parameters  . . . . . . . . . 3-134
                     SET PLOTTER - Setting Plotter Parameters . . . 3-137
                     SET PORT CI - Controlling the CI port  . . . . 3-140
                     SET PORT NI - Controlling the NI Port  . . . . 3-145
                     SET PRINTER - Setting Line Printer Parameters  3-147
                     SET SCHEDULER - Setting System Performance . . 3-153
                     SET STRUCTURE - Setting Structure Parameters . 3-156
                     SET TAPE-DRIVE - Setting Tape-Drive Parameters 3-161
                   SHOW - Displaying System Information . . . . . . 3-167
                     SHOW ALIAS - Displaying Printer Alias Names  . 3-168
                     SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES - Displaying Status of 
                     Remote Broadcasting of ORION Messages  . . . . 3-173
                     SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS - Displaying 
                     Cluster Link Status  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
                     SHOW CONFIGURATION - Displaying Disk Drive 
                     Configuration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
                     SHOW CONTROL-FILE - Displaying Batch Control 
                     Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
                     SHOW MESSAGES - Displaying Outstanding 
                     Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
                     SHOW OPERATORS - Displaying Operators on the 
                     System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
                     SHOW PARAMETERS - Displaying Device Settings . 3-187
                     SHOW QUEUES - Displaying Queued Job Requests . 3-193
                     SHOW ROUTE-TABLE - Displaying Node Routing 
                     Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
                     SHOW SCHEDULER - Displaying the System 
                     Scheduler  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
                     SHOW STATUS - Displaying Device/System 
                     Information  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201
                     SHOW TIME - Displaying Date and Time . . . . . 3-211
                   SHUTDOWN - Terminating Device Scheduling . . . . 3-212
                   START - Starting Device Scheduling . . . . . . . 3-217
                   STOP - Stopping Devices Temporarily  . . . . . . 3-222
                   SUPPRESS - Suppressing Printer Form-Feeds  . . . 3-227


                                     iv



                   SWITCH - Switching Tape Drives and Volids  . . . 3-231
                   TAKE - Executing OPR Commands Automatically  . . 3-233
                   UNDEFINE - Removing Structure Parameters . . . . 3-235
                   WAIT - Controlling Input from Batch Jobs . . . . 3-237


   CHAPTER 4       LCP COMMANDS

           4.1     INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
           4.2     LOADING AND DUMPING LAT TERMINAL SERVERS . . . . . 4-3
           4.3     OPR COMMANDS AVAILABLE IN LCP  . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
           4.4     LCP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
                     CLEAR - Clearing LAT host parameters . . . . . . 4-8
                     SET - Setting LAT host parameters  . . . . . .  4-11
                     SHOW - Displaying LAT Host and Terminal Server 
                     Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-14
                     START - Making the LAT Host Available  . . . .  4-19
                     STOP - Making the LAT Host Unavailable . . . .  4-20
                     ZERO - Resetting LAT Counters to Zero  . . . .  4-21


   CHAPTER 5       ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS

           5.1     INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
           5.2     PRIVILEGED COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS  . . . . . . . . . 5-2
                   ^ECEASE - Scheduling System Shutdown . . . . . . . 5-3
                   ^ECREATE - Creating/Removing Directories . . . . . 5-8
                   ^EDEFINE - Defining and Deleting System Logical 
                   Names  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-46
                   ^EEDDT - Debugging the EXEC  . . . . . . . . . .  5-49
                   ^EPRINT - Print Directory Parameters . . . . . .  5-50
                   ^EQUIT - Halting the EXEC  . . . . . . . . . . .  5-55
                   ^ESEND - Sending Messages to Users Immediately .  5-57
                   ^ESET - Setting Job, System, and Terminal 
                   Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-59
                   ^ESPEAK - Giving Commands To SYSJOB  . . . . . .  5-71


   CHAPTER 6       PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE

           6.1     INTRODUCTION TO PTYCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
           6.2     STARTING PTYCON  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
           6.3     COMMUNICATION WITH PTYCON AND ITS SUBJOBS  . . . . 6-4
           6.3.1     Subjobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
           6.3.2     Creating Subjobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
           6.3.3     Communicating with Subjobs through PTYCON  . . . 6-6
           6.3.4     Communicating Directly with Subjobs  . . . . . . 6-9
           6.3.5     Subjob Output  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-11
           6.3.6     Logging Out Subjobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-12
           6.4     PTYCON COMMAND FEATURES  . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-13
           6.4.1     Listing Available Commands and Arguments with a 
                     Question Mark  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-13


                                     v



           6.4.2     Using Recognition Input  . . . . . . . . . . .  6-14
           6.5     PTYCON COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS  . . . . . . . . . .  6-14
                     ACCEPT - Accepting Output on Your Terminal . .  6-16
                     BELL - Sounding Bell for Output Waiting  . . .  6-18
                     CONNECT - Connecting to a Subjob . . . . . . .  6-19
                     DEFINE - Defining a Subjob . . . . . . . . . .  6-21
                     DISCARD - Eliminating Subjob Output  . . . . .  6-23
                     EXIT - Leaving PTYCON Command Level  . . . . .  6-25
                     GET - Executing an Auto-File . . . . . . . . .  6-27
                     HELP - Printing PTYCON Commands  . . . . . . .  6-30
                     KILL - Killing PTYCON Subjobs  . . . . . . . .  6-31
                     LOG - Recording Interactions with PTYCON . . .  6-33
                     PUSH - Performing Tasks at EXEC Level  . . . .  6-35
                     REDEFINE - Changing the PTYCON ESCape Character 6-37
                     REFUSE - Refusing Output from Unconnected 
                     Subjobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-38
                     SAVE - Recording Input to PTYCON Subjobs . . .  6-40
                     SILENCE - Silencing Output to Your Terminal  .  6-42
                     WHAT - Displaying the Status of Subjobs  . . .  6-44
           6.6     PTYCON WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES  . . . . . . .  6-46


   INDEX


   TABLES

           5-1     Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands  . . . . . . . .  5-12


























                                     vi

























































                                     vi















                                  PREFACE
                                  PREFACE



                                   _______  __________  _______  ________
   The commands described in  the  TOPS-20  Operator's  Command  Language
   _________  ______
   Reference  Manual  are  arranged  in  an alphabetical order within the
   command language being described:  OPR,  ^E  privileged  commands,  or
   PTYCON.

   This manual is designed primarily for the beginning operator  as  well
   as the experienced operator who needs additional information about the
   various TOPS-20 operator commands.  It assumes  that  the  reader  has
   OPERATOR, SEMI-OPERATOR, or WHEEL privileges and knows how to login as
   an operator.

   This manual assumes that you, the operator, have read all or parts  of
   the following manuals:

        _______ ______ _____
        TOPS-20 User's Guide

        _______ __________ _____
        TOPS-20 Operator's Guide

   In addition, you may need  to  reference  the  following  manuals  for
   information related to the operational tasks you must perform:

        _______ __ _____ _ ____________ _____
        TOPS-20 KL Model B Installation Guide

        _______ _________ _____
        TOPS-20 Utilities Guide

        _______ ________ _________ ______
        TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual

        _______ ___ _____________________ ______
        TOPS-20 IBM Emulation/Termination Manual

        __________ _______ ______ ___ _____ ______ ___ __________ _____
        DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's Guide

        __________ _______ __________ _____
        DECnet/SNA Gateway Management Guide.

        ________________ ______ _________ _____
        DECnet-20/PSI-20 System Manager's Guide

        _______ ______ _________ ______
        TOPS-20 DECnet Reference Manual


                                    vii



   The contents of this manual are as follows:

        1.  Chapter 1 briefly introduces OPR, ^E privileged commands, and
            PTYCON.

        2.  Chapter 2 is an introduction to OPR, the Operator Interface.

        3.  Chapter  3  describes  all  OPR  commands,  their   keywords,
            arguments, switches, and values.  The OPR commands are listed
            in alphabetical order.

        4.  Chapter 4 contains an introduction to LCP,  the  LAT  Control
            Program,  and  describes  all  LCP  commands, their keywords,
            arguments,   switches,   and   values.    The   LCP   command
            descriptions are in alphabetical order.

        5.  Chapter 5 describes all ^E (<CTRL/E>) privileged commands for
            special operator tasks.

        6.  Chapter 6 describes all PTYCON commands.


                      Conventions Used In This Manual


   Symbol                          Meaning

   <RET>               Press the key labeled RETURN or CR.

   <ESC>               Press the key labeled ESC, ESCAPE, ALT, or PRE.

   <CTRL/C>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and C simultaneously.

   <CTRL/E>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and E simultaneously.

   <CTRL/I>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and  I  simultaneously
                       or press the key labeled TAB.

   <CTRL/X>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and X simultaneously.

   <CTRL/H>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and H simultaneously.













                                    viii

























































                                    1-1












                                 CHAPTER 1
                                 CHAPTER 1

                                INTRODUCTION
                                INTRODUCTION



   OPR is the operator interface.  The operator's command language allows
   you  to communicate with certain components of TOPS-20, to control the
   batch streams and the input and output devices.  You also use  OPR  to
   send messages to jobs, terminals, and batch-streams, and to respond to
   requests for  operator  action,  such  as  from  the  PLEASE  program.
   Chapter  2  contains  a thorough introduction to using OPR.  Chapter 3
   describes all OPR commands in alphabetical  order.   LCP  is  the  LAT
   Control  Program.  LAT (Local Area Transport) is a protocol to control
   communication between LAT  terminal  servers  and  LAT  hosts  on  the
   Ethernet.  Chapter 4 contains a detailed introduction to LAT functions
   that you can control with LCP, and also describes the LCP commands, in
   alphabetical order.

   ^E (Control-E) privileged commands are commands that  can  affect  the
   entire  system,  and  therefore  can be used only by those with OPR or
   WHEEL privileges enabled.  The first  character  of  each  command  is
   <CTRL/E>   (typed   in  by  pressing  the  keys  labeled  CTRL  and  E
   simultaneously), which echoes on your terminal as ^E.

   ^E privileged commands allow you  to  shut  down  the  system,  create
   accounts,  define  system-wide logical names, and send messages to all
   users simultaneously.  ^E privileged commands and their functions are:

         o  ^ECEASE - shuts down the system

         o  ^ECREATE - creates a directory

         o  ^EDEFINE - defines system-wide logical names

         o  ^EEDDT - debugs the EXEC

         o  ^EPRINT - displays directory parameters

         o  ^EQUIT - halts the EXEC

         o  ^ESEND - sends system-wide messages



                                    1-1
                                INTRODUCTION
                                INTRODUCTION


         o  ^ESET - sets system-wide and local parameters

         o  ^ESPEAK - gives commands to SYSJOB

   ^E commands are described in Chapter 5 in alphabetical order.   PTYCON
   is  a program that allows you to RUN more than one job simultaneously,
   without requiring each job to have an associated timesharing terminal.
   PTYCON  runs  each  job  as  a  subjob controlled by a pseudo-terminal
   (PTY).   PTYCON  can  send  information  to  each  PTY   and   receive
   information  from  each  PTY.   Each  PTY  is  in  effect  a  software
   simulation of a timesharing terminal.

   PTYCON allows the many operator jobs, such as GALAXY, OPR, and NMLT20,
   to be run from a single terminal, under the control of the operator.

   PTYCON commands are described in  Chapter  6  in  alphabetical  order.
   Chapter 6 also contains an introduction to using PTYCON.





































                                    1-2












                                 CHAPTER 2
                                 CHAPTER 2

                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR



   2.1  INTRODUCTION TO THE OPERATOR INTERFACE
   2.1  INTRODUCTION TO THE OPERATOR INTERFACE

   OPR, the Operator Interface, is both a component and the main  command
   language  used  in  the  TOPS-20  operating  system.   This  component
   provides you, the operator, with the language to communicate with  the
   following components of the TOPS-20 operating system:

        1.  QUASAR, the GALAXY Scheduler

        2.  BATCON, the Batch Controller

        3.  LPTSPL, the Line-Printer Spooler

        4.  SPRINT, the Reader Interpreter

        5.  CDRIVE, the Card-Reader Spooler

        6.  SPROUT, the Card-Punch, Paper-Tape-Punch, and Plotter Spooler

        7.  MOUNTR, the Tape-Drive and Disk-Drive Controller

        8.  NEBULA, the Cluster GALAXY Message Router

                                                                  _______
   Further information on these components can be found  in  the  TOPS-20
   __________ _____
   Operator's Guide.

   You also use the OPR command language to communicate with:

         o  Any program requesting operator action (such  as  the  PLEASE
            program)

         o  Any user on the system

         o  All users on a remote system in the cluster

   The component that receives the OPR commands and communicates with all
   the other operating system components is ORION.


                                    2-1
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   2.2  RUNNING OPR AND EXITING FROM IT
   2.2  RUNNING OPR AND EXITING FROM IT

   To start OPR, you must have WHEEL or OPERATOR privileges.   (See  your
   System  Manager  to  get  these  privileges if you do not already have
   either of them.)

   To handle all batch software tasks and all PLEASE, MOUNT, and DISMOUNT
   requests,  you  must  have  OPR  running.   Normally,  commands in the
   PTYCON.ATO file start  OPR  automatically  as  a  PTYCON  subjob.   An
   example of this command file is shown on the next page.

        SILENCE
        LOG
        DEFINE ^$OPR
        CONNECT OPR
        LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
        ENABLE
        !NEW OPERATOR INTERFACE PARSER 
        OPR  
        TAKE SYS:SYSTEM.CMD
        PUSH
        ENABLE
        ^ESET LOGIN ANY
                S
        ^ESEND  SYSTEM IN OPERATION
        POP

   The command TAKE SYS:SYSTEM.CMD in the above  PTYCON.ATO  example  can
   contain  any  number  of  OPR  commands  to  set and start devices and
   streams automatically.  An example of a  SYSTEM.CMD  command  file  is
   shown below.

        SET BATCH-STREAM 0 TIME-LIMIT 5
        SET BATCH-STREAM 1 TIME-LIMIT 10
        SET BATCH-STREAM 2:3 TIME-LIMIT 11000
        SET BATCH-STREAM 3 PRIORITY-LIMITS 20:63
        SET BATCH-STREAM 0:1 PRIORITY-LIMITS 1:19
        START BATCH-STREAM 0:3
        SET PRINTER 0 PAGE-LIMIT 20000
        SET PRINTER 1 PAGE-LIMIT 500
        START PRINTER 0:1
        START READER 0
        START CARD-PUNCH 0

                                                                  _______
   These commands are  described  in  various  sections  of  the  TOPS-20
   __________ _____
   Operator's Guide and in Chapter 3 of this manual.

                                    NOTE

           It is the responsibility of  your  System  Manager  to
           determine whether OPR is to run as a subjob of PTYCON.
           In addition,  your  System  Manager  should  determine
           whether any other program or utility should be started
           as a PTYCON subjob.

                                    2-2
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   To start OPR yourself under a job with OPERATOR  privileges,  all  you
   need to do is to type ENABLE and then type OPR.

         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ________
        $OPR<RET>
        OPR>

   OPR is your primary  interface  with  the  operating  system  and  its
   devices.   Thus,  it  is  recommended  that if your installation has a
   hardcopy central terminal (CTY), it should be dedicated to OPR.  To do
   this,  LOGIN and ATTACH to PTYCON; the OPR> prompt then appears at the
   CTY.  In the following example, your password is FOO and your  account
   number is OPERATOR.

        ________
        <CTRL/C>
         CLOYD Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20753)
         ___ ________ ___ _____________
        @LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
         Job 12 on TTY21 30-Apr-79 07:10:32
         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ______ _____________
        $SYSTAT OPERATOR<RET>

           0   DET  SYSJOB  OPERATOR
           1   205  PTYCON  OPERATOR
           2   207  BATCON  OPERATOR
           3   210  EXEC    OPERATOR
           4   211  OPR     OPERATOR
                    .
                    .
         ______ ________ ______
        $ATTACH OPERATOR 1<RET>
                                      _____
         [Attached to TTY205, confirm]<RET>
         Detaching Job # 12
                  ________
        Password: FOO<RET>
        _____
        <RET>
        OPR>

   If your installation has  more  than  one  terminal  assigned  to  its
   operators,  you  can run separate OPRs from different terminals.  (See
   Section 2.2.2.) Thus, OPR can run as a  subjob  under  PTYCON  at  one
   terminal  and  as  a job by itself at another terminal.  All OPRs have
   the same functionality as the OPR running as a subjob  of  PTYCON  and
   CONNECTed  to  the  CTY.   ORION,  the  OPR-controlling component, can
   handle an unlimited number of terminals running  OPR.   Multiple  OPRs
   are discussed in Section 2.2.2.

   If you want OPR as a subjob under PTYCON and the PTYCON.ATO  file  did
   not  automatically  start  OPR,  you can either CONNECT to a subjob to
   start OPR or DEFINE a subjob as OPR  and  then  CONNECT  to  it.   The
   examples below show both methods of creating an OPR subjob.

                _______ ______
        PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
        [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB 0]



                                    2-3
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


         CLOYD Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20753)
         ___ ________ ___ _____________
        @LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
         Job 37 on TTY211 2-DEC-79 09:23:01
         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ________
        $OPR<RET>
        OPR>

   or

                ______ _ ________
        PTYCON> DEFINE 0 OPR<RET>
                _______ ________ ___ _____________
        PTYCON> OPR-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
        PTYCON>

        **** OPR(0)  09:32:01  ****

         CLOYD Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20753)
        @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
        @
                _______ ______
        PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
        [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB OPR(0)]
        _____
        <RET>
         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ________
        $OPR<RET>
        OPR>

   When you issue a command to OPR,  OPR  validates  the  syntax  of  the
   command  and  generates error messages for any errors it may find.  If
   there are no errors, the command is passed to the correct  process  to
   be executed.

   If you receive an  error  message,  you  can  retype  the  entire  OPR
   command,  or  press  <CTRL/H>  to  reprint the command up to the point
   where the error occurred in the command.  (Refer to Section 2.4.2.)

   To exit from OPR at any time, simply  issue  the  command  EXIT.   You
   immediately  return  to  TOPS-20 command level and you are prompted by
   the dollar-sign ($).  For example:

            _________
        OPR>EXIT<RET>
        $

   If OPR is a subjob of PTYCON, you  can  type  <CTRL/X>  to  return  to
   PTYCON command level.  For example:

            __
        OPR>^X
             ^
             |
         <CTRL/X>
        PTYCON>

   In addition, you can give the PUSH command to OPR to return to TOPS-20
   command  processor  level.   Then, you can execute any program or task


                                    2-4
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   and then give the POP command to return to OPR.  However,  you  cannot
   LOGOUT while PUSHed to OPR.

            _________
        OPR>PUSH<RET>

         TOPS-20 Command processor 7(4138)
         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ___________
        $DUMPER<RET>
        DUMPER>
                   .
                   .
                   .
         ____________
        $DISABLE<RET>
         ________
        @POP<RET>
        OPR>



   2.2.1  Issuing OPR Commands to and from Remote Stations
   2.2.1  Issuing OPR Commands to and from Remote Stations

   In a data networking environment, a DECSYSTEM-20 communicates with one
   or  more separate computer processors.  Each processor in a network is
   called a "node." The DECSYSTEM-20, running TOPS-20, is a "host"  node.
   The host node is the only type of node in the TOPS-20 network that can
   support interactive users on a timesharing basis.  The operator at the
   host  node  is  the system operator.  The system operator controls the
   devices connected to his host node and those connected to  the  remote
   stations that are controlled by his host node.

   In a DECnet network, two or more  hosts  may  communicate.   The  host
   operator  logs  into  his  "local"  host.   The other hosts are called
   "remote" hosts.  The host operator cannot control  devices  at  remote
   hosts.

   The processors in the TOPS-20 network,  other  than  host  nodes,  are
   known  as  remote  stations.   These  remote  stations  do not support
   interactive users, and usually have  one  card  reader  and  one  line
   printer.  Remote stations are used for remote submission of batch jobs
   to a host node.   The  operator  at  a  remote  station  is  a  remote
   operator.    The  remote  operator  can  control  only  those  devices
   connected to his remote station.  He cannot  control  devices  at  the
   host node.

   The remote station is an IBM-type node.  Your remote station operators
   should   have  additional  documentation.   The  following  manual  is
                                               ___  _____________________
   available for remote  station  operators:   IBM  Emulation/Termination
   ______
   Manual is useful for IBM-type remote stations.

   This  manual  helps  the  remote  station  operator  determine   those
   functions he can perform at the remote station.  The commands that the
   remote station operator uses will  work  on  his  remote  station;  no
   further specification is necessary.


                                    2-5
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   The system operator can perform any of the functions in  this  manual.
   However, no operator can control devices at a remote host node.

   The OPR program allows the operator to specify a remote  node  as  the
   destination  for  a  command.   Many  OPR commands recognize the /NODE
   switch.  The /NODE switch can specify  either  a  DECnet  or  IBM-type
   remote  station,  or it can specify the operator's host node; any node
   name may  be  specified.   However  for  remote  DECnet  nodes,  these
   commands  have no effect.  To use the /NODE switch, type the following
   in the command line:

        /NODE:node-name::

   Two colons (::) following the node name are optional.



   2.2.2  Multiple OPRs on the System
   2.2.2  Multiple OPRs on the System

   You can have more than one OPR running on the same  operating  system.
   ORION   keeps   track   of   each   OPR   and  sends  the  appropriate
   acknowledgement messages to the OPR that sent the command.

   Only  the  host  system  can  have   more   than   one   OPR   running
   simultaneously.  Remote stations can only have one OPR running.  Thus,
   if you have remote stations at your  installation,  any  message  sent
   from a remote station to the host system displays at all OPR's running
   at the host.  If a message is sent to a remote station from  the  host
   (the /NODE:  switch), the message displays only at that node.

   Each OPR that is processing can be set to enable or disable the  types
   of messages to be displayed at that OPR console.  For example, one OPR
   could be responsible for only tape and disk mounts and dismounts,  and
   another  OPR  could  be responsible for everything else.  Refer to the
   detailed descriptions of the DISABLE and ENABLE commands elsewhere  in
   this manual.



   2.3  RUNNING SEMI-OPR
   2.3  RUNNING SEMI-OPR

   SEMI-OPR is a new user privilege that permits a designated user to use
   a  subset  of  OPR  commands.   This  subset of OPR commands are those
   commands for accessing information  (such  as  SHOW)  and  controlling
   certain  devices  (such  as  FORWARDSPACE).   A  user may be given the
   SEMI-OPR  privilege  by  another  user  who  has  WHEEL  or   OPERATOR
   privileges.

   The System Administrator can  enable  the  SEMI-OPR  privilege  for  a
   particular  user  with the ^ECREATE command (or BUILD command) at EXEC
   command level.  For example, you can authorize user  <BROWN>  to  have
   the SEMI-OPR privilege by performing the following:


                                    2-6
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


         ________ _____________
        $^ECREATE <EBROWN><RET>
        [Old]
          __________________
        $$SEMI-OPERATOR<RET>
          _____
        $$<RET>
        $

   The System Administrator can also determine which devices  a  SEMI-OPR
   can  control  when  a  GALGEN  is performed.  The devices are printer,
   card-reader, tape drive, plotter, card punch, and paper-tape-punch.

   The operator of your system can turn on or turn  off  SEMI-OPR  system
   wide with the OPR commands ENABLE and DISABLE.  For example, to ENABLE
   SEMI-OPR:

            ______ _____________
        OPR>ENABLE SEMI-OPR<RET>
        OPR>
        13:06:10       --SEMI-OPERATOR enable--
        OPR>

   To DISABLE SEMI-OPR:

            _______ _____________
        OPR>DISABLE SEMI-OPR<RET>
        OPR>
        13:06:19       --SEMI-OPERATOR disable--
        OPR>

   When the user activates SEMI-OPR by typing OPR at EXEC  command  level
   followed by a carriage-return, the SEMI-OPR> prompt appears.  When the
   user types a  "?"  for  the  SEMI-OPR>  prompt,  only  those  commands
   applicable to SEMI-OPR appear.

         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ________
        $OPR<RET>
                 _
        SEMI-OPR>?

             ALIGN              BACKSPACE       CONTINUE        EXIT
             FORWARDSPACE       HELP            IDENTIFY        PUSH
             SHOW               SHUTDOWN        START           STOP
             SUPPRESS           TAKE            WAIT

        SEMI-OPR>



   2.3.1  SEMI-OPR Limitations and Restrictions
   2.3.1  SEMI-OPR Limitations and Restrictions

   The following limitations and restrictions should be  remembered  when
   designating and using SEMI-OPR:

         o  The user must ENABLE capabilities at EXEC  command  level  to
            run SEMI-OPR.



                                    2-7
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


         o  The system must be running a Release 7 monitor and GALAXY 6.

         o  SEMI-OPR can execute only certain OPR commands.

         o  SEMI-OPR cannot run LCP and NCP (ENTER command),  or  another
            application program by way of OPR.



   2.3.2  SEMI-OPR Commands
   2.3.2  SEMI-OPR Commands

   For users to utilize SEMI-OPR, they must have SEMI-OPERATOR privileges
   enabled  and SEMI-OPR must be enabled.  SEMI-OPR commands allow a user
   to access information and to have limited control over  devices.   The
   following are the permitted SEMI-OPR commands:

        ALIGN              BACKSPACE       CONTINUE        EXIT
        FORWARDSPACE       HELP            IDENTIFY        PUSH
        SHOW               SHUTDOWN        START           STOP
        SUPPRESS           TAKE            WAIT

                                    NOTE

           The above list  contains  all  the  possible  SEMI-OPR
           commands.    However,  the  System  Administrator  can
           define a subset of  the  SEMI-OPR  commands  based  on
           device  types.   Therefore, when a SEMI-OPR requests a
           list of available  commands  by  typing  a  "?",  only
           commands  enabled  by  the  System  Administrator  are
           displayed.

   For a more detailed  description  of  the  above  commands,  refer  to
   Chapter  3,  and  remember  the limitations and restrictions listed in
   Section 2.3.1.



   2.4  OPR COMMAND FEATURES
   2.4  OPR COMMAND FEATURES

   The OPR command language has three command features that allow you  to
   do the following:

        1.  List available commands - ?

        2.  Use recognition - <ESC>

        3.  Reprint faulty commands - <CTRL/H>

   These features are described in detail in the  following  sections  of
   this chapter.

   If you are a remote station operator (that is,  if  your  installation


                                    2-8
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   has  DECnet software), you will not have the above features.  However,
   you can obtain help with the HELP command at OPR command level.  Refer
   to Chapter 3 for a description of the HELP command.

   In  addition,  CTRL/character  commands  such  as  CTRL/R  and  CTRL/U
   function at OPR command level as they do at TOPS-20 command level.



   2.4.1  ?  (Question Mark) - Listing Available Commands
   2.4.1  ?  (Question Mark) - Listing Available Commands

   You can type a question mark at command level or while in the  process
   of typing a command.

   When you type a question  mark  to  the  OPR>  prompt,  it  lists  the
   available  OPR commands.  When you type a question mark in the process
   of entering an OPR command, it lists the available  keywords  to  that
   command.   When  you type a question mark after the keyword, OPR lists
   the available values, arguments, and/or switches to that keyword.   If
   you type a question mark after an entire OPR command, OPR replies with
   the message:  "confirm with  carriage  return",  retypes  your  entire
   command, and waits for you to press the carriage return key.

                          ----- Restriction -----

   If you type a question mark after an OPR command  argument  or  switch
   and  there  are  no  additional  arguments  that  can be supplied, OPR
   responds with the message:  "confirm with carriage  return"  and  then
   retypes  your  complete  OPR  command  and  waits for you to press the
   carriage return key.  (All OPR  commands  must  end  with  a  carriage
   return;  the  ESCape,  <CTRL/H>,  and  ?   features do not require the
   carriage return.)

                            ----- Examples -----

        1.  Start OPR and, after the system prompts you with OPR>, type a
            question mark.

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ________
            $OPR<RET>
                _
            OPR>? one of the following
             ABORT      ALIGN      BACKSPACE       CANCEL      CLOSE
             CONTINUE   DEFINE     DISABLE         DISMOUNT    ENABLE
             ENTER      EXIT       FORWARDSPACE    HELP        HOLD
             IDENTIFY   MODIFY     MOUNT           NEXT        PUSH
             RELEASE    REPORT     REQUEUE         RESPOND     ROUTE
             SEND       SET        SHOW            SHUTDOWN    START
             STOP       SUPPRESS   SWITCH          TAKE        UNDEFINE
             WAIT
              or one of the following:
             LCP   NCP
            OPR>


                                    2-9
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


                                        NOTE

                    The NCP command appears in the above  example
                    when  your  installation  has DECnet software
                    and  your  system  has  been  generated   for
                                                          _______
                    network  communication.  Refer to the TOPS-20
                    ______ _________ ______
                    DECnet Reference Manual for a description  of
                    NCP commands.

        2.  Type a question mark after typing  a  letter.   OPR  responds
            with the commands that begin with that letter.

                __
            OPR>A? one of the following:
             ABORT     ALIGN
            OPR>A

        3.  Type a question mark after typing the ABORT  command  to  the
            OPR>  prompt;  OPR then lists the available arguments for the
            ABORT command, retypes your command, and waits for one of the
            arguments.

                _____ _
            OPR>ABORT ?
             BATCH-STREAM      CARD-PUNCH   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
             PLOTTER           PRINTER      READER
                _____ _______ ______
            OPR>ABORT PRINTER 0<RET>
            OPR>
            08:56:41        Printer 0  --Aborting--
                            Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
            OPR>
            08:56:47        Printer 0  --End--
                            Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
                            -- Job Aborted by Operator --
            OPR>

        4.  Type the same  ABORT  command  as  above  with  the  argument
            PRINTER  and then type a question mark.  OPR replies with the
            following:

                _____ _______ _
            OPR>ABORT PRINTER ? unit number
              or one of the following:
             CLUSTER   DQS           LAT
            OPR>ABORT PRINTER

            Supply the unit number (0) and  then  type  another  question
            mark.   OPR  replies with any additional switches that may be
            supplied.

                              _ _
            OPR>ABORT PRINTER 0 ? /PURGE
              or /REASON:
              or confirm with carriage return
                                _______________ ________
            OPR>ABORT PRINTER 0 /REASON:PRINTER JAM<RET>
            OPR>


                                    2-10
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


            09:30:45        Printer 0  --Aborting--
                            Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
            OPR>
            09:30:53        Printer 0  --End--
                            Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
                            -- Job Aborted by Operator --
            OPR>



   2.4.2  ESCape - Using Recognition
   2.4.2  ESCape - Using Recognition

   The ESCape feature allows recognition input and guide words to  appear
   on your console when you give an OPR command.

   To give the ESCape feature, you must press the key labeled  ESC,  SEL,
   PRE, or ALT depending on the type of terminal at your installation.

                                    NOTE

           All OPR commands accept  recognition  input  when  you
           press  the  ESCape  key, and most OPR commands provide
           guide words within parentheses.   However,  only  this
           section of the manual describes this ESCape feature of
           the OPR command language.

           ESCape is not available at remote  station  terminals.
           If you are at a remote station, use the HELP command.
   To use the ESCape key for recognition, type  the  first  one  or  more
   letters  of  an  OPR  command  to  make  it  unique from all other OPR
   commands, such as REQ (for the REQUEUE command), and press the  ESCape
   key.   OPR  responds  with  the  remainder of the command REQUEUE, the
   guide words within parentheses (current job  on),  and  waits  for  an
   argument for the REQUEUE command.

            <ESC>
              |
              V
            __
        OPR>REQUEUE (current job on) 

   Now type the first one or more letters of a REQUEUE argument, such  as
   PR  (for  PRINTER)  and  press  the ESCape key.  OPR responds with the
   remainder of the keyword PRINTER, the guide words  within  parenthesis
   (unit  number  or remote printer type), and waits for a unit number to
   be specified.

                                <ESC>
                                  |
                                  V
                                __
   OPR>REQUEUE (current job on) PRINTER (unit number or remote printer
   type) 

   Now type the unit number of the line printer followed  by  the  REASON
   switch to the REQUEUE command.  After you type the slash and the first
                                    2-11
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   letter of the switch, press the ESCape key.   OPR  responds  with  the
   remainder of the switch name.

   OPR>REQUEUE (current job on) PRINTER (unit number or remote printer
         _
   type) 0

     <ESC>
       |
       V
   ____    _______ ________
   /REASON:PRINTER JAM<RET>
   OPR>
   09:04:33        Printer 0  --Requeued--
                   Job CBUILD Req #188 for SAMBERG
   OPR>
   09:04:45        Printer 0  --End--
                   Job CBUILD Req #188 for SAMBERG
                   -- Job Requeued by OPERATOR --
   OPR>

                            ----- Examples -----

        1.  Type the  OPR  command  DISABLE  using  the  ESCape  key  for
            recognition.

                  <ESC><ESC>               <ESC>
                    |    |                   |
                    V    V                   V
                ____    _                   _                      _____
            OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY (of) FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES<RET>
            OPR>

        2.  Type the OPR command ABORT with the use of the ESCape key for
            recognition and guide words.

                <ESC>                 <ESC>
                  |                     |
                  V                     V
                __                     _                            _
            OPR>ABORT (Current Job on) BATCH-STREAM (Stream Number) 1

              <ESC>
                |
                V
            ____               _____
            /NOERROR-PROCESSING<RET>
            OPR>
            10:23:02        Batch-stream 1  --Aborted--
                            Job TBUILD Req #127 for HURLEY
                            No Reason Given with Noerror-processing
            OPR>
            10:23:17        Batch-stream 1  --End--
                            Job TBUILD Req #127 for HURLEY
                            -- Job Aborted by Operator --
            OPR>



                                    2-12
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   2.4.3  <CTRL/H> - Reprinting Faulty Commands
   2.4.3  <CTRL/H> - Reprinting Faulty Commands

   The <CTRL/H> feature prints the command you issued that resulted in an
   OPR  error  message.   An OPR error message occurs when a command does
   not have the correct format, syntax, switch, or value.

   When you press <CTRL/H>  after  the  error  message  appears  on  your
   terminal,  OPR retypes your entire command up to the point you entered
   the incorrect command input.

   To use the <CTRL/H> feature, type an OPR command such as SET with  the
   argument BATCH-STREAM but misspell the word STREAM.

            ___ ____________ _ _______________________
        OPR>SET BATCH-STRAEM 0 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
        ? Does not match switch or keyword:"BATCH-STRAEM"
        ________
        <CTRL/H>
            |
            V
        OPR>SET

   Now retype the keyword BATCH-STREAM correctly, but type an  O  instead
   of a 0 (zero) for the same command.

                ____________ _ _______________________
        OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM O NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
        ? First nonspace character is not a digit:
        ________
        <CTRL/H>
            |
            V
        OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 

   Now retype the correct stream number of 0 and misspell  the  parameter
   NOOPR-INTERVENTION.  After the error message appears, you complete the
   command correctly.

                             _ ______________________
        OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0 NOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
        ? Does not match switch or keyword
        ________
        <CTRL/H>
            |
            V
                               _______________________
        OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
        OPR>
        11:32:34        Batch-stream 0  --Set Accepted--

        OPR>

                            ----- Example -----

   You specify the  OPR  command  to  show  the  status  of  printers  on
   cluster-node  GIDNEY,  but  you  mispell GIDNEY as GIDDNEY.  After you
   press <CTRL/H>, you type the correct node name.

            ____ ______ _______ __________________________
        OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDDNEY<RET>


                                    2-13
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


        ? Does not match switch or keyword: "GIDDNEY"
        ________
        <CTRL/H>
            |
            V
                                              ___________
        OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
        OPR>
        12:15:28                            -- System Device Status --

        Printer Status:

        Local printers
|         Alias     Unit      Status       
|         -----     -----    ----------  
|         FOO         0      Idle             

        DQS printers
|         Alias           DQS queue name           Node    Status      
|         -----       --------------------------  ------   ------  
|         BAR                            SI$8700    JUNIPR   Idle
|         BINN                          SWE$LN03    LATOUR   Idle

        OPR>




   2.4.4  Continuing OPR Command Lines
   2.4.4  Continuing OPR Command Lines

   While you are using the OPR program, you may find it necessary to type
   a  command line that is longer than the maximum line length allowed by
   your terminal.  You may continue typing the command past  the  end  of
   the  line  and  onto the next line, without pressing RETURN.  OPR will
   accept arguments which are divided between lines.   Note  the  divided
   word, ACCESS-NAME, in this example:

            ______ ____ ________ _______________ _______ ______ ________
        OPR>DEFINE NODE IBMNOD:: SNA-WORKSTATION GATEWAY IBMNAM ACCESS-N
        ___ ___________
        AME ACCNAM<RET>

   If you want to avoid divided  words,  you  may  use  the  continuation
   feature.   At  the  end of the first line, type a space, then a hyphen
   (-), and press RETURN.  Then finish the command on the next line.

            ______ ____ ________ _______________ _______ ______ ______
        OPR>DEFINE NODE IBMNOD:: SNA-WORKSTATION GATEWAY IBMNAM -<RET>
        ___________ ______ _____
        ACCESS-NAME ACCNAM <RET>

   Note that the OPR> prompt does not appear on the  second  line,  after
   you  press  RETURN the first time.  The space and hyphen indicate that
   you wish to continue typing on the next line.






                                    2-14
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


   2.5  OPR MESSAGES
   2.5  OPR MESSAGES

   There are two types of messages that can appear at your OPR terminal:

        1.  ORION-to-OPR messages (Section 2.4.1)

        2.  OPR error messages (Section 2.4.2)



   2.5.1  ORION-To-OPR Messages
   2.5.1  ORION-To-OPR Messages

   The types of messages from ORION to OPR that can appear  at  your  OPR
   terminal are messages about:

        1.  Errors generated when ORION accepts an OPR command, but  does
            not have the appropriate devices, streams, nodes, or jobs

        2.  Jobs that start processing within a stream or device

        3.  Jobs that end processing within a stream or device

        4.  Actions that you must perform for various  devices,  streams,
            or jobs

        5.  Information you must respond to

        6.  Results from TAKE command files

   Each OPR command that is sent to ORION is time stamped by  ORION  when
   the command is accepted and executed.  The acceptance and execution of
   the command is then returned to the OPR terminal  in  the  form  of  a
   message  with  the  time  stamp  as  the first eight characters of the
   message.  For example, the OPR command:

            ___ _______ _ __________ ___________
        OPR>SET PRINTER 0 FORMS-TYPE NARROW<RET>

   returns to your terminal an ORION message in the format:

        hh:mm:ss        Printer 0  --Set Accepted--

   where hh is the hour, mm is the minutes, and ss is  the  seconds  that
   the command was accepted and executed.

   Likewise, when ORION accepts an  OPR  command  but  returns  an  error
   message,  that  message  also contains a time stamp.  For example, the
   OPR command:

        OPR>SHOW MESSAGES<RET>

   displays  the  following  information  message  when  there   are   no
   outstanding messages to respond to:


                                    2-15
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


        hh:mm:ss        --No Outstanding Messages--

   When a particular job starts to process within a batch stream or on  a
   device,  ORION  displays  a message at your OPR terminal to notify you
   that the stream or device is active.  For example:

        hh:mm:ss        Batch-stream 0  --Begin--
                        Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA

        OPR>

   appears on your terminal when a job named TEST begins  to  process  in
   batch  stream  0 for user ZINA.  The hh:mm:ss at the beginning of this
   message is the time that the job started to process  (hours,  minutes,
   seconds).

   Likewise, when a particular job ends its  processing  within  a  batch
   stream  or  on a device, ORION displays a message at your OPR terminal
   to notify you that the stream or device is not active and the job  has
   completed.  For example:

        hh:mm:ss        Batch-stream 0  --End--
                        Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA
        OPR>

   appears on your terminal when a job named TEST  ends  the  process  in
   batch  stream  0 for user ZINA.  The hh:mm:ss at the beginning of this
   message is the time that the job ended the  process  (hours,  minutes,
   seconds).



   2.5.2  OPR Error Messages
   2.5.2  OPR Error Messages

   In the course of using  OPR  to  enter  commands,  you  will  probably
   encounter  some  error  messages.  All OPR error messages begin with a
   question mark.  Error messages can  not  be  abbreviated  with  system
   switches  or  parameters as in some system programs.  In addition, the
   question mark does not represent a fatal error in OPR as  it  does  in
   some other system programs.

   When you receive an error message, you can  press  CTRL/H  (to  retype
   your  OPR  command  up  to  the  point where you entered the incorrect
   keyword, switch, or value) and then specify the correct input  to  the
   command.   As  with  all  OPR commands, if you do not know the command
   format or you have forgotten the keywords, switches, or values, type a
   question  mark  and  OPR  lists  the  command  arguments  that you can
   specify.

   Each error message described below and on the following pages explains
   the error message and a possible solution.



                                    2-16
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


                  ?  Ambiguous:
   ERROR:         ?  Ambiguous:

   Reason:        You abbreviated a keyword  or  switch  but  it  is  not
                  unique;  one  or  more  other keywords or switches also
                  have the same abbreviation.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype the command and  include  enough
                  letters   of   the   keyword  or  switch  to  make  the
                  abbreviation unique.


                  ?  Does not match switch or keyword:  "argument"
   ERROR:         ?  Does not match switch or keyword:  "argument"

   Reason:        You have specified a  switch  or  keyword  for  an  OPR
                  command  that  does  not  take  the  switch  or keyword
                  specified.  The invalid switch or keyword is  displayed
                  in quotes.

   Recovery:      Type the command again and specify the  correct  switch
                  or keyword.


                  ?  File not found "file"
   ERROR:         ?  File not found "file"

   Reason:        You have specified an OPR command  that  takes  a  file
                  specification  as  a  keyword  or switch value, but the
                  file was not found.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                  correct file specification.


                  ?   First  nonspace   character   is   not   a   digit:
   ERROR:         ?   First  nonspace   character   is   not   a   digit:
                  "character"
                  "character"

   Reason:        You have specified a keyword or switch value that  must
                  be numeric, but the first character is an alphabetic or
                  is a special character.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                  numeric  keyword  or  switch  value with any alphabetic
                  character.












                                    2-17
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


                  ?  Invalid character in number
   ERROR:         ?  Invalid character in number

   Reason:        You have specified a numeric value to  an  argument  or
                  switch  that  is  less than or greater than the allowed
                  value range.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                  numeric  value  that  is  within the allowable range of
                  values.


                  ?  Invalid device terminator:  "device name"
   ERROR:         ?  Invalid device terminator:  "device name"

   Reason:        You have specified a device with an  illegal  character
                  in its name or you did not include the colon at the end
                  of the device name.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                  device name with the correct characters and include the
                  colon.


                  ?  Invalid guide word
   ERROR:         ?  Invalid guide word

   Reason:        You have specified a guide word that does  not  pertain
                  to   the   OPR  command  that  you  specified,  or  you
                  misspelled the guide word, or you used recognition (you
                  pressed  the  ESCape  key)  and  then  pressed <CTRL/W>
                  before you pressed the carriage return.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype the command.  If you  must  have
                  guide  words with the OPR command, use recognition with
                  the ESCape key.


                  ?  Invalid node name
   ERROR:         ?  Invalid node name

   Reason:        You have specified a node name or number  to  a  /NODE:
                  switch  that  has  not been enabled, does not exist, is
                  currently off-line, or has been misspelled.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                  correct node name or number to the /NODE:  switch.  You
                  might have to ENABLE the node before  you  reissue  the
                  command.









                                    2-18
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


                  ?  Invalid OPR Command Specified "command"
   ERROR:         ?  Invalid OPR Command Specified "command"

   Reason:        You have specified an invalid OPR command.

   Recovery:      Type a question mark to the OPR prompt to get a list of
                  valid OPR commands.


                  ?  Invalid wildcard designator
   ERROR:         ?  Invalid wildcard designator

   Reason:        You have specified a wildcard character (* or %) within
                  a file specification for a keyword or switch value.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype the command and specify the file
                  specification    without   any   wildcard   characters.
                  OPR/ORION will not accept  wildcard  characters  within
                  the file specifications.


                  % No help available for "command"
   ERROR:         % No help available for "command"

   Reason:        You have specified an invalid OPR command as a  keyword
                  to the HELP command.

   Recovery:      Give the HELP HELP command  to  get  a  list  of  valid
                  keywords (OPR commands) to the HELP command.


                  ?  No such filename
   ERROR:         ?  No such filename

   Reason:        You have specified a filename as a  keyword  or  switch
                  value, but the filename does not exist as you specified
                  it.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                  correct filename as the keyword or switch value.


                  ?  No such file type "file-name"
   ERROR:         ?  No such file type "file-name"

   Reason:        You have specified a file type as a keyword  or  switch
                  value,  but  the  file  type  does  not  exist  as  you
                  specified it.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                  correct file type as the keyword or switch value.








                                    2-19
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


                  ?  Not a quoted string - does  not  begin  with  double
   ERROR:         ?  Not a quoted string - does  not  begin  with  double
                  quote
                  quote

   Reason:        You have specified a message text, but did not  include
                  it within double quotes ("message text").

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                  message text within the required double quotes.


                  ?  Not confirmed
   ERROR:         ?  Not confirmed

   Reason:        You have specified too many keywords or switches to  an
                  OPR  command.  OPR expected a carriage return after one
                  of the keywords or switches specified.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H; OPR will retype the  command  up  to  the
                  point  where a carriage return is expected.  Then press
                  carriage return.


                  ?  Null switch or keyword given
   ERROR:         ?  Null switch or keyword given

   Reason:        You have specified an OPR command  without  giving  the
                  required switch or keyword to the command.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H; OPR will retype the  command  up  to  the
                  point where you omitted the required switch or keyword.
                  If you do not know the required switch or  keyword  for
                  the  command, type a question mark and OPR will display
                  the necessary arguments.


                  ?  Number must be positive "negative-number"
   ERROR:         ?  Number must be positive "negative-number"

   Reason:        You have specified a negative value  for  a  device  or
                  stream number.  OPR will not accept negative numbers.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                  positive integer as a device or stream number.


                  ?  Only one file allowed
   ERROR:         ?  Only one file allowed

   Reason:        You  have  specified  the  BACKSPACE  or   FORWARDSPACE
                  command  with  the  /FILE  switch  and  a numeric value
                  greater than 1.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H; OPR will retype the  command  up  to  the
                  point  where  you entered the number of files.  You can
                  then enter 1  or  press  carriage  return.   The  /FILE
                  switch value defaults to 1.


                                    2-20
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


                  ?  Priority not in range "nn"
   ERROR:         ?  Priority not in range "nn"

   Reason:        You  have  specified  a  priority  number  in  the  SET
                  JOB-PRIORITY command that is not in the range from 0 to
                  63.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                  priority number from 0 to 63.


                  ?  Too many characters in node name "node-name"
   ERROR:         ?  Too many characters in node name "node-name"

   Reason:        You have specified too many characters in a  node  name
                  specification   to  the  /NODE:   switch.   The  /NODE:
                  switch can only  have  from  one  to  six  alphanumeric
                  characters.

   Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                  correct  node  name  for  the  /NODE:   switch with six
                  characters or less.


































                                    2-21

























































                                    3-1












                                 CHAPTER 3
                                 CHAPTER 3

                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS



   This chapter describes each of the OPR commands in  detail.   All  OPR
   commands  must end with a carriage return (that is, you must press the
   key labeled RETURN or CR).

   The OPR commands are in alphabetical order.


































                                    3-1
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ABORT)
                                  (ABORT)


   ABORT - Aborting Jobs
   ABORT - Aborting Jobs



   Function
   Function

        The ABORT command terminates a job request that is in progress on
        an input/output device or in a batch stream.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>ABORT keyword nn /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument
                                      READER

        followed by its stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname
        followed by:                  CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and, one or more of the following switches:

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                      /NODE:node-name::
                                      /PURGE
                                      /REASON:comment

        or one of these switches (BATCH-STREAM only):


                                    3-2
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ABORT)
                                  (ABORT)


                                      /ERROR-PROCESSING
                                      /NOERROR-PROCESSING


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch stream that has a
                           job  currently  active  within  it.   A  batch
                           stream is  a  pseudo-terminal  that  interacts
                           with the system to execute a batch job.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device  that
                           has a job currently being output on it.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                           that has a job currently being output on it.

        PLOTTER            specifies a particular plotter device that has
                           a job currently being output on it.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

|            nn            specifies the unit number of the line printer.
|                          You must specify this unit number; there is no
|                          default.

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                     n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                           TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                           configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                           processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                           processors.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

             DQS queuename 


                                    3-3
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ABORT)
                                  (ABORT)


                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric   characters,   underscores,  and
                           dollar signs.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is processed.  The double colon (::) following
                           the node name is not needed.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"


                                    3-4
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ABORT)
                                  (ABORT)


                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

        READER             specifies a particular card-reader device that
                           has  a  job  currently  being  read  into  the
                           system.  Jobs read  through  the  card  reader
                           become job requests in the batch input queue.

        nn                 specifies  the  stream  number  of  the  batch
                           stream to be aborted or the unit number of the
                           input/output   device   that   is    currently
                           processing  a  job.   You  must  specify  this
                           stream/unit number.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           double colon (::) following the node  name  is
                           optional.

        /ERROR-PROCESSING  specifies   the   default   of    the    ABORT
                           BATCH-STREAM  command  if  you  do not specify
                           either  the  /NOERROR-PROCESSING   or   /PURGE
                           switch.     The    /ERROR-PROCESSING    switch
                           specifies  that  if  a  user  provides   error
                           recovery  procedures  in  his  batch  job, the
                           error recovery procedures are not ignored.



                                    3-5
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ABORT)
                                  (ABORT)


        /NOERROR-PROCESSING

                           specifies that, if the user who submitted  the
                           batch  job provided error recovery procedures,
                           these procedures are ignored  when  the  batch
                           job is aborted.

        /PURGE             specifies that the entire job be removed  from
                           the  system.   All output from the job is also
                           aborted.  That is, there  will  be  no  header
                           and/or  trailer  pages  from the line printer.
                           The job is completely flushed from the system.
                           When  you  purge  a  batch job, no log file is
                           printed.

        /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment as to why  the
                           job has been aborted.  This comment appears in
                           the batch log file and at the user's terminal.
                           If  the  comment  is  more  than  one  line in
                           length, you can end  the  first  line  with  a
                           hyphen  and a carriage return and continue the
                           comment  on  the  next  line.   If  you  press
                           carriage  return  immediately after the colon,
                           OPR responds with the instruction:  ENTER TEXT
                           AND  TERMINATE WITH ^Z.  You can then enter as
                           many lines of text as  necessary.   When  your
                           comment(s)  have  been entered, press the CTRL
                           key  and  the  key  labeled  Z  simultaneously
                           (CTRL/Z) and the OPR> prompt reappears.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        When you use the READER keyword, the only switches available  are
        the  /NODE:   and  /REASON:   switches.  This is because a reader
        input job does not become a request until  the  last  card  ($EOJ
        card) has been read.

        The /ERROR-PROCESSING and /NOERROR-PROCESSING switches are  valid
        only with the BATCH-STREAM keyword.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the ABORT command to abort a  batch-stream  job  with
            NOERROR-PROCESSING  because  you  were instructed to do so by
            the user who submitted the job.

                _____ ____________ _ ___________________________ _____
            OPR>ABORT BATCH-STREAM 2 /NOERROR-PROCESSING/REASON: <RET>
            ENTER TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH ^Z
            __ __________ ___ __________ __ __ __ __ ___________________
            AS OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY USER<P.HURLEY><RET>


                                    3-6
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ABORT)
                                  (ABORT)


            ^Z
             ^
             |
            <CTRL/Z>
            OPR>
            12:31:05        Batch-stream 2  --Aborted--
                            Job TEST09 Req #132 for P.HURLEY
                            AS OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY USER
                            <P.HURLEY> with Noerror-processing
            OPR>
            12:31:17        Batch-stream 2  --End--
                            Job TEST09 Req #132 for P.HURLEY
                            -- Job Aborted by Operator --
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the ABORT command to abort a job currently being read
            through the card reader.

                _____ ______ ______
            OPR>ABORT READER 0<RET>
            OPR>
             9:34:45        Reader 0  --Aborted--
            OPR>































                                    3-7
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ALIGN)
                                  (ALIGN)


   ALIGN - Aligning Printer Paper
   ALIGN - Aligning Printer Paper



   Function
   Function

        The ALIGN command prints a "forms-alignment"  file  on  the  line
        printer so that you can align the paper.

        At various times, you may have  to  align  special  forms  for  a
        particular  line printer job, such as payroll checks or invoices.
        The ALIGN command allows you, at these times, to adjust the forms
        and  the  line printer, if need be, as many times as necessary to
        print the job correctly.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>ALIGN keyword nn (or) LAT /switch (or) argument<RET>

        where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by its alias name

        or followed by its unit number:

                                      nn
|  
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

        or                            LAT

        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                      /PAUSE:nnnn
                                      /REPEAT-COUNT:nnnn
                                      /STOP

        or, optionally, the following argument:

                                      alignment-filespec




                                    3-8
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ALIGN)
                                  (ALIGN)


   Keywords
   Keywords

        PRINTER            specifies the line  printer  (output  device).
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the
|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.

        nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                           that  will  print the forms to be aligned (for
                           example, 0  for  LPT0,  1  for  LPT1,  and  so
                           forth).  You must specify this unit number.

        LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

             PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

             SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.



                                    3-9
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ALIGN)
                                  (ALIGN)


             SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.
|  
|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
|                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
|                          double colon (::) following the node  name  is
|                          optional.

        /PAUSE:nnnn        specifies the time in seconds (nnnn) that  the
                           line  printer  waits  between  repeats  of the
                           particular print  job.   The  default  of  the
                           /PAUSE:  switch is 10 seconds.

        /REPEAT-COUNT:nnnn

                           specifies the number of  times  to  print  the
                           file   (starting  from  the  beginning).   The
                           default of the /REPEAT-COUNT:  is 25.

        /STOP              specifies that normal printing be resumed  and
                           stops  the  alignment  of  forms  on  the line
                           printer.


   Argument
   Argument

        alignment-filespec

                           specifies a file to be  printed  for  aligning
                           the  forms.   This file is usually supplied by
                           those individuals at your installation who are
                           responsible  for  the  applications  the  file
                           would  be  used   for.    The   default   file
                           specification   is   SYS:formsname.ALP,  where


                                    3-10
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ALIGN)
                                  (ALIGN)


                           formsname is  the  name  of  the  form  to  be
                           aligned,  such as NARROW.  This alignment file
                           (or any supplied by an application individual)
                           has  a  format  of  one printed page of output
                           that can be repeated on the  line  printer  so
                           that you can align the paper.

   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        If you specify the ALIGN command and the alignment file cannot be
        found, the following error message appears:

             hh:mm:ss        Printer n  --Alignment Error--
                        Cannot read ALIGN file 'filespec'

        If you specify the ALIGN command with the /STOP switch while  the
        print request is printing, the following error message appears:

             hh:mm:ss        Printer n  --/STOP Illegal--
                        Alignment not in Progress

        If you specify  the  ALIGN  command  while  an  alignment  is  in
        progress, the following error message appears:

             hh:mm:ss        Printer n  --Alignment already in Progress--


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify line printer 0 in the ALIGN  command  to  align  some
            special forms and specify a repeat-count of 15.

                _____ _______ _ _____________________
            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 /REPEAT-COUNT:15<RET>
            OPR>
            10:12:07        Printer 0  --Alignment Scheduled--        
            OPR>

        2.  Specify line  printer  0  in  the  ALIGN  command  for  forms
            alignment  with the use of the alignment file PAYCHK.ALP.  By
            the default  values  of  the  /REPEAT-COUNT  and  the  /PAUSE
            switches,  the ALIGN command repeats the file 25 times with a
            pause of 10 seconds between repeats.

                _____ _______ _ _______________
            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 PAYCHK.ALP<RET>
            OPR>
             9:34:12        Printer 0  --Alignment Scheduled--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify line  printer  3  in  the  ALIGN  command  for  forms
            alignment  with  a  pause of 30 seconds between repeats.  The
            forms are aligned after one repeat and you stop the alignment


                                    3-11
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ALIGN)
                                  (ALIGN)


            of forms on line printer 3.

                _____ _______ _ ______________
            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /PAUSE:30<RET>
            OPR>
            10:34:03        Printer 3  --Alignment Scheduled--
                _____ _______ _ __________
            OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /STOP<RET>
            OPR>
            10:38:29        Printer 3  --Alignment Discontinued--
            OPR>












































                                    3-12
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (BACKSPACE)
                                (BACKSPACE)


   BACKSPACE - Backspacing Files by Page
   BACKSPACE - Backspacing Files by Page



   Function
   Function

        The BACKSPACE  command  reprints  pages  in  the  file  currently
        printing on the line printer.

        At various times, you may have to  backspace  a  particular  file
        that  is currently being printed on the line printer, for example
        when the forms become jammed  in  the  printing  mechanism.   The
        BACKSPACE  command allows you to backspace the print file so that
        the pages of the file that were jammed  or  miscorrectly  printed
        can be repeated.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>BACKSPACE keyword nn (or) LAT /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by its alias name

        or followed by its unit number:

                                      nn

        or                            LAT

        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                      /COPIES:nnnn
                                      /FILE
                                      /PAGES:nnnn


   Keywords
   Keywords

        PRINTER            specifies the line  printer  (output  device).
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the
|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.



                                    3-13
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (BACKSPACE)
                                (BACKSPACE)


        nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                           that   will   backspace   the  file  currently
                           printing (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,
                           and  so  forth).   You  must specify this unit
                           number; there is no default.

        LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

             PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

             SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

             SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric


                                    3-14
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (BACKSPACE)
                                (BACKSPACE)


                           characters in length.




















































                                    3-15
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (BACKSPACE)
                                (BACKSPACE)


   Switches
   Switches

        You must specify one of the following switches:

        /COPIES:nnnn       specifies the number of additional  copies  to
                           be  printed.   The number you specify is added
                           to the number of copies that the  user  queued
                           with  the  PRINT  command.   For example, if a
                           user issues the command:

                                PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25

                           and  you  issue  the  BACKSPACE  command  with
                           /COPIES:10  while  FOO.BAR  is printing on the
                           line  printer,  the  total  number  of  copies
                           printed will be 35.

        /FILE              specifies that one file be backspaced  when  a
                           multifile  PRINT  request  has been given by a
                           user.  For  example,  if  a  user  issues  the
                           command:

                                PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR

                           and you issue the BACKSPACE command with /FILE
                           while   FOO3.BAR   is  printing  on  the  line
                           printer, FOO2.BAR will be printed again.

        /PAGES:nnnn        specifies the number of pages to be backspaced
                           for  the file that is currently being printed.
                           The /PAGES:  switch  is  the  default  of  the
                           BACKSPACE  command.   If  you  do  not specify
                           either the /COPIES:  or the /FILE switch, then
                           you  must  specify  the  /PAGES:  switch.  The
                           number  (nnnn)  you  specify  refers  to   the
                           physical number of pages and not to the number
                           of pages that contains the file on disk.

|       Followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions


                                    3-16
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (BACKSPACE)
                                (BACKSPACE)


        When you give a BACKSPACE PRINTER command, the system prints  the
        output  in  the  printer  buffer  (which  may  contain on or more
        printed  pages)  before  BACKSPACing  the  number  of  pages  you
        specify.  Therefore, when you use the /PAGES:  switch, you should
        add two or three pages to the total number of pages you  wish  to
        BACKSPACE.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify line printer 0 in the BACKSPACE  command  to  add  an
            additional 15 copies to a print request of 15 copies.

                _________ _______ _ _______________
            OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>
            OPR>
            13:43:53        Printer 0  --Backspaced 15 Copies--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify line printer 2 in the BACKSPACE command to  backspace
            one file from the file currently printing.

                _________ _______ _ __________
            OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>
            OPR>
            11:34:23        Printer 2  --Backspaced 1 File--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify line printer 1 in the BACKSPACE command to  backspace
            12  pages from the page currently printing because of a paper
            jam.

                _________ _______ _ _____________
            OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>
            OPR>
            10:23:50        Printer 1  --Backspaced 12 Pages--
            OPR>



















                                    3-17
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (CANCEL)
                                  (CANCEL)


   CANCEL - Canceling Requests
   CANCEL - Canceling Requests



   Function
   Function

        The  CANCEL  command  cancels  any  job  request  that  is  being
        processed or is waiting to be processed.  In addition, the CANCEL
        command can be used to cancel any user's request for  a  tape  or
        structure mount.

        When a user submits a request for a job  to  be  processed  or  a
        request  to  mount  a  tape  or  structure,  the system assigns a
        request number to the request.  To display the  requests  at  any
        time,  give  the  OPR  command SHOW QUEUES.  The requests will be
        displayed with the request numbers and the names of the users who
        submitted the jobs.  You cancel requests by specifying either the
        request number or the user name.  Optionally, you can cancel  all
        requests for a particular device or those of a particular type on
        the specified device.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>CANCEL keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-REQUEST
                                      CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                      MOUNT-REQUEST
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                      PLOTTER-REQUEST
                                      PRINTER-REQUEST

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      request-id-number
                                      user-name
                                      *

        and for MOUNT-REQUEST, the argument:

                                      structure-name:

        and, optionally, the switch:  /REASON:comment

        and, optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::



                                    3-18
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (CANCEL)
                                  (CANCEL)


|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-REQUEST      specifies either a  job  in  the  batch  queue
                           waiting to be processed or a batch job that is
                           currently processing in a batch stream.

        CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST

                           specifies either a  job  for  the  card  punch
                           waiting  to  be  processed  or  a  job that is
                           currently being output on the card punch.

        MOUNT-REQUEST      specifies either a mount request  for  a  tape
                           mount   or   a   structure  mount.   With  the
                           MOUNT-REQUEST  keyword,  you  can  specify   a
                           single  mount request-id-number or a structure
                           name,  and  an  optional  /REASON:.   If   you
                           specify  a  structure name, the CANCEL command
                           cancels all requests for that structure.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST

                           specifies either  a  job  for  the  paper-tape
                           punch   waiting  to  be  processed  or  a  job
                           currently  being  output  on  the   paper-tape
                           punch.

        PLOTTER-REQUEST    specifies either a job for the plotter waiting
                           to  be  processed  or  a  job  currently being
                           output on the plotter.

        PRINTER-REQUEST    specifies either a job for  the  line  printer
                           waiting  to  be  processed  or a job currently
                           printing on a line printer.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        request-id-number  cancels a single request as specified  by  the
                           appropriate  keyword  for  a  particular user.
                           The number can be a job that is either waiting
                           to  be processed or is currently processing on
                           a device or in a batch stream.

        user-name          cancels  all  jobs   as   specified   by   the
                           appropriate  keyword  for  a  particular user.


                                    3-19
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (CANCEL)
                                  (CANCEL)


                           The user name can be from 1 to 39 alphanumeric
                           characters  (normally the user's surname) that
                           identifies  the   user   and   his   logged-in
                           directory.   Do  not  enclose the user name in
                           angle brackets.  This argument cannot be  used
                           with the MOUNT-REQUEST keyword.

        *                  cancels  all  jobs   as   specified   by   the
                           appropriate  keyword for all requests, waiting
                           and processing, from all users.  This argument
                           cannot be used with the MOUNT-REQUEST keyword.

        structure-name:    specifies a 1- to 6-character  structure  name
                           that  users  have requested you to mount.  The
                           name must end with  a  colon  (:).   When  you
                           cancel  a  MOUNT-REQUEST for a structure name,
                           all requests  for  that  structure  mount  are
                           canceled  providing  that  the requests are in
                           the waiting status.  (Refer to the description
                           of  the  SHOW QUEUES MOUNT-REQUESTS command in
                           this chapter.) If  the  structure  is  in  the
                           dismount status, you must cancel the structure
                           separately, using the  request-id-number  with
                           the CANCEL command.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           double colon (::) following the node  name  is
                           optional.   This  switch can only be used with
                           the * argument.

        /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment as to why  the
                           MOUNT-REQUEST to mount a tape or structure has
                           been canceled.  This comment  appears  in  the
                           batch log file and at the user's terminal.  If
                           the comment is more than one line  in  length,
                           you can end the first line with a hyphen and a
                           carriage return and continue  the  comment  on
                           the  next  line.  If you press carriage return


                                    3-20
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (CANCEL)
                                  (CANCEL)


                           immediately after the colon, OPR responds with
                           the  instruction:   ENTER  TEXT  AND TERMINATE
                           WITH ^Z.  You can then enter as many lines  of
                           text  as necessary.  When your comment(s) have
                           been entered, press the CTRL key and  the  key
                           labeled Z simultaneously (CTRL/Z) and the OPR>
                           prompt reappears.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        You cannot cancel any mount request after the tape  or  structure
        has been mounted on the device.  If you need to do this, you must
        ABORT the job and DISMOUNT the tape or structure.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify  the  CANCEL  MOUNT-REQUEST  command  to  cancel  all
            requests  for  the  mounting of structure SNOOPY:.  All mount
            requests for this structure are in the waiting status.

                ______ _____________ _______ _____________
            OPR>CANCEL MOUNT-REQUEST SNOOPY: /REASON:<RET>
            [Enter text and terminate with ^Z]
            ______ ____ _________ ___________
            CANNOT FIND STRUCTURE SNOOPY<RET>
            _____ ___ _ __________
            THANK YOU - OPERATIONS^Z
                                   ^
                                   |
                                 <CTRL/Z>
            OPR>
            15:32:08        --3 Mount Requests Canceled--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST for all batch requests  from
            user HOVSEPIAN.

                ______ _____________ ______________
            OPR>CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST HOVSEPIAN<RET>
            OPR>
            12:09:34        --2 Jobs Canceled--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the CANCEL  PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST  to  cancel  all
            requests from all users for that device.

                ______ ________________ ______
            OPR>CANCEL PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH *<RET>
            OPR>
            09:34:56        --7 Jobs Canceled--
            OPR>





                                    3-21
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (CLOSE)
                                  (CLOSE)


   CLOSE - Closing the Log Buffer File
   CLOSE - Closing the Log Buffer File



   Function
   Function

        The CLOSE command closes the current ORION log  buffer  file  and
        creates a new log buffer file.  The closed log file is written to
        disk so that you can copy or print an up-to-date file.

        The ORION log buffer file records all OPR-to-ORION  commands  and
        transactions performed at the operator's console.  When the CLOSE
        command  is  issued,  these   commands   and   transactions   are
        transferred  to  the ORION-SYSTEM.LOG file and the buffer file is
        cleared.  You can then print the  ORION-SYSTEM.LOG  file  on  the
        line printer to obtain a hard-copy of all the operating processes
        for a given time period.

        You may choose a name other than ORION-SYSTEM.LOG for  the  ORION
        log  buffer  file at GALGEN time.  Please see your System Manager
        in reference to GALGEN.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>CLOSE keyword /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        LOG

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        LOG                specifies the ORION log buffer file  that  was
                           created  with the start-up of ORION.  For this
                           logging  facility  to  occur,  you  must  have
                           previously  given  the ENABLE LOGGING command.
                           The ENABLE LOGGING  command  is  described  in
                           this  chapter.   To stop the logging facility,
                           you must give  the  DISABLE  LOGGING  command.
                           The  DISABLE  LOGGING  command is described in
                           this chapter.

   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within


                                    3-22
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (CLOSE)
                                  (CLOSE)


|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Example
   Example

        1.  Specify the CLOSE command in its full context  to  close  the
            ORION log file and open a new log file automatically.

                _____ ________
            OPR>CLOSE LOG<RET>
            OPR>







































                                    3-23
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CONTINUE)
                                 (CONTINUE)


   CONTINUE - Restarting a Stopped Job
   CONTINUE - Restarting a Stopped Job


   Function
   Function

        The CONTINUE command continues a job request on a device that was
        temporarily stopped with the STOP command.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>CONTINUE keyword nn /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument
                                      READER

        followed by the stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        or a range of numbers:        n:m

|       and, optionally, one or both of the following switches:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                      /NODE:node-name::

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|       followed by its alias name

        or followed by its unit number:

                                      nn
|  
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

                                      CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::


                                    3-24
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CONTINUE)
                                 (CONTINUE)


        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name












































                                    3-25
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CONTINUE)
                                 (CONTINUE)


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch stream (or  range
                           of batch streams) that was temporarily stopped
                           from processing a batch job.  A  batch  stream
                           is  a  pseudo-terminal that interacts with the
                           system to execute a batch job.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch  device  (or
                           range   of   card-punch   devices)   that  was
                           temporarily   stopped   from   processing    a
                           card-punch job.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                           (or  range  of  paper-tape-punch devices) that
                           was  temporarily  stopped  from  processing  a
                           paper-tape-punch job.

        PLOTTER            specifies  a  particular  plotter  device  (or
                           range of plotter devices) that was temporarily
                           stopped from processing a plotter job.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                     n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                           TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                           configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                           processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                           processors.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

             DQS queuename 

                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service


                                    3-26
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CONTINUE)
                                 (CONTINUE)


                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is processed.  The double colon (::) following
                           the node name is not needed.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"



                                    3-27
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CONTINUE)
                                 (CONTINUE)


                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

        READER             specifies a particular card-reader device  (or
                           range   of   card-reader   devices)  that  was
                           temporarily   stopped   from   processing    a
                           card-reader job.

        nn                 specifies  the  stream  number  of  the  batch
                           stream  to  be continued or the unit number of
                           the  input/output   device   that   has   been
                           temporarily  stopped.   You  must specify this
                           stream/unit number.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream/unit numbers.  You
                           can  specify  this  range  instead of a single
                           stream/unit number.  The colon  must  separate
                           the   two   numbers.   The  n  represents  the
                           low-order number  and  the  m  represents  the
                           high-order number.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::) following the node name is optional.




                                    3-28
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CONTINUE)
                                 (CONTINUE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the CONTINUE command  to  continue  the  card  reader
            after it was stopped to prevent a card-reader jam.

                ________ ______ ______
            OPR>CONTINUE READER 0<RET>
            OPR>
             9:23:19        Reader 0  --Continued--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the CONTINUE command to continue a batch stream  that
            was previously stopped.

                ________ ____________ ______
            OPR>CONTINUE BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>
            OPR>
            12:10:12        Batch-stream 2   --Continued--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the CONTINUE command to continue  all  line  printers
            after they were stopped temporarily.

                ________ _______ ________
            OPR>CONTINUE PRINTER 0:1<RET>
            OPR>
            11:40:23        Printer 0   --Continued--
            OPR>
            11:40:24        Printer 1   --Continued--
            OPR>


























                                    3-29
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (DEFINE)
                                  (DEFINE)


   DEFINE - Defining a Node
   DEFINE - Defining a Node



   Function
   Function

        The DEFINE command specifies the name and  characteristics  of  a
        node  that  is  to  perform  IBM communications.  DEFINE sets the
        node's parameters to the  default  parameters  of  the  SET  NODE
        command.  Refer to the SET NODE command.

        The DEFINE command is applicable only if  your  installation  has
        IBM  communications  software.   For  more  information about IBM
                                                           _______    ___
        communications   software,   refer    to    the    TOPS-20    IBM
        _____________________ _______
        Emulation/Termination Manual.

                                                               __________
        For information about SNA workstations, refer to  the  DECnet/SNA
        _______  ______  ___  _____  ______  ___ __________ _____
        TOPS-20  Remote  Job  Entry  User's  and Operator's Guide and the
        __________ _______ __________ _____
        DECnet/SNA Gateway Management Guide.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name[::] keyword /switch arguments<RET>

        where:

        node-name must be:            a valid node name in your  network,
                                      optionally  followed  by two colons
                                      (::).

        keyword, switch and argument format is:

             2780             /                                       \
             3780            /  /SIGNON-REQUIRED    mode  port  line   \
             HASP            \  /NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED                    /
             SNA-WORKSTATION  \ ACCESS-NAME name GATEWAY gateway-name /

        keyword is one of:            2780
                                      3780
                                      HASP
                                      SNA-WORKSTATION

        switch (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP) is one of:

                                      /SIGNON-REQUIRED
                                      /NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED


        arguments (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP) are all of the following,
        separated by spaces:          


                                    3-30
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (DEFINE)
                                  (DEFINE)


             mode is one of:          EMULATION
                                      TERMINATION

             port is a valid portnumber:

                                      nn

             line is a valid line number:

                                      n

        arguments (for SNA-WORKSTATION) are all of the following,
        separated by spaces:

                                      ACCESS-NAME name
                                      GATEWAY gateway-name::


   DEFINE NODE parameters are further described below:

        node-name          specifies the node name of the node to perform
                           IBM  communications.   The  double  colon (::)
                           following the node name is optional.


   Keywords
   Keywords

        2780, 3780, HASP, or SNA-WORKSTATION

                           specifies  a  protocol  to  use  (2780,  3780,
                           SNA-WORKSTATION,  or HASP multileaving).  HASP
                           is the default.


   Switches
   Switches (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP):

        /SIGNON-REQUIRED   specifies that the remote station must sign on
                           when  starting  up the node.  For emulation, a
                           signon card must be sent to  the  IBM  system.
                           For   termination,   a  signon  card  must  be
                           verified from the station (node) and the  card
                           must  be  the  first one read.  In addition, a
                           signon file must exist in the <DN60>  area  in
                           the format of <node-name>.SON.









                                    3-31
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (DEFINE)
                                  (DEFINE)


        /NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED

                           specifies that the user at the node  does  not
                           need to sign on when starting up the node (see
                           /SIGNON-REQUIRED).      The     default     is
                           /SIGNON-REQUIRED.

   Arguments
   Arguments (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP)

        EMULATION or TERMINATION

                           specifies the mode.  EMULATION specifies  that
                           the  node  is  to  communicate  with  a  host.
                           TERMINATION specifies  that  the  node  is  to
                           communicate    with    a    remote    station.
                           TERMINATION is the default.

        nn                 specifies the port number from the  front  end
                           to the TOPS-20 host.

        n                  specifies the line number from the  front  end
                           to  the  modem  communicating  with the remote
                           site.

                                  CAUTION

           For a KL10, the port number  can  be  either  11  (for
           DTE1),  12  (for DTE2), or 13 (for DTE3).  For a KS10,
           the port number can be either 0 (for KMC/DMC  line  0)
           or  1  (for  KMC/DMC  line  1).  Never use port 0 on a
           KL10.

           For a KL10, the line number must be from 0 to 5; for a
           KS10, the line number must be either 0 or 1.


   Arguments
   Arguments (for SNA-WORKSTATION only):

        ACCESS-NAME name   is the name of a list of  access  information,
                           as  defined  in  the  .CFG  file  for  the SNA
                           gateway.

        GATEWAY gateway-name::

                           is the name  of  the  SNA  gateway  optionally
                           followed by a double colon (::).







                                    3-32
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (DEFINE)
                                  (DEFINE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You use the DEFINE command to define node IBM2.

                ______ ____ ______ ____ _________ __ ______
            OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM2:: HASP EMULATION 11 0<RET>
            OPR>
             9:18:34        -- Define for Node IBM2 Accepted --
            OPR>

        2.  You use the DEFINE command to define a remote station  as  an
            IBM 3780 to communicate from the host.

                ______ ____ ______ ____ ___________ __ ______
            OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM3:: 3780 TERMINATION 12 1<RET>
            OPR>
            15:32:09        -- Define for Node IBM3 Accepted --
            OPR>

        3.  You use the DEFINE command to define a node as an
            SNA-WORKSTATION.
                ______ ____ ______ _______________ _________________
            OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM4:: SNA-WORKSTATION ACCESS-NAME-<RET>
             ___ _______ __________
             RJE GATEWAY TOIBM<RET>
            OPR>
            16:32:09        -- Define for Node IBM4 Accepted --
            OPR>





























                                    3-33
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


   DEFINE - Defining Aliases for Printer Specifications
|  DEFINE - Defining Aliases for Printer Specifications
|  
|  
|  
   Function
|  Function
|  
|       The DEFINE ALIAS command  allows  you  to  define,  redefine,  or
|       undefine  an  alias name for printer specifications for DQS, LAT,
|       local, and cluster printers.  Once an  alias  is  defined  for  a
|       printer, that printer can be specified either by its alias or its
|       printer specification.
|  
|       The SHOW ALIAS command displays each printer alias name  relative
|       to its printer specification.
|  
|       Once you have defined an  alias  name  for  a  printer,  you  can
|       reference  that  printer  by  its  alias  in  the  syntax  of the
|       following commands:
|  
|       ABORT PRINTER
|       ALIGN PRINTER
|       BACKSPACE PRINTER
|       CONTINUE PRINTER
|       DEFINE ALIAS
|       FORWARDSPACE PRINTER
|       NEXT PRINTER
|       REQUEUE PRINTER
|       ROUTE PRINTER
|       SET PRINTER
|       SHOW ALIAS
|       SHOW PARAMETERS PRINTER
|       SHOW STATUS PRINTER
|       SHUTDOWN PRINTER
|       START PRINTER
|       STOP PRINTER
|       SUPPRESS PRINTER
|  
|  
   Format
|  Format
|  
|       OPR>DEFINE ALIAS alias-name keyword nn argument /switch<RET>
|  
|       where:
|  
|       alias-name                    is  a  unique  name   up   to   six
|                                     alphanumeric    characters    long,
|                                     including    the     non-alphabetic
|                                     characters:  '$', '.', or '_'.  The
|                                     first character of  an  alias  name
|                                     must be a non-numeric character and
|                                     cannot begin with a  'C',  'D',  or


                                    3-34
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|                                     'L'.
|  
|       and, optionally, one or both of the following switches:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|                                     /NODE:node-name::
|  
|       where keyword is one of the following:
|  
|                                     CLUSTER nn
|                                             n:m
|       followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|  
|       or                            DQS queuename
|       followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|  
|       or                            LAT
|  
|       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
|                                     SERVER "name"
|  
|       or followed by:               PORT "name"
|                                     SERVER "name"
|  
|       followed by the unit number:
|  
|                                     nn
|  
|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|  
   Keywords
|  Keywords
|  
|       CLUSTER nn         specifies a printer on a remote node within  a
|                          TOPS-20  cluster.   A  TOPS-20  cluster  is  a
|                          loosely coupled configuration of  between  two
|                          and  four  TOPS-20 processors.  Each processor
|                          in the configuration is identified by  a  node
|                          name.    For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,  and
|                          LOUIE::  can be three nodes within  a  cluster
|                          of TOPS-20 processors.
|  
|                 NODE node-name::
|  
|                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
|                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
|                          following the node name is not needed.
|  
|                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::


                                    3-35
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
|                          be the local node or an alias.
|  
|       DQS queuename      specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
|                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
|                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
|                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
|                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
|                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
|                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
|                          and dollar signs.
|  
|                 NODE node-name::
|  
|                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
|                          is processed.  The double colon (::) following
|                          the node name is not needed.
|  
|                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
|                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
|                          alias.
|  
|       LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
|                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
|                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
|                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
|                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
|                          between your system, running LAT software, and
|                          the resource printer terminal.
|  
|                          You     cannot     use      the      following
|                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:
|  
|                                    SERVICE name only
|                                    SERVER name only
|                                    PORT name only
|                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
|                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names
|  
|                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
|                          about LAT communications.
|  
|                 PORT "name"
|  
|                          specifies the communication path  between  the
|                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
|                          access point that the node represents  to  the
|                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
|                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,


                                    3-36
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|                          and dollar signs.
|  
|                 SERVICE "name"
|  
|                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
|                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
|                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
|                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
|                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
|                          signs.
|  
|                 SERVER "name"
|  
|                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
|                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
|                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
|                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
|                          characters in length.
|  
|  
   Switches
|  Switches
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.
|  
|  
   Examples
|  Examples
|  
|       1.  Use the DEFINE ALIAS command to define an alias to a  printer
|           specification.
|  
                ______ _____ ___ _______ _ ____ _____________
|           OPR>DEFINE ALIAS FOO CLUSTER 1 NODE GIDNEY::<RET>
|           OPR>
|            9:18:34        -- Alias FOO Defined --
|           OPR>
|  
|           This command assigns the alias FOO to the CLUSTER  printer  1
|           for node GIDNEY.
|  
|       2.  Use the DEFINE ALIAS command to redefine  the  alias  FOO  to
|           alias BAR.
|  
                ______ _____ ___ ________
|           OPR>DEFINE ALIAS BAR FOO<RET>
|           OPR>
|           15:32:09        -- Alias FOO Defined --


                                    3-37
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|           OPR>
|  
|           This command changes the alias name from FOO to BAR.
|  
|       3.  Use the DEFINE ALIAS command to undefine the alias BAR.
|  
                ______ _____ ________
|           OPR>DEFINE ALIAS BAR<RET>
|           OPR>
|           16:32:09        -- Alias BAR Undefined --
|           OPR>
|  










































                                    3-38
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


   DISABLE - Stopping System Process Features
   DISABLE - Stopping System Process Features



   Function
   Function

        The DISABLE  command  allows  you  to  turn  off  (or  stop)  the
        following features:

        1.  Automatic Volume Recognition feature (AVR) for magnetic  tape
            mounts.

        2.  Class  scheduling  for  various  job  processings   and   the
            accounting of CPU time assigned to different job classes.

        3.  File retrieval requests for off-line files.

        4.  The ORION logging facility for recording  OPR/ORION  commands
            and transactions.

        5.  The output display of various groupings of messages that were
            enabled with the ENABLE command.

        6.  Queue  requests  so  that  users  can  request  jobs  to   be
            processed.

        7.  Limit the output display for unprivileged users at  a  remote
            node.

        8.  Printing of log files on specific local printer(s).

        9.  DECnet connection attempts by NEBULA to remote NEBULAs in the
            TOPS-20 cluster.

       10.  Reporting by NEBULA of DECnet connection failures  to  remote
            NEBULAs in the cluster.

       11.  SEMI-OPR  commands  for  accessing  information  and  limited
            control of some output devices.
|  
|      12.  The sending of ORION messages to one or more remote nodes  in
|           a TOPS-20 cluster.
|  
|      13.  Unprivileged users from seeing all queued  print  jobs  on  a
|           remote node in the TOPS-20 cluster.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>DISABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>



                                    3-39
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


        where keyword can be one of the following:

                   AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION
|                  BROADCAST-MESSAGES
                   CLASS-SCHEDULER
                   DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS
                   FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAITS
                   LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS
                   LOGGING
                   OUTPUT-DISPLAY
                   PRINT-LOGFILES n
                   QUEUE-REQUESTS
                   REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES
                   SEMI-OPR
                   UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

        followed by one of these arguments:  (AVR only)

                                        TAPE-DRIVES
                                        tape-drive-name:

        or followed by one of these arguments:  (OUTPUT-DISPLAY only)

                                        ALL-MESSAGES
                                        BATCH-MESSAGES
                                        BUGCHK-MESSAGES
                                        BUGINF-MESSAGES
                                        CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                        CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
                                        DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
                                        DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
                                        FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
                                        LCP-MESSAGES
                                        MOUNT-MESSAGES
                                        NCP-MESSAGES
                                        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                        PLOTTER-MESSAGES
                                        PRINTER-MESSAGES
                                        READER-MESSAGES
                                        SYSTEM-MESSAGES
                                        USER-MESSAGES

        and, optionally, one or more of these switches:   (OUTPUT-DISPLAY
        keyword   only,   not   for   BUGCHK-,   BUGINF-,   DECNET-,   or
        SYSTEM-MESSAGES arguments)

                                        /INFORMATION-MESSAGES
                                        /JOB-MESSAGES
                                        /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

|       and optionally  the  following  keyword  for  the  OUTPUT-DISPLAY


                                    3-40
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


|       keyword:
|  
|                                       NODE

        or for DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS and
        REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES, the optional switch:

                                         /NODE:node-name::

|       or the optional switch (except for OUTPUT-DISPLAY):
|  
|                                        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

   Keywords
   Keywords

        AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION

                           specifies that  this  AVR  system  feature  be
                           disabled.   AVR  allows  you  to mount labeled
                           tapes without the need to IDENTIFY  the  tapes
                           to  the  system  with  a keyin.  When this AVR
                           feature is disabled, you  must  IDENTIFY  each
                           labeled  tape you mount.  Unlabeled tapes must
                           always be identified to the  system  with  the
                           IDENTIFY  command.   (Refer to the description
                           of the IDENTIFY command.)

|       BROADCAST-MESSAGES
|  
|                          specifies to disable broadcast messages, which
|                          allows  ORION  messages generated on the local
|                          node to be sent to one or more  remote  nodes.
|                          It  also  allows  selective  sending  of these
|                          messages.

        CLASS-SCHEDULER    specifies a system program  be  disabled  that
                           allocates  portions  (or  percentages)  of the
                           central processor  unit  (CPU)  to  individual
                           groups  of  users.   These  groups  are called
                           classes and are set up by your System  Manager
                           in  the n-CONFIG.CMD file at system generation
                           time.  When the CLASS-SCHEDULER  is  disabled,
                           all  jobs  entered  into the system receive an
                           equal amount of CPU time; allocation is  on  a
                           first-come-first-served basis.

        DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS

                           specifies to disable DECnet  connections  from
                           being  made by NEBULA to remote systems within
                           the TOPS-20 cluster or to a particular  remote


                                    3-41
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


                           system.

        FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAIT

                           specifies  that  when  a  user  or  batch  job
                           requests  a  file  that  is off-line due to an
                           archival or a migration, the job does not wait
                           until  the request has been satisfied.  (Refer
                           to  the  TOPS-20  Operator's   Guide   for   a
                           discussion  of  archived  and migrated files.)
                           Instead, the user receives  an  error  message
                           indicating  that  the file cannot be retrieved
                           and the batch job ends in an error  (if  error
                           recovery has not been specified in the control
                           file).  If error recovery has  been  specified
                           in  the  control  file,  the  job continues to
                           process.

        LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS

                           specifies  to  return  from  enabled  printers
                           (ENABLE  PRINT-LOGFILES n), thus disabling the
                           printing of batch log files and spooled  files
                           on   specific  local  printers.   (See  ENABLE
                           LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS.)

        LOGGING            specifies   that   the   centralized   logging
                           facility  of  ORION be disabled (this facility
                           logs  all   messages   passing   through   the
                           operating  system and stores these messages in
                           a log file buffer).   When  this  facility  is
                           disabled,  there  are  no  records kept of the
                           messages and interactions  between  ORION  and
                           the   system.   However,  the  CTY  shows  all
                           messages and  interactions  if  you  have  not
                           DISABLEd the OUTPUT-DISPLAY of ALL-MESSAGES at
                           the CTY.

        OUTPUT-DISPLAY     specifies  that  the  display   of   specified
                           message groupings on your console be disabled.
                           The  groupings  are  specified  as  the  valid
                           arguments and switches to this keyword.

|            NODE          allows you to selectively choose  which  ORION
|                          messages   from  the  indicated  node  in  the
|                          cluster  are   displayed   on   the   operator
|                          terminal.   You  can specify the local node or
|                          an asterisk (*).  The asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        PRINT-LOGFILES n   specifies to stop an enabled local printer (n)


                                    3-42
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


                           from  printing  batch  log  files  and spooled
                           files.  (See ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES.)

        QUEUE-REQUESTS     specifies that  all  users  be  disabled  from
                           making any queue request.  When queue requests
                           are disabled, no user can submit  a  batch  or
                           reader  job,  a  card-punch, paper-tape-punch,
                           plotter, or a printer request to  the  system.
                           If  the  user  attempts to submit a job of any
                           kind, the message  "?Operator  Has  Restricted
                           Queue  Entry  Commands"  appears at the user's
                           terminal.

        REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES

                           specifies  to  discontinue  reporting   DECnet
                           connection  failures  to  remote  systems or a
                           specific remote system in the cluster.

        SEMI-OPR           specifies to disallow users with SEMI-OPERATOR
                           privilege  to  have limited control of certain
                           output  devices   and   to   access   operator
                           information.   The  OPR commands permitted and
                           their limitations are defined in Chapter 2.

        UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

                           specifies that an unprivileged user  may  only
                           view  his  own print requests on a remote node
                           in the cluster as a result of that user giving
                           an   @INFORMATION   OUTPUT  /DESTINATION-NODE:
                           command.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        The following  arguments  are  valid  for  the  AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-
        RECOGNITION keyword:

        TAPE-DRIVES        specifies that all tape drives on  the  system
                           be disabled from using AVR.

        tape-drive-name:   specifies the tape drive name that is disabled
                           from  using  AVR.  The colon must be included.
                           The name is in the format of MTAn:, where n is
                           the tape drive number.

        The  following  arguments  are  valid  with  the   OUTPUT-DISPLAY
        keyword.   Each  argument  suppresses  the  printing of a type of
        message on your OPR terminal.



                                    3-43
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


        Message Type       Cause

        ALL-MESSAGES       all the  types  of  messages  defined  by  the
                           following arguments

        BATCH-MESSAGES     users requesting BATCH processing

        BUGCHK-MESSAGES    BUGCHKs encountered by the system

        BUGINF-MESSAGES    BUGINFs encountered by the system

        CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           users requesting card punch output

        CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES

                           card reader  file  processing  or  batch  jobs
                           submitted with the /READER switch

        DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES

                           DECnet events generated by NMLT20

        DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES

                           failure of an attempt to establish a  link  to
                           another node

        FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES

                           users requesting retrieval of files that  have
                           been archived or migrated to tape

        LCP-MESSAGES       LAT events noted by LCP

        MOUNT-MESSAGES     users requesting tape and structure mounts and
                           dismounts

        NCP-MESSAGES       users starting and shutting down network nodes
                           (valid  only  if  your installation has DECnet
                           software)

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           users requesting paper-tape-punch output

        PLOTTER-MESSAGES   users requesting plotter output

        PRINTER-MESSAGES   users requesting line printer output



                                    3-44
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


        READER-MESSAGES    users  requesting  card  reader  input   (card
                           reader jobs become batch requests)

        SYSTEM-MESSAGES    various  system  messages  such  as:   job   0
                           crashes,   swapping  space,  SPT  space,  disk
                           space, and parity error conditions encountered
                           by the system

        USER-MESSAGES      users  making  requests  to  you  through  the
                           PLEASE program


   Switches
   Switches

        You  can  specify  the  following  switches  with  any   of   the
        OUTPUT-DISPLAY  arguments  except  BUGCHK-, BUGINF-, DECNET-, and
        SYSTEM-MESSAGES.  If you do not specify  one  of  these  switches
        with  any  OUTPUT-DISPLAY  argument,  all  three  are  assumed by
        default.

        /INFORMATION-MESSAGES

                           prohibits the printing of  messages  that  are
                           informational,  such as errors due to problems
                           in an application program.  Note that  one-way
                           PLEASE  messages  from  users  are  considered
                           information messages, since no  response  from
                           you is necessary.

        /JOB-MESSAGES      prohibits the printing of messages that notify
                           you  when  a  device  or  stream  has begun to
                           process a job request and when the job request
                           has ended its processing.

        /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

                           prohibits the printing of messages that notify
                           you   of   some  action  to  be  performed  as
                           requested by a user or a processing job.  Also
                           included  are  messages that require action to
                           be taken, but are not  job  or  WTOR  related.
                           All  operator-action messages must be answered
                           with the RESPOND command.

|                          NODE prohibits an  operator  from  selectively
|                          filtering  which  WTOs  and  WTORs from remote
|                          nodes are displayed on the operator terminal.

        You   can    specify    the    following    switch    with    the
        DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS     and     REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES
        keywords:


                                    3-45
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.

|       You can specify the following switch with all keywords except the
|       OUTPUT-DISPLAY keyword:
|  














































                                    3-46
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISABLE)
                                 (DISABLE)


|            /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You have scheduled a system shutdown in two  hours  and  your
            queues have approximately two hours' worth of jobs left to be
            processed.  You disable queue requests so that the queues can
            be emptied before the system shutdown.

                _______ ___________________
            OPR>DISABLE QUEUE-REQUESTS<RET>
            OPR>
            16:34:03        --System Queue's Entry Processing Disabled--
            OPR>

        2.  You have started OPR and want  to  display  only  information
            messages.   By  default when OPR is started, all messages are
            displayed.  Therefore, you must disable all  messages  except
            information messages.

            @ENABLE<RET>
            $OPR<RET>
                _______ ____________ ________________________________
            OPR>DISABLE ALL-MESSAGES /JOB-MESSAGES/USER-MESSAGES<RET>
            OPR>
             8:45:18        Output display for OPR modified --
            OPR>

        3.  You DISABLE AVR on tape drive MTA2:   before  you  mount  and
            ready a scratch tape to be initialized.

                _______ ____________________________ __________
            OPR>DISABLE AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>
            OPR>














                                    3-47
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISMOUNT)
                                 (DISMOUNT)


   DISMOUNT - Dismounting a Structure or Tape-drive
   DISMOUNT - Dismounting a Structure or Tape-drive



   Function
   Function

        The DISMOUNT command  allows  you  to  dismount  (and  remove)  a
        structure  currently  mounted  on a disk drive or a magnetic tape
        currently mounted on a tape drive.

        You can dismount a structure without removing the structure  from
        the  disk drive.  The structure is then dismounted from the local
        system and users on the system are prevented  from  mounting  the
        structure from the EXEC.

        You can also dismount a structure and remove the  structure  from
        the  disk  drive.   When  the  DISMOUNT  WITH  REMOVAL command is
        issued, the structure is queued for removal.  If other  local  or
        remote  users  have  mounted the structure, a message asks you if
        you want to proceed.  If you answer NO, the request is  canceled.
        If  you answer YES, the structure is dismounted from every system
        in the cluster, and you are asked to remove it.

        When you issue the DISMOUNT command for a tape  drive,  the  tape
        rewinds  itself completely from the take-up wheel, providing that
        no user is currently using the tape.  If a user is using the tape
        on  the  specified  tape  drive,  OPR  will  reject  the DISMOUNT
        command.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>DISMOUNT keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be:               STRUCTURE
                                            TAPE-DRIVE

        followed by the argument:           structure-name:

        or the argument:                    tape-drive-name:

        optionally followed by one of       NO-REMOVAL
        these arguments: (STRUCTURE only)   REMOVAL

|       optionally followed by the
|       switch:  /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name







                                    3-48
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISMOUNT)
                                 (DISMOUNT)


   Keywords
   Keywords

        STRUCTURE          specifies a disk structure  currently  mounted
                           on a disk drive.

        TAPE-DRIVE         specifies a tape drive  that  has  a  magnetic
                           tape mounted and ready on it.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        structure-name:    specifies the logical name of the structure to
                           dismount   and  remove.   The  colon  must  be
                           included with the  structure  name  specified.
                           An  example  of  a  logical name is DSKC:  for
                           Disk C.

        REMOVAL            specifies that the system giving the  DISMOUNT
                           command  is  to  have exclusive control of the
                           structure.  The system checks for use  of  the
                           structure  by  users  on another system within
                           the  cluster.   If  users  on  another  system
                           within the cluster have mounted the structure,
                           a message asks you whether or not  to  proceed
                           with   the   dismount.   If  the  response  is
                           PROCEED, then the structure  is  automatically
                           dismounted  with NO REMOVAL from all the other
                           systems  within  the  cluster,  and  then  the
                           structure  is  dismounted  for  removal on the
                           local system.

                           If the structure is  not  in  use  by  another
                           system,  the  structure  is dismounted and you
                           are asked to remove it.

                           On  a  non-cluster  system,  REMOVAL  is   the
                           default to the STRUCTURE keyword.

        NO-REMOVAL         dismounts the structure without  checking  for
                           use  of  the structure by users on another CFS
                           system and prints a message telling you not to
                           physically remove the structure.

                           On a CFS system, NO-REMOVAL is  the  STRUCTURE
                           keyword default.

        tape-drive-name:   specifies the logical name of the  tape  drive
                           which   currently  has  the  desired  tape  to
                           dismount on it.  The colon  must  be  included
                           with  the tape drive name.  The name is in the
                           format of MTAn:, where n  is  the  tape  drive


                                    3-49
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISMOUNT)
                                 (DISMOUNT)


                           number.


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        If there are other users who have mounted the structure  and  you
        really  wish  to remove the structure, it is recommended that you
        send a message to all users of the system before you respond with
        YES,  to  allow  all  users  to  complete  their  tasks  on  that
        structure.

        A structure can be  DISMOUNTed  only  if  set  ACKNOWLEDGED;  you
        cannot DISMOUNT a structure that is set IGNORED.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the DISMOUNT with REMOVAL  command  to  dismount  the
            structure DEMO:  from all systems within the cluster.

                ________ _________ _____ ____________
            OPR>DISMOUNT STRUCTURE DEMO: REMOVAL<RET>
            OPR>
            10:14:41  <1>    -- DISMOUNT QUERY --
                            Structure DEMO: (Alias DEMO:) is in use by
                            RONCO::, GIDNEY::, THEP::
                            and can't be removed from the cluster
                            unless it's dismounted with NO-REMOVAL
                            from the systems.
                            Respond with PROCEED to dismount
                            the structure from the above systems or
                            Respond with ABORT to terminate 
                            the dismount request

                _______ _ ____________
            OPR>RESPOND 1 PROCEED<RET>
            OPR>
            10:15:00         -- REMOTE DISMOUNT STATUS --
                            Structure DEMO: dismounted from RONCO::,
                             GIDNEY::, THEP::



                                    3-50
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DISMOUNT)
                                 (DISMOUNT)


            OPR>
            10:15:01         -- STRUCTURE DISMOUNTED --
                            Structure DEMO dismounted

            10:15:01         -- DISMOUNT STRUCTURE --
            Remove DEMO: (alias DEMO:)
            User OPERATOR, Job 66, Terminal 233

            DISK DRIVE INFORMATION                   DISK PACK INFO...
                  Chan-Cont   Disk   Mount   Mount                Usage
             Type   Drive    Status  Status  Count   Name         Options
             ---- --------- -------- ------- -----   ------------ -------
             RA81 7,03,12   Avail    Free            DEMO   (1/1)
            Structure cannot be mounted again unless MOUNTed via OPR
             or until removed

            OPR>

        2.  Specify the DISMOUNT command  to  dismount  the  tape  volume
            currently mounted on tape drive MTA0:.

                ________ __________ __________
            OPR>DISMOUNT TAPE-DRIVE MTA0:<RET>
            OPR>
            16:45:01          -- MTA0:  Unloaded --
            OPR>




























                                    3-51
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


   ENABLE - Allowing System Process Features
   ENABLE - Allowing System Process Features


   Function
   Function

        The ENABLE command allows you to turn on (or start) the following
        features:

        1.  Automatic Volume Recognition feature (AVR) for magnetic  tape
            mounts.

        2.  Class  scheduling  for  various  job  processings   and   the
            accounting of CPU time assigned to different job classes.

        3.  File retrieval requests for off-line files.

        4.  The ORION logging facility for recording  OPR/ORION  commands
            and transactions.

        5.  The output display of various groupings of messages that were
            enabled with the ENABLE command.

        6.  Queue  requests  so  that  users  can  request  jobs  to   be
            processed.

        7.  Limit the output display for unprivileged users at  a  remote
            node.

        8.  Printing of log files on specific local printer(s).

        9.  DECnet connection attempts by NEBULA to remote NEBULAs in the
            TOPS-20 cluster.

       10.  Reporting by NEBULA of DECnet connection failures  to  remote
            NEBULAs in the cluster.

       11.  SEMI-OPR  commands  for  accessing  information  and  limited
            control of some output devices.
|  
|      12.  The sending of ORION messages to one or more remote nodes  in
|           a TOPS-20 cluster.
|  
|      13.  Unprivileged users from seeing all queued  print  jobs  on  a
|           remote node in the TOPS-20 cluster.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>ENABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:


                                    3-52
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


                   AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION
|                  BROADCAST-MESSAGES
                   CLASS-SCHEDULER
                   DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS
                   FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAITS
                   LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS
                   LOGGING
                   OUTPUT-DISPLAY
                   PRINT-LOGFILES n
                   QUEUE-REQUESTS
                   REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES
                   SEMI-OPR
                   UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

        followed by one of these arguments (AVR only):

                                        TAPE-DRIVES
                                        tape-drive-name:

        or followed by one or more of these switches:
        (CLASS-SCHEDULER only)

                                        /CLASS-ASSIGNMENTS:ACCOUNT
                                                           POLICY-PROGRAM

                                        /WINDFALL:ALLOCATED
                                                  WITHHELD

        or followed by one of these arguments: (OUTPUT-DISPLAY only)

                                        ALL-MESSAGES
                                        BATCH-MESSAGES
                                        BUGCHK-MESSAGES
                                        BUGINF-MESSAGES
                                        CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                        CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
                                        DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
                                        DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
                                        FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
                                        LCP-MESSAGES
                                        MOUNT-MESSAGES
                                        NCP-MESSAGES
                                        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                        PLOTTER-MESSAGES
                                        PRINTER-MESSAGES
                                        READER-MESSAGES
                                        SYSTEM-MESSAGES
                                        USER-MESSAGES

        and, optionally, one or more of these switches:   (OUTPUT-DISPLAY
        keyword   only,   not   for   BUGCHK-,   BUGINF-,   DECNET-,   or


                                    3-53
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


        SYSTEM-MESSAGES arguments)

                                        /INFORMATION-MESSAGES
                                        /JOB-MESSAGES
                                        /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

|       and optionally  the  following  keyword  for  the  OUTPUT-DISPLAY
|       keyword:
|  
|                                       NODE

        or for DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS and
        REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES, the optional switch:

                                         /NODE:node-name::

|       or the optional switch (except for OUTPUT-DISPLAY):
|  
|                                        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION

                           specifies that  this  AVR  system  feature  be
                           enabled.   AVR  allows  you  to  mount labeled
                           tapes without the need to identify  each  tape
                           to   the   system   with  a  keyin.   However,
                           unlabeled tapes must always be  identified  to
                           the  system with the IDENTIFY command.  (Refer
                           to the description of the IDENTIFY command.)

|       BROADCAST-MESSAGES
|  
|                          specifies to enable broadcast messages.   This
|                          allows  ORION  messages generated on the local
|                          node to be sent to one or more  remote  nodes.
|                          It  also  allows  selective  sending  of these
|                          messages.  For example, if the local  node  is
|                          generating an excessive amount of BUGCHKS, you
|                          may want to send all messages except BUGCHKs.

        CLASS-SCHEDULER    specifies a system  program  be  enabled  that
                           allocates  portions  (or  percentages)  of the
                           central processor  unit  (CPU)  to  individual
                           groups  of  users.   These  groups  are called
                           classes and are set up by your System  Manager
                           in  the n-CONFIG.CMD file at system generation
                           time.  When the  CLASS-SCHEDULER  is  enabled,
                           all  jobs entered into the system are executed


                                    3-54
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


                           according to their class.  You should  consult
                           your  System  Manager  before  you  ENABLE  or
                           DISABLE the  CLASS-SCHEDULER  as  this  action
                           affects the performance of your system.

        DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS

                           specifies to enable NEBULA to  attempt  DECnet
                           connections  to  remote NEBULAs in the TOPS-20
                           cluster.  The remote systems must  be  running
                           cluster  GALAXY in order for the connection to
                           be successful.

        FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAIT

                           specifies  that  when  a  user  or  batch  job
                           requests  a  file  that  is off-line due to an
                           archival or a migration, the job  waits  until
                           the  request has been satisfied, provided that
                           the user has given  the  TOPS-20  command  SET
                                                                  _______
                           RETRIEVAL-WAIT.    (Refer   to   the   TOPS-20
                           __________ _____
                           Operator's Guide for a discussion of  archived
                                                                  _
                           and   migrated  files,  and  to  the  ^TOPS-20
                           Commands Reference Manual for a description of
                           the  SET  RETRIEVAL-WAIT  command.)  Once  the
                           request has been satisfied, the job (batch  or
                           timesharing) continues to process.

        LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS

                           specifies to direct the printing of batch  log
                           files  and  spooled  files  to  specific local
                           printers.  Normally, printing of spooled files
                           (batch  or  otherwise)  is  scheduled  for the
                           first   available   local    printer.     With
                           LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS enabled, you can
                           specify  the  printer  with  the  OPR  command
                           ENABLE  PRINT-LOGFILES  n.   In this way, only
                           the local printer(s) specified print batch log
                           or spooled files.  To check if this keyword is
                           enabled, use the OPR  command  SHOW  PARAMETER
                           PRINTER.

                           If LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS  is  directed
                           to  specific  printers  (ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES
                           n), and you  issue  the  OPR  command  DISABLE
                           LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS,   the   ENABLEd
                           printer(s) are remembered by OPR.   Therefore,
                           if  LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS  is  ENABLEd
                           later during system operation, you do not have
                           to re-issue ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES command(s).


                                    3-55
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


        LOGGING            specifies   that   the   centralized   logging
                           facility  of  ORION  be enabled (this facility
                           logs  all   messages   passing   through   the
                           operating  system and stores these messages in
                           a log file buffer).   When  this  facility  is
                           enabled,   there   are  records  kept  of  the
                           messages and interactions  between  ORION  and
                           the system.

        OUTPUT-DISPLAY     specifies  that  the  display   of   specified
                           message  groupings on your console be enabled.
                           The  groupings  are  specified  as  the  valid
                           arguments and switches to this keyword.

|            NODE          allows you to selectively choose  which  ORION
|                          messages   from  the  indicated  node  in  the
|                          cluster  are   displayed   on   the   operator
|                          terminal.   You  can specify the local node or
|                          an asterisk (*).  The asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        PRINT-LOGFILES n   specifies the local printer "n" to print batch
                           log  files and spooled files.  The OPR command
                           ENABLE   LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS    must
                           precede        this        command.         If
                           LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS   is    reverted
                           (DISABLEd)  and  then  ENABLEd at a later time
                           during system  operation,  OPR  remembers  the
                           printer  as  ENABLEd,  thus you do not have to
                           re-issue the ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES command.

        QUEUE-REQUESTS     specifies that all users be  enabled  to  make
                           any  queue  request.   When queue requests are
                           enabled, a user can submit a batch  or  reader
                           job,  a card-punch, paper-tape-punch, plotter,
                           or a printer request to the system.

        REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES

                           specifies that  NEBULA  is  to  report  DECnet
                           connection  attempt failures to remote NEBULAs
                           in the cluster on your terminal.

        SEMI-OPR           specifies to allow  users  with  SEMI-OPERATOR
                           privilege  to  have limited control of certain
                           output  devices   and   to   access   operator
                           information.   The  OPR commands permitted and
                           their limitations are defined in Chapter 2.

        UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

                           specifies that an unprivileged user  may  view
                           all  print  requests  on  a remote node in the
                                    3-56
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


                           cluster as a result of  that  user  giving  an
                           @INFORMATION     OUTPUT     /DESTINATION-NODE:
                           command.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        The following arguments can be used  with  the  AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-
        RECOGNITION keyword:

        TAPE-DRIVES        specifies that all tape drives on  the  system
                           be enabled with AVR.

        tape-drive-name:   specifies the tape-drive name that is  enabled
                           with  AVR.   The  colon must be included.  The
                           name is in the format of MTAn:, where n is the
                           tape-drive number.

        The  following  arguments  are  valid  with  the   OUTPUT-DISPLAY
        keyword.   Each argument allows a type of message to be displayed
        on your OPR terminal.

        Message Type       Cause

        ALL-MESSAGES       all the  types  of  messages  defined  by  the
                           following arguments

        BATCH-MESSAGES     users requesting BATCH processing

        BUGCHK-MESSAGES    BUGCHKs generated by the system

        BUGINF-MESSAGES    BUGINFs generated by the system

        CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           users requesting card punch output

        CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES

                           card reader  file  processing  or  batch  jobs
                           submitted with the /READER switch

        DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES

                           DECnet events generated by NMLT20

        DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES

                           failure of an attempt to establish a  link  to
                           another node

        FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES

                                    3-57
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


                           users requesting retrieval of files that  have
                           been archived or migrated to tape

        LCP-MESSAGES       LAT events noted by LCP

        MOUNT-MESSAGES     users requesting tape and structure mounts and
                           dismounts

        NCP-MESSAGES       users starting and shutting down network nodes
                           (valid  only  if  your installation has DECnet
                           software)

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                           users requesting paper-tape-punch output

        PLOTTER-MESSAGES   users requesting plotter output

        PRINTER-MESSAGES   users requesting line printer output

        READER-MESSAGES    users  requesting  card  reader  input   (Card
                           reader jobs become batch requests.)

        SYSTEM MESSAGES    various  system  messages  such  as:   job   0
                           crashes,   swapping  space,  SPT  space,  disk
                           space, and parity error conditions encountered
                           by the system

        USER-MESSAGES      users  making  requests  to  you  through  the
                           PLEASE program


   Switches
   Switches

        The  following  switches  can  be  used  as  arguments   of   the
        CLASS-SCHEDULER keyword:

        /CLASS-ASSIGNMENTS:

                           specifies that users of the system  have  been
                           divided into classes and have been allocated a
                           certain amount of CPU time.  The two arguments
                           available  with  this  switch are ACCOUNTS and
                           POLICY-PROGRAM.

           ACCOUNTS        specifies that class assignments are  assigned
                           by  the  accounts  set  up in the n-CONFIG.CMD
                           file and the ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN file.

           POLICY-PROGRAM  specifies that your System Manager  or  System
                           Programmer  has  initiated  the Access Control


                                    3-58
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


                           Job to assign a user to a  class  upon  login.
                           The  Access  Control  Job  is  a  user written
                           program that provides the accounting functions
                           for your installation.

        /WINDFALL:         specifies what happens  with  the  unused  CPU
                           time.   You  can  specify  either ALLOCATED or
                           WITHHELD.

           ALLOCATED       specifies that  excess  CPU  time  is  awarded
                           proportionately  to  the active classes (users
                           currently requesting CPU time).

           WITHHELD        specifies that excess  CPU  time  is  withheld
                           from all users and becomes idle time.

        You can specify the following switches  with  all  OUTPUT-DISPLAY
        arguments  except  BUGCHK-, BUGINF-, DECNET-, or SYSTEM-MESSAGES.
        If  you  do  not  specify  one  of   these   switches   with   an
        OUTPUT-DISPLAY argument, all three are assumed by default.

        /INFORMATION-MESSAGES

                           specifies that messages be displayed that  are
                           informational,  such  as errors that occur due
                           to  an  application  problem.   Also,  one-way
                           PLEASE  messages  from  users  are  considered
                           information messages, since no  response  from
                           you is necessary.

        /JOB-MESSAGES      specifies  that  messages  be  displayed  that
                           notify  you  when a device or stream has begun
                           to process a job  request  and  when  the  job
                           request has ended its processing.

        /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

                           specifies  that  messages  be  displayed  that
                           notify  you  of some action to be performed as
                           requested by a user or a processing job.  Also
                           included  are  messages that require action to
                           be taken, but are not  job  or  WTOR  related.
                           All  operator action messages must be answered
                           with the RESPOND command.

        You can specify the following switch with the  DECNET-CONNECTION-
        ATTEMPTS and REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES keywords:

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.


                                    3-59
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENABLE)
                                  (ENABLE)


|       You can specify the following switch with all keywords except the
|       OUTPUT-DISPLAY keyword:
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You have previously disabled queue requests  to  allow  those
            requests  in  the  queues  to  be  processed  before  a shift
            turnover.  You can now enable queue requests.

                ______ ___________________
            OPR>ENABLE QUEUE-REQUESTS<RET>
            OPR>
            16:34:03        --System Queue's Entry Processing Enabled--
            OPR>

        2.  You have started OPR on a  terminal  to  display  only  mount
            messages.   By  default when OPR is started, all messages are
            displayed.  Therefore, you must disable all messages and then
            enable mount messages.

                _______ ______________ _________________
            OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES<RET>
            OPR>
             8:45:18        -- Output display for OPR modified --
                ______ ______________ ___________________
            OPR>ENABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY MOUNT-MESSAGES<RET>
            OPR>
             8:45:47        -- Output display for OPR modified --
            OPR>

        3.  You ENABLE AVR on tape drive MTA2:  after you  have  disabled
            AVR and initialized some scratch tapes.

                ______ ____________________________ __________
            OPR>ENABLE AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>
            OPR>











                                    3-60
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENTER)
                                  (ENTER)


   ENTER - Entering Another Command Level
   ENTER - Entering Another Command Level


   Function
   Function

        The ENTER command exits OPR and enters another command interface,
        such as:

         o  LCP     the LAT Control Program

         o  NCP     the Network Control Program

        to perform control  and  monitor  functions  appropriate  to  the
        selected command interface.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>ENTER keyword<RET>

        where keyword is one of the following:  LCP
                                                NCP

   Keywords
   Keywords

        LCP  specifies that you exit OPR and enter LCP (the  LAT  Control
             Program)  to  control and monitor LAT (Local Area Transport)
             activity at a TOPS-20 node.

             When you enter LCP, your  prompt  becomes  the  LCP  prompt,
             LCP>.   You  can  use the ESCAPE key and command recognition
             for LCP commands as for OPR commands.

             LCP commands and  functions  are  described  in  a  separate
             chapter of this manual.

        NCP  specifies that you exit  OPR  and  enter  NCP  (the  Network
             Control Program for DECnet.  This keyword is applicable only
             if your installation has DECnet software.

             When you specify the ENTER command  to  enter  DECnet,  your
             prompt  becomes  the  DECnet  prompt, NCP>.  Once you are in
             NCP, you can use the  ESCAPE  key  and  recognition  on  NCP
             commands as you can for OPR commands.

             NCP  commands   and   functions   are   described   in   the
             ________________ ______ _________ _____
             DECnet-20/PSI-20 System Manager's Guide.


   Use the ENTER command when you need to give many commands at the other
   (non-OPR) command level.  If you need to give only a few commands, you


                                    3-61
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ENTER)
                                  (ENTER)


   can give them from OPR without entering the new command level.  To  do
   this,  type  the  command-level  keyword (and a space) followed by the
   command to the other interface, as:

            ___ ____ ____________________
        OPR>LCP SHOW CHARACTERISTICS<RET>
















































                                    3-62
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (EXIT)
                                   (EXIT)


   EXIT - Leaving OPR Level
   EXIT - Leaving OPR Level


   Function
   Function

        The EXIT command exits OPR command level and returns  to  TOPS-20
        command level.

        You can return to OPR command level  with  the  TOPS-20  CONTINUE
        command,  providing  that  you do not alter memory.  Refer to the
        _______ ______ _____        _______ ________ _________ ______
        TOPS-20 User's Guide or the TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual for
        additional information about the CONTINUE command.

        The EXIT command has no keywords, arguments, or switches.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>EXIT<RET>


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        Because OPR takes time to respond  to  some  commands,  the  EXIT
        command may prevent you from seeing output from previously issued
        commands.  However, the processing of the previous commands  will
        not be interrupted when you EXIT from OPR.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the EXIT command to leave OPR and return  to  TOPS-20
            command level.

                _________
            OPR>EXIT<RET>

            $

        2.  After completing your task with commands that  do  not  alter
            memory,  you  now give the TOPS-20 command CONTINUE to return
            to OPR.

             _____________
            $CONTINUE<RET>

            OPR>








                                    3-63
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (FORWARDSPACE)
                               (FORWARDSPACE)


   FORWARDSPACE - Forward Spacing into Pages
   FORWARDSPACE - Forward Spacing into Pages


   Function
   Function

        The FORWARDSPACE command  spaces  the  print  file  on  the  line
        printer in a forward direction, so that you can skip the printing
        of a job, file, or page(s).  The FORWARDSPACE command allows  you
        to  forwardspace  the  print  file so that you can save paper and
        print only what is needed as output.

        At various times, you may have to forwardspace a particular  file
        that  is currently being printed on the line printer, for example
        when a user requires only a portion of some printed output.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>FORWARDSPACE keyword nn (or) LAT /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by its alias name
|  
|       or followed by its unit number:
|  
|                                     nn
|  
|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /NODE:nodename::

        or                            LAT

        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE: cluster-node-name
                                      /COPIES:nnnn
                                      /FILE
                                      /PAGES:nnnn


   Keywords
   Keywords

        PRINTER            specifies the line  printer  (output  device).
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the


                                    3-64
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (FORWARDSPACE)
                               (FORWARDSPACE)


|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.

        nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                           that  can  forwardspace  the  forms  currently
                           printing (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,
                           and  so  forth).   You  must specify this unit
                           number.

        LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

             PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

             SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

             SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource


                                    3-65
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (FORWARDSPACE)
                               (FORWARDSPACE)


                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.


   Switches
   Switches

        You must specify one of the following switches:

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /COPIES:nnnn       specifies the number of copies to  be  skipped
                           from  printing.   The  number  you  specify is
                           subtracted from the  number  that  was  queued
                           with  the  PRINT  command.   For example, if a
                           user issued the command

                           PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25

                           and you issue the  FORWARDSPACE  command  with
                           /COPIES:10  while  FOO.BAR  is printing on the
                           line  printer,  the  total  number  of  copies
                           printed will be 15.

        /FILE              specifies that you forward space one file when
                           a  multifile PRINT request has been given by a
                           user.  For  example,  if  a  user  issues  the
                           command

                           PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR

                           and you issue the  FORWARDSPACE  command  with
                           /FILE  while  FOO1.BAR is printing on the line
                           printer, FOO2.BAR starts printing on the  line
                           printer.   The remaining pages of FOO1.BAR are
                           skipped.
|  
|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
|                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
|                          node name is optional.

        /PAGES:nnnn        specifies  the   number   of   pages   to   be
                           forwardspaced  for  the file that is currently


                                    3-66
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (FORWARDSPACE)
                               (FORWARDSPACE)


                           being printed.  If you do not  specify  either
                           the  /COPIES:   or  the /FILE switch, then you
                           must specify the /PAGES:  switch.  The  number
                           (nnnn)  you  specify  refers  to  the physical
                           number of pages and not to the number of pages
                           that contains the file on disk.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        When you give the FORWARDSPACE PRINTER command, the system prints
        the  output  in the printer buffer (which may contain one or more
        printed pages) before FORWARDSPACing  the  number  of  pages  you
        specify.   Therefore,  when  you  use  the  /PAGES:nn switch, you
        should subtract two or three pages from the total number of pages
        you wish to FORWARDSPACE.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify line printer 0 for the FORWARDSPACE command  to  skip
            15 copies of a print request of 25 copies.

                ____________ _______ _ _______________
            OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>
            12:34:34        Printer 0  --Forward Spaced 15 Copies--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify line printer  2  with  the  FORWARDSPACE  command  to
            forwardspace one file from the file currently printing.

                ____________ _______ _ __________
            OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>
            13:21:09        Printer 2  --Forward Spaced 1 File--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the FORWARDSPACE command to forwardspace twelve pages
            from the page currently printing on line printer 1 because of
            a user request.

                ____________ _______ _ _____________
            OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>
            10:20:30        Printer 1  --Forward Spaced 12 Pages--
            OPR>












                                    3-67
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (HELP)
                                   (HELP)


   HELP - Getting Help on OPR Commands
   HELP - Getting Help on OPR Commands


   Function
   Function

        The HELP command displays information about an OPR command.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>HELP command<RET>

        where command can be any available OPR command


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        If you specify an invalid OPR command as a keyword with the  HELP
        command, OPR responds with:

        %No help available for "command"

        You can then press CTRL/H or retype the HELP command and  specify
        a correct OPR command as a keyword with HELP.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the HELP command itself  to  get  help  on  the  HELP
            command.

                ____ _________
            OPR>HELP HELP<RET>
                             -- Help for HELP command --
            The HELP command allows you to display the function, format,
            arguments, and 
            switches of any OPR command.

            The format is:

            HELP keyword

            where keyword can be any of the following OPR commands:

            ABORT       ALIGN      BACKSPACE       CANCEL      CLOSE
            CONTINUE    DEFINE     DISABLE         DISMOUNT    ENABLE
            ENTER       EXIT       FORWARDSPACE    HELP        HOLD
            IDENTIFY    MODIFY     MOUNT           NEXT        PUSH
            RELEASE     REPORT     REQUEUE         RESPOND     ROUTE
            SEND        SET        SHOW            SHUTDOWN    START
            STOP        SUPPRESS   SWITCH          TAKE        UNDEFINE
            WAIT


                                    3-68
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (HELP)
                                   (HELP)


              or one of the following:
             LCP   NCP

            OPR>

        2.  Specify the HELP command with TAKE as its keyword.

                ____ _________
            OPR>HELP TAKE<RET>
                             -- Help for TAKE command --
            The TAKE command allows you to execute a series of OPR
            commands from a specified command file.

            The format is:

            TAKE filespec

            where filespec is the name of the command file,

            followed by one of these optional switches:

                      /DISPLAY
                      /NODISPLAY

            OPR>





























                                    3-69
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (HOLD)
                                   (HOLD)


   HOLD - Holding Job Requests in the Queue
   HOLD - Holding Job Requests in the Queue


   Function
   Function

        The HOLD command  keeps  job  requests  in  a  queue  from  being
        processed.

        The jobs that are held with the HOLD command can  be  rescheduled
        with  the  RELEASE  command.   Refer  to  the  description of the
        RELEASE command in this chapter.

        To examine any jobs waiting in a queue to be processed, give  the
        SHOW QUEUES command.  Refer to the description of the SHOW QUEUES
        command in this chapter.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>HOLD keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-JOBS
                                      CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
                                      PLOTTER-JOBS
                                      PRINTER-JOBS

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      request-id-number
                                      user-name
                                      *

        and optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::

|       or optionally the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-JOBS         specifies one or more jobs in the batch  input
                           queue waiting to be processed.

        CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    specifies one or more jobs in  the  card-punch
                           output queue waiting to be processed.


                                    3-70
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (HOLD)
                                   (HOLD)


        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                           specifies   one   or   more   jobs   in    the
                           paper-tape-punch  output  queue  waiting to be
                           processed.

        PLOTTER-JOBS       specifies one or  more  jobs  in  the  plotter
                           output queue waiting to be processed.

        PRINTER-JOBS       specifies one or more jobs in the line printer
                           output queue waiting to be processed.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        request-id-number  specifies  that  a  single  job  be  held   as
                           specified  by  the  appropriate keyword, for a
                           particular user.

        user-name          specifies that all jobs be held  as  specified
                           by  the  appropriate  keyword for a particular
                           user.  The user name  can  be  from  1  to  39
                           alphanumeric  characters  (normally the user's
                           surname) that  identifies  the  user  and  his
                           logged-in  directory.   You  do  not  need  to
                           enclose the user name in angle brackets.

        *                  specifies that all jobs be held  as  specified
                           by   the  appropriate  keyword  for  all  jobs
                           waiting to be processed, from all users.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                           This switch  can  only  be  used  with  the  *
                           argument.




                                    3-71
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (HOLD)
                                   (HOLD)


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        The HOLD command is effective only for the jobs currently waiting
        to  be  processed.  Any jobs submitted after the HOLD command was
        issued are not held.

        You cannot hold any job that is currently processing in  a  batch
        stream  or on an output device.  If you need to stop the job from
        processing, give the STOP command.  Refer to the  description  of
        the STOP command in this chapter.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the OPR command to HOLD  a  line  printer  job  whose
            request-id-number  is  127.   This  particular  job  will not
            become rescheduled again until you issue  a  RELEASE  command
            for this job.

                ____ ____________ ________
            OPR>HOLD PRINTER-JOBS 127<RET>
            10:54:07          --1 Job Held--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the OPR command to HOLD all card-punch jobs.

                ____ _______________ ______
            OPR>HOLD CARD-PUNCH-JOBS *<RET>
            11:34:35          --10 Jobs Held--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the OPR command to  HOLD  all  batch  jobs  for  user
            HOVSEPIAN.

                ____ __________ ______________
            OPR>HOLD BATCH-JOBS HOVSEPIAN<RET>
            12:20:32          --15 Jobs Held--
            OPR>


















                                    3-72
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (IDENTIFY)
                                 (IDENTIFY)


   IDENTIFY - Identifying Tape Mounts
   IDENTIFY - Identifying Tape Mounts


   Function
   Function

        The IDENTIFY command services tape mount requests by enabling you
        to:

         o  Satisfy a user's mount request for an unlabeled tape.

         o  Satisfy a user's request for a labeled tape that  is  mounted
            on a drive that has AVR disabled.

         o  Pre-place and identify an unlabeled tape.

        When a user issues a mount request for  an  unlabeled  tape,  you
        must physically locate, mount, and ready the requested tape on an
        available tape drive and then 'IDENTIFY' the  tape-mount  request
        to the tape drive.

        When more than one user issues a  mount  request  for  a  scratch
        tape,  the  IDENTIFY SCRATCH command applies to the first request
        received.  If you need to service a request other than the first,
        use the IDENTIFY REQUEST-ID command.

        If you have AVR enabled and your installation uses labeled tapes,
        you  do not need to give the IDENTIFY command after you mount and
        ready a tape on a tape drive.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>IDENTIFY keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be the tape-drive name:

                                      MTAn:

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      REQUEST-ID nn
                                      SCRATCH
                                      VOLUME-ID volid

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name






                                    3-73
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (IDENTIFY)
                                 (IDENTIFY)


   Keyword
   Keyword

        MTAn:              specifies the physical  tape  drive  unit  (n)
                           where  you  mounted and readied the tape.  You
                           must specify this colon at the end of the unit
                           number.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        REQUEST-ID nn      specifies that you are attempting to  use  the
                           tape    on    drive    MTAn:     to    satisfy
                           tape-mount-request number nn.

        SCRATCH            specifies that a user  has  requested  that  a
                           scratch  tape  be  mounted.   The tape must be
                           unlabeled, or the label must have expired.

        VOLUME-ID volid    specifies the volume identifier (volid) of the
                           tape  volume  you  have  mounted  on  the tape
                           drive.  The volid can consist of from 1  to  6
                           alphanumeric   characters.    If   the   volid
                           contains      nonalphanumeric       characters
                           (characters  other  than  A  through  Z  and 0
                           through 9), the  volid  must  be  enclosed  in
                           double quotes.

                           In  addition,  this  argument  allows  you  to
                           pre-place  an  unlabeled  tape  or  an expired
                           labeled tape on a drive with AVR disabled (see
                           Example 4 below).

   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  A user requests that you mount  an  unlabeled  scratch  tape.
            After  the  tape-mount request appears, you mount and ready a
            write enabled, scratch tape and then identify the tape  as  a
            scratch tape.



                                    3-74
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (IDENTIFY)
                                 (IDENTIFY)


            OPR>
            14:34:20          --Tape Mount Request # 43--
                            Mount scratch tape, WRITE-ENABLED
                            User R.ACE, Job 27, Terminal 9
            OPR>
            14:36:12          --MTA2: Unlabeled tape mounted--
                ________ _____ ____________
            OPR>IDENTIFY MTA2: SCRATCH<RET>
            OPR>
            14:36:15          --MTA2: Given To Request 43--
                            scratch tape now in use by
                            User R.ACE, Job 27, Terminal 9
            OPR>

        2.  A user requests that you mount a labeled tape.  However,  you
            have  AVR  disabled and you must identify the labeled tape to
            the system.

            OPR>
            13:29:04          --Tape Mount Request # 87--
                            Mount ANSI volume 100555, READ-ONLY
                            User HOVSEPIAN, Job 19, Terminal 9
            OPR>
            13:32:14          --MTA0: tape mounted--
                ________ _____ _________ ___________
            OPR>IDENTIFY MTA0: VOLUME-ID 100555<RET>
            OPR>
            13:32:18          --MTA0: Given To Request 87--
                            Volume 100555 now in use by
                            User HOVSEPIAN, Job 19, Terminal 9
            OPR>

        3.  A user has requested an unlabeled tape to be mounted.   After
            you  mount and ready the requested tape, you use the IDENTIFY
            command to associate the tape mount request-id with the  tape
            drive.

            OPR>
            16:30:00          --Tape Mount Request # 127--
                            Mount Unlabeled volume DUMP01, WRITE-ENABLED
                            User SARTINI, Job 43, Terminal 7
                            Volumes in set DUMPER: DUMP01,DUMP02
            OPR>
            16:33:45          --MTA1: Unlabeled tape mounted--
                ________ _____ __________ ________
            OPR>IDENTIFY MTA1: REQUEST-ID 127<RET>
            OPR>
            16:33:49          --MTA1: Given To Request 127--
                            Volume DUMP01 now in use by
                            User SARTINI, Job 43, Terminal 7
            OPR>

        4.  You load an unlabeled tape on tape drive MTA1:  and pre-place
            it for a future user request.


                                    3-75
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (IDENTIFY)
                                 (IDENTIFY)


            17:22:10          --MTA1: Unlabeled tape mounted--
                ________ _____ _________ ___________
            OPR>IDENTIFY MTA1: VOLUME-ID NOVA01<RET>
            OPR>

            At some time in the future, a user will issue a mount request
            for  tape  NOVA01.  The system will automatically satisfy the
            request with the tape NOVA01 on tape drive MTA1:.














































                                    3-76
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (MODIFY)
                                  (MODIFY)


   MODIFY - Modifying the Priority of Requests
   MODIFY - Modifying the Priority of Requests


   Function
   Function

        The MODIFY command changes the priority of a job request  waiting
        in  a queue for processing.  The higher the priority number is in
        the MODIFY  command,  the  greater  the  importance  of  the  job
        request.

        When any job request is submitted for processing by a  user,  its
        priority  number  defaults to a value that is set at GALGEN time.
        The user who requests the job can set the priority value with the
        /PRIORITY:   switch.   However, the MODIFY command permits you to
        change the priority value for any job request.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>MODIFY keyword argument /switch PRIORITY nn /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-REQUEST
                                      CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                      PLOTTER-REQUEST
                                      PRINTER-REQUEST

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      request-id-number
                                      user-name
                                      *

        and optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::


        followed by the argument:     PRIORITY nn

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-REQUEST      specifies  one  or  more  batch  job  requests
                           waiting   in  the  batch  input  queue  to  be
                           processed.

                                    3-77
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (MODIFY)
                                  (MODIFY)


        CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST specifies one or more card-punch job  requests
                           waiting in the card-punch

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST

                           specifies one  or  more  paper-tape-punch  job
                           requests   waiting   in  the  paper-tape-punch
                           output queue to be processed.

        PLOTTER-REQUEST    specifies one or  more  plotter  job  requests
                           waiting  in  the  plotter  output  queue to be
                           processed.

        PRINTER-REQUEST    specifies  one  or  more  line   printer   job
                           requests  waiting  in  the line printer output
                           queue to be processed.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                           This switch  can  only  be  used  with  the  *
                           argument.

   Arguments
   Arguments

        request-id-number  specifies  that  a  single  request   from   a
                           particular  user  be  modified as specified by
                           the appropriate keyword.

        user-name          specifies that all requests from a  particular
                           user   be   modified   as   specified  by  the
                           appropriate keyword.

        *                  specifies that all requests from all users  be
                           modified   as  specified  by  the  appropriate
                           keyword.

        PRIORITY nn        specifies the priority number  (nn)  that  the
                           request(s)  will be set to.  The number can be
                           in the range from 1 to  63.   The  higher  the
                                    3-78
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (MODIFY)
                                  (MODIFY)


                           number  is,  the greater the importance of the
                           request.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        You cannot MODIFY the priority of a job request once it has begun
        to process in a batch stream or on an output device.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Modify a printer request so that its priority will be greater
            than  the next request to be printed.  Thus, if print request
            13 was the next print request and you modify print request 15
            to be 50, print request 15 prints before print request 13.

                ______ _______________ __ ________ _______
            OPR>MODIFY PRINTER-REQUEST 15 PRIORITY 50<RET>
            OPR>
            13:54:19        --1 Job Modified--
            OPR>

        2.  Modify all card-punch requests for user CARLSON so that these
            requests  will  output  on  the  card  punch before any other
            card-punch requests.

                ______ __________________ _______ ________ _______
            OPR>MODIFY CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST CARLSON PRIORITY 63<RET>
            OPR>
            16:13:20        --8 Jobs Modified--
            OPR>























                                    3-79
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (MOUNT)
                                  (MOUNT)


   MOUNT - Mounting Structures
   MOUNT - Mounting Structures



   Function
   Function

        The MOUNT command mounts a structure and allows users  to  access
        it.  Give the MOUNT command after physically mounting a structure
        or after a physically mounted structure has been  DISMOUNTed  but
        not  removed  from the disk drive.  The MOUNT command also allows
        you  to  assign  the  structure  an  alias  name  when  two  file
        structures have the same name.

        Unlike the EXEC MOUNT command, the OPR  MOUNT  command  does  not
        place  a  mount  request  in the mount queue or identify you as a
        user of the structure.  If the structure is physically mounted in
        the  drive,  the  MOUNT  command is executed immediately.  If the
        structure is not mounted  in  the  drive,  you  receive  a  MOUNT
        request.   The  MOUNT command is then executed automatically when
        the structure is physically mounted.

        The structure is MOUNTed only when it is physically mounted in  a
        disk drive and has AVAILABLE and ACKNOWLEDGED attributes.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>MOUNT keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        STRUCTURE

        followed by the argument:     alias:

        optionally followed by the switches:

                                      /STRUCTURE-ID:structure-name:
                                      /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        STRUCTURE          specifies a disk structure that is on  a  disk
                           drive and has been DISMOUNTed.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        alias:             specifies the name to be used  in  referencing
                           the mounted structure.  The alias must be 1 to
                           6 alphanumeric characters in  length  followed
                           by a colon.


                                    3-80
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (MOUNT)
                                  (MOUNT)


                                   _______  ______  _________  _____
                           See the TOPS-20  System  Manager's  Guide  for
                           more information on alias names.


   Switches
   Switches

        /STRUCTURE-ID:structure-name:

                           specifies the physical name of the  structure.
                           Specify  this switch when the alias is not the
                           same as  the  physical  structure  name.   The
                           structure name must be followed by a colon.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular cluster  node  within
                           the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
                           processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
                           can  be any node name within the cluster or an
                           asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
                           nodes within the cluster.

                                    NOTE

           If a structure was previously dismounted on behalf  of
           a  remote  system  within  the  cluster, by way of the
           DISMOUNT STRUCTURE name:  REMOVAL command,  only  that
           remote   system   can   successfully   use  the  MOUNT
           /CLUSTER-NODE:  command to remount  the  structure  on
           the  remote  system.   Once  this is accomplished, all
           other  systems  within  the  cluster   can   use   the
           /CLUSTER-NODE:    switch   to   remotely  remount  the
           structure.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Give the MOUNT command  to  mount  the  DISMOUNTed  structure
            WORK:

                _____ _________ __________
            OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE WORK:<RET>

            OPR>
            11:32:15      -- Mount request by operator completed --
                        Structure WORK: mounted as alias WORK

            OPR>

        2.  Give the MOUNT command to mount structure  SHARE:   with  the
            alias MISC:



                                    3-81
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (MOUNT)
                                  (MOUNT)


                _____ _________ _____ ________________________
            OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE MISC: /STRUCTURE-ID:SHARE<RET>
            OPR>
            11:32:15      -- Mount request by operator completed --
                        Structure SHARE: mounted as alias MISC

















































                                    3-82
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (NEXT)
                                   (NEXT)


   NEXT - Specifying the Next Request to Run
   NEXT - Specifying the Next Request to Run



   Function
   Function

        The NEXT command specifies the request that will be serviced next
        by  the  specified  device.   After  you  issue this command, the
        request that you specified will start immediately.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>NEXT keyword nn /switch REQUEST-ID mm /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument

        followed by the stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        optionally followed by the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

        or                            CLUSTER nn
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and the word:                 REQUEST-ID

        followed by the request identification number:



                                    3-83
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (NEXT)
                                   (NEXT)


                                      mm
|  
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name



   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies the batch stream in  which  the  job
                           will run.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies the card punch that will  punch  the
                           job.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies the paper tape punch that will punch
                           the job.

        PLOTTER            specifies the plotter that will plot the job.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer on a remote node within  a
                           TOPS-20  cluster.   A  TOPS-20  cluster  is  a
                           loosely coupled configuration of  between  two
                           and  four  TOPS-20 processors.  Each processor
                           in the configuration is identified by  a  node
                           name.    For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,  and
                           LOUIE::  can be three nodes within  a  cluster
                           of TOPS-20 processors.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

             DQS queuename

                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user


                                    3-84
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (NEXT)
                                   (NEXT)


                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is


                                    3-85
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (NEXT)
                                   (NEXT)


                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::) following the node name is optional.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        The NEXT command ignores  most  attributes  of  a  request.   For
        example,  if  a print request has the attribute /UNIT:0, the NEXT
        command can print the request on a different printer.

        You should attempt to honor request attributes when possible.


   Example
   Example

        A user has requested that his job be printed as soon as possible.
        Use  the  NEXT command to queue job HURRY to be printed after the
        current job is finished.

            ____ _______ _ __________ ________
        OPR>NEXT PRINTER 0 REQUEST-ID 107<RET>
        OPR>
        15:39:51       Printer 0 -- NEXT request #107 scheduled --
        OPR>
        15:40:20       Printer 0 -- End --


                                    3-86
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (NEXT)
                                   (NEXT)


                       Job D60SPD Req # 105 for PERKINS
        OPR>
        15:40:32       Printer 0 -- Begin --
                       Job HURRY Req #107 for OPERATOR
        OPR>
















































                                    3-87
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (PUSH)
                                   (PUSH)


   PUSH - Pushing Out of OPR Command Level
   PUSH - Pushing Out of OPR Command Level



   Function
   Function

        The PUSH command leaves  OPR  command  level  and  enters  a  new
        operating  system (EXEC) command level.  You can then perform any
        software task or run any utility.  To return to OPR, type the POP
                                    _______ ________ _________ ______
        command.   (Refer  to  the  TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual for
        further information on the POP command.)

                                      NOTE

                Do not run OPR at the  new  EXEC  command  level.
                Return to OPR by using the TOPS-20 POP command.

        You can use the PUSH command to create a lower copy of an EXEC of
        your  choice.   Normally,  PUSH  creates  the EXEC defined by the
        system logical  name,  DEFAULT-EXEC:.   Use  the  TOPS-20  DEFINE
        command  to  define the job-wide logical name DEFAULT-EXEC:, with
        the filespec for the EXEC you want to use each time you PUSH.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>PUSH<RET>


   Restriction
   Restriction

        When you have used the PUSH command, you cannot logout.   If  you
        attempt to do so, the following error message will appear:

        ?LOG capability required
         Not logged off

        To logout, you must POP to OPR, EXIT from OPR, and then LOGOUT.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You give the PUSH command to enter operating  system  command
            level and mount a tape for the DUMPER program.

                _________
            OPR>PUSH<RET>

             TOPS-20 Command processor 4(554)
             _____ ____ _______ _________________________________________
            @MOUNT TAPE DUMPER: /LABEL-TYPE:UNLABELED/SCRATCH/NOWAIT<RET>
            13:45:00          --Tape Mount Request # 60--
                            Mount Unlabeled scratch tape, WRITE-ENABLED


                                    3-88
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (PUSH)
                                   (PUSH)


                            User OPERATOR, Job 6, Terminal 1

                          .
                          .
                          .
             ___________
            @DUMPER<RET>
            DUMPER>
                          .
                          .
                          .

        2.  After completing the DUMPER tasks, you can dismount the  tape
            and type POP to return to OPR command level.

                   _________
            DUMPER>EXIT<RET>
             ________
            $POP<RET>
            OPR>




































                                    3-89
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (RELEASE)
                                 (RELEASE)


   RELEASE - Releasing Job Requests Held in the Queue
   RELEASE - Releasing Job Requests Held in the Queue



   Function
   Function

        The RELEASE command releases job requests that were held with the
        HOLD  command.  When you RELEASE any previously held job request,
        the job is rescheduled for processing.  Refer to the  description
        of the HOLD command in this chapter.

        To examine any jobs waiting in the queue to be processed  or  any
        jobs  being  held,  give  the  SHOW  QUEUES command with the /ALL
        switch.  Refer to the description of the SHOW QUEUES  command  in
        this chapter.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>RELEASE keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-JOBS
                                      CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
                                      PLOTTER-JOBS
                                      PRINTER-JOBS

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      request-id-number
                                      user-name
                                      *

        and optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name:

|       or optionally the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-JOBS         specifies one or more jobs held in  the  batch
                           input queue.

        CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    specifies  one  or  more  jobs  held  in   the
                           card-punch output queue.


                                    3-90
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (RELEASE)
                                 (RELEASE)


        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                           specifies  one  or  more  jobs  held  in   the
                           paper-tape-punch output queue.

        PLOTTER-JOBS       specifies one or more jobs held in the plotter
                           output queue.

        PRINTER-JOBS       specifies one or more jobs held  in  the  line
                           printer output queue.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        request-id-number  specifies that a single job for  a  particular
                           user   be   released   as   specified  by  the
                           appropriate keyword.

        user-name          specifies that all jobs held for a  particular
                           user   be   released   as   specified  by  the
                           appropriate keyword.  The  user  name  can  be
                           from 1 to 39 alphanumeric characters (normally
                           the user's surname) that identifies  the  user
                           and  his logged-in directory.  You do not need
                           to enclose the user name in angle brackets.

        *                  specifies that all jobs held for all users  be
                           released   as  specified  by  the  appropriate
                           keyword.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                           This switch  can  only  be  used  with  the  *
                           argument.





                                    3-91
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (RELEASE)
                                 (RELEASE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the RELEASE command to release a line printer request
            for user C.MULLEN.

                _______ ____________ _____________
            OPR>RELEASE PRINTER-JOBS C.MULLEN<RET>
            OPR>
            14:23:45          --1 Job Released--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the RELEASE command to  release  all  card-punch  job
            requests held in the queue.

                _______ _______________ ______
            OPR>RELEASE CARD-PUNCH-JOBS *<RET>
            OPR>
            15:23:01          --10 Jobs Released--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the RELEASE command to release batch job request 117.

                _______ __________ ________
            OPR>RELEASE BATCH-JOBS 117<RET>
            OPR>
            17:18:20          --1 Job Released--
            OPR>





























                                    3-92
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (REPORT)
                                  (REPORT)


   REPORT - Reporting Comments to SYSERR
   REPORT - Reporting Comments to SYSERR



   Function
   Function

        The REPORT command enters various comments  or  error  conditions
        into the system error file ERROR.SYS.  To list these entries, you
                                                   _______________  _____
        can run the SPEAR program.  (Refer to the  TOPS-10/TOPS-20  SPEAR
        ______
        Manual for more information.)


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>REPORT user-name device: /switch text<RET>

        where user-name is the name of the user making the report

        followed by the subject of the report (device:)

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|            /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

        followed by a single- or multiple-line message (text)



   Keywords
   Keywords

        user-name          identifies the user making the report, or  the
                           user  that  the  report  refers  to.  Only the
                           first six characters  of  the  user  name  are
                           entered into the file ERROR.SYS.

        device             specifies one of the system  devices  that  is
                           the subject of the report.

        text               after specifying the device, you can  enter  a
                           single-  or multiple-line response and confirm
                           with a carriage return,  or  you  can  confirm
                           with  carriage  return  immediately  after the
                           user name or device.  OPR responds with  Enter
                           text and terminate with ^Z.  You then enter as
                           many lines of text for a response as you need.
                           When you press CTRL/Z, the OPR> prompt returns
                           and your report is logged into  the  ERROR.SYS
                           file.





                                    3-93
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (REPORT)
                                  (REPORT)


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.
   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the REPORT command for a previous cancellation  of  a
            job being read into the system through the card reader.

                ______ _______ _______ ___ ____ ____ ___________
            OPR>REPORT SARTINI CDR260: TOO MANY PICK CHECKS<RET>
            OPR>
            12:19:00        --Entry made in ERROR.SYS--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the REPORT command to describe  a  possible  hardware
            problem that seems serious.

                ______ __________________
            OPR>REPORT LEAD-OPERATOR<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
            _____ ___ ____ _ ____ _____ __ _________ __________
            THERE WAS JUST A HEAD CRASH ON STRUCTURE MISC:<RET>
            ___ _____ ____ __ ________
            ALL FILES WILL BE RESTORED^Z
                                       ^
                                       |
                                    <CTRL/Z>
            OPR>
            15:18:01        --Entry made in ERROR.SYS--
            OPR>




















                                    3-94
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REQUEUE)
                                 (REQUEUE)


   REQUEUE - Rescheduling Job Requests
   REQUEUE - Rescheduling Job Requests



   Function
   Function

        The REQUEUE command stops a job request that is in  progress  and
        puts  it back in the queue in the HOLD state.  You can reschedule
        the request with the RELEASE command.

   Format
   Format

|       OPR>REQUEUE keyword nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument

        followed by the stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

                                      /NODE:node-name::
                                      /REASON:comment

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

                                      CLUSTER nn
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        or one of the following arguments (not valid for BATCH-STREAM):





                                    3-95
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REQUEUE)
                                 (REQUEUE)


                                      BEGINNING-OF COPY
                                                   FILE
                                                   JOB
                                      CURRENT-POSITION

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch stream that has a
                           job currently active within it.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device  that
                           has a job currently being output on it.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                           that has a job currently being output on it.

        PLOTTER            specifies a particular plotter device that has
                           a job currently being output on it.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer on a remote node within  a
                           TOPS-20  cluster.   A  TOPS-20  cluster  is  a
                           loosely coupled configuration of  between  two
                           and  four  TOPS-20 processors.  Each processor
                           in the configuration is identified by  a  node
                           name.    For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,  and
                           LOUIE::  can be three nodes within  a  cluster
                           of TOPS-20 processors.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

             DQS queuename



                                    3-96
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REQUEUE)
                                 (REQUEUE)


                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"


                                    3-97
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REQUEUE)
                                 (REQUEUE)


                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::) following the node name is optional.

        /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment as to why  the
                           job  has  been  requeued.   This  comment will
                           appear in the batch log file and at the user's
                           terminal.   If  the  comment  is more than one
                           line long, you can end the first line  with  a
                           hyphen  and a carriage return and continue the
                           comment on the next line.  If you press RETURN
                           immediately after the colon, OPR responds with
                           the instruction:   ENTER  TEXT  AND  TERMINATE
                           WITH  ^Z.  You can then enter as many lines of
                           text as necessary.  When you  finish  entering
                           the  text,  type  a CTRL/Z and the OPR> prompt
                           reappears.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        BEGINNING-OF       specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning  of  the  COPY,  FILE, or JOB.  This


                                    3-98
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REQUEUE)
                                 (REQUEUE)


                           argument is  valid  when  you  requeue  a  job
                           currently  processing on a device, such as the
                           line printer.  This argument is  invalid  with
                           the BATCH-STREAM keyword.

             COPY          specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning of the current copy being processed.
                           (Refer  to  the  BACKSPACE  and   FORWARDSPACE
                           commands.)

             FILE          specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning of the current file being processed.
                           (Refer  to  the  BACKSPACE  and   FORWARDSPACE
                           commands.)

             JOB           specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                           beginning  of the current job being processed.
                           With JOB, the entire job is requeued.

        CURRENT-POSITION   specifies the current position  (line  number)
                           of  the  job on unit number nn at the time you
                           issue the REQUEUE command.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        The REQUEUE PRINTER  command  immediately  stops  sending  a  job
        request  to  the printer.  However, the printer finishes printing
        the data already in its buffer.  Therefore,  when  you  give  the
        REQUEUE  PRINTER command, the printer may continue to print a few
        more pages of a job request before it  stops  or  prints  another
        request.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the REQUEUE command to hold and cancel a job in batch
            stream 5.

                _______ ____________ _ _____
            OPR>REQUEUE BATCH-STREAM 5 <RET>
            OPR>
            10:23:56        Batch Stream 5  --Requeued--
                            Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN
            OPR>
            10:23:57        Batch Stream 5  --End--
                            Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN
                            -- Job Requeued by Operator --
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the REQUEUE command to hold and  cancel  the  current
            processing job on the card punch.


                                    3-99
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REQUEUE)
                                 (REQUEUE)


                _______ __________ _ ____________ ___ _____________
            OPR>REQUEUE CARD-PUNCH 0 BEGINNING-OF JOB /REASON:<RET>
            Enter text and terminate with ^Z
            ___ ________ _______ __ ____ _____ _________
            JOB REQUEUED BECAUSE OF CARD PUNCH JAM.<RET>
            _____ _______ ____________
            FIELD SERVICE CALLED.<RET>
            _______________
            OPERATOR-JONES.^Z
                            ^
                            |
                         <CTRL/Z>
            OPR>
            16:09:43        Card-punch 0  --Requeued--
                            Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN
            OPR>
            16:09:44        Card-punch 0  --End--
                            Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN
                            -- Job Requeued by Operator --
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the REQUEUE command to hold and  cancel  the  current
            processing  job  on  the  line printer, unit number 0, at the
            current position.

                _______ _______ _ _____________________
            OPR>REQUEUE PRINTER 0 CURRENT-POSITION<RET>
            OPR>
            12:34:09        Printer 0  --Requeued--
                            Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY
            OPR>
            12:34:10        Printer 0  --End--
                            Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY
                            -- Job Requeued by Operator --
            OPR>























                                   3-100
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (RESPOND)
                                 (RESPOND)


   RESPOND - Responding to Messages
   RESPOND - Responding to Messages



   Function
   Function

        The RESPOND command to replies to any message  sent  to  you  via
        WTOR  (Write  To  Operator  with  Response) from a user or from a
        software task.

        When a user or software task sends you a message that requires  a
        response,  OPR  assigns the message a number so that you can keep
        track of all messages sent to operations.  With the  use  of  the
        SHOW  MESSAGES command, you can find out at any time if there are
        any outstanding messages.

        There are no keywords or switches for the  RESPOND  command,  but
        you  must  specify the message number.  Also, you may be required
        to include a message; therefore you may specify a message in  the
        RESPOND command.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>RESPOND nnn /switch text<RET>

        where nnn is the outstanding message number

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|            /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

        and text is a single- or multiple-line response



   Keywords
   Keywords

        nnn                specifies the message number of a message that
                           was  sent  to  you via WTOR (Write To Operator
                           with Response).

        text               specifies a single- or multiple-line response,
                           which  you  terminate  with a carriage return.
                           If you press carriage return immediately after
                           the  message  number,  OPR responds with ENTER
                           TEXT AND TERMINATE  WITH  ^Z.   You  can  then
                           enter as many lines of text as needed.  To end
                           the text input,  press  CTRL/Z  and  the  OPR>
                           prompt returns.



                                   3-101
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (RESPOND)
                                 (RESPOND)


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the RESPOND command to reply to  message  number  23,
            which was a Page Limit Exceeded message for printer 1.

            12:30:00  <23>  Printer 1  --Page Limit Exceeded--
                            Job OPRC Req #147 for REILLY
                            Type 'Respond <Number> CANCEL' to Cancel the
                            Job
                            Type 'Respond <Number> IGNORE' to Ignore the
                            Error
                _______ __ ___________
            OPR>RESPOND 23 IGNORE<RET>
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the RESPOND command to reply to  message  number  67,
            which  was  a request to remove a structure (TOPS-20 DISMOUNT
            command).

            13:57:01  <67>    --DISMOUNT QUERY--
                            Removal of structure PERF20: (Alias PERF20:)
                            requested.
                            Other jobs are currently using it. Should
                            removal request be processed (YES or NO)?
                            User KONEN, Job 26, Line 115
                _______ __ _______
            OPR>RESPOND 67 NO<RET>
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the RESPOND command to reply to  message  number  12,
            which   was  a  user's  inquiry  to  whether  timesharing  is
            available after 18:00.

             9:32:54  <12>     --Message from Timesharing User--
                             JOB 31 PTAYLOR at Terminal 121
                             WILL TIMESHARING BE AVAILABLE AFTER 18:00
                _______ _______
            OPR>RESPOND 12<RET>
            ___________ __ _________ _____ _____ _______
            TIMESHARING IS AVAILABLE UNTIL 23:00 TONIGHT^Z
                                                         ^
                                                         |
                                                      <CTRL/Z>


                                   3-102
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (RESPOND)
                                 (RESPOND)


            OPR>




















































                                   3-103
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


   ROUTE - Routing Output Between Nodes
   ROUTE - Routing Output Between Nodes



   Function
   Function

        The ROUTE command changes the destination of output requests,  so
        that  the  output  intended for a specific unit (the source unit)
        will automatically be output on  another  unit  (the  destination
        unit).  The source and destination units may be on the same node,
        or they may be on different nodes.

        This function is useful when a unit malfunctions and  the  output
        from that device is immediately necessary.

        If you are an operator at a central site, you  can  route  output
        from  one  unit  to  another,  on  the  same  or  any other node.
        However, output cannot be processed on another host  system.   If
        output is routed to another host node, the request(s) will remain
        in  the  queue  indefinitely,  because  the  request  cannot   be
        processed.   If  you  are  an  operator at a remote node, you can
        route requests from one unit to another on your node.

        All device routing is entered into the system route table,  which
        can be examined using the OPR command SHOW ROUTE-TABLE, described
        in this chapter.  The  ROUTE  command  also  allows  you  to  end
        routing  and  delete  the  entry  from the system route table, by
        omitting the information pertaining to  the  destination  unit(s)
        and node.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>ROUTE keyword source-argument destination-argument<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      ALL-DEVICES
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER

        followed by one of these source arguments:

                                      unit-number
                                      ALL-UNITS

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname


                                   3-104
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


                                      CLUSTER nn
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        optionally followed by the switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                      /NODE:node-name::

        ALL-DEVICES is followed by one of these source arguments:

                                      node-name::
                                      ALL-NODES

        followed by one of these destination arguments:

                                      unit-number
                                      ALL-UNITS

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:
|  
|                                     aliasname

                                      CLUSTER nn
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        optionally followed by the switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                      /NODE:node-name::

        ALL-DEVICES is followed by this destination argument:

                                      node-name::


                                   3-105
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


        The source-information is  always  required.   It  specifies  the
        source unit and node from which routing is to occur.

        The  destination-information  is  optional,  and  specifies   the
        destination  unit  and node to which routing is to occur.  If you
        omit the destination-information, any  existing  entries  in  the
        system  route table that refer to the source will be deleted, and
        the appropriate routing will be ended.

        Because the format and  arguments  used  with  the  ROUTE  depend
        largely on the keyword you use, it is highly recommended that you
        use the recognition feature (<ESC>) until  you  feel  comfortable
        with the command format.


   Keywords
   Keywords

        ALL-DEVICES        specifies all device output (card punch, paper
                           tape punch, plotter, and printer) at the node.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies card-punch output.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies paper-tape-punch output.

        PLOTTER            specifies plotter output.

|       PRINTER            specifies printer  output.   You  can  use  an
|                          alias  name  defined  with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command to reference a  printer  specification
|                          in this command.


   Arguments
   Arguments (for ALL-DEVICES)

           source-information

                           specifies the node(s) from which the output is
                           to  be  routed.   The  source-information  for
                           ALL-DEVICES is  specified  by  the  node  name
                           followed   by   two   colons   (for   example:
                           KL2102::) or by the keyword ALL-NODES.

           destination-information

                           specifies the node(s) to which the output will
                           be     routed.      For    ALL-DEVICES,    the
                           destination-information is  specified  by  the
                           node   name,   followed  by  two  colons  (for
                           example:  KL2102::).




                                   3-106
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


   Arguments
   Arguments (for keywords CARD-PUNCH, PAPER-TAPE PUNCH, and PLOTTER)

           source information

                           specifies the unit and  node  from  which  the
                           output  will  be  routed.   The unit number is
                           specified as either n (for a specific unit) or
                           ALL-UNITS,  to  designate  that all output for
                           the appropriate device is to be routed.   Note
                           that  if  you  specify a unit number, only the
                           requests made for that specific unit (with the
                           /UNIT  switch)  will  be  routed.  The node is
                           specified   by   the    switch    /NODE:name::
                           (described  below).   If  you  omit  the  node
                           specification,  the  node  to  which  you  are
                           connected is assumed.

           destination-information

                           specifies the  unit  and  node  to  which  the
                           output  will be routed.  The unit is specified
                           by n, the unit number, or ALL-UNITS.  The node
                           is specified by the switch /NODE:name::, which
                           is described below.  If  you  omit  the  /NODE
                           switch, the node to which you are connected is
                           assumed.


   Arguments
   Arguments (for the PRINTER keyword)

|          aliasname       specifies  an  alias  name  defined  with  the
|                          DEFINE  ALIAS  command  to reference a printer
|                          specification.

           CLUSTER nn      specifies  a  printer  on  a  node  within   a
                           cluster.   A  cluster  is  a  configuration of
                           processors     with      similar      internal
                           characteristics.    Each   processor   in  the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                           processors.

                NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot


                                   3-107
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


                           be the local node or an alias.

           DQS queuename   specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

           LAT             specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.


                                   3-108
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


                SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.


   Switches
   Switches


|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                           specifies the particular cluster node  within
|                           the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request is
|                           processed.  The "cluster-node-name" qualifier
|                           can be any node name within the cluster or an
|                           asterisk (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                           nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::   specifies  the  node(s)  from  and  to  which
                            output    is    to   be   routed.    In   the
                            source-information,  /NODE   designates   the
                            source node.  In the destination-information,
                            /NODE designates the destination  node.   The
                            double  colon (::) following the node name is
                            optional.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        You cannot route output from ALL-UNITS to a specific unit number.
        If you type this command, the following error occurs:

            _____ _______ __________________ ______
        OPR>ROUTE PRINTER ALL-UNITS/KL2102:: 0<RET>
        OPR>
        15:15:36        --Cannot Route a Generic Unit--
        OPR>

        This error is produced to prevent output from being processed  on
        a unit that does not have certain necessary characteristics.  For


                                   3-109
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


        example, if printer 0 does not have lowercase capability, and  if
        the  requests  being  routed  require  a  printer  with lowercase
        capability, then the requests cannot be processed on printer 0.


















































                                   3-110
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (ROUTE)
                                  (ROUTE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  To route the output that is destined for printer  unit  0  to
            printer unit 1, on the same node, use the following command:

                _____ _______ _ ______
            OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0 1<RET>
            OPR>
            15:33:12 --Printer 0 [KL2102] Routed to Printer 1 [KL2102]--
            OPR>

        2.  To end the routing for printer 0 and to delete the entry from
            the routing table, use the following command:

                _____ _______ ______
            OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0<RET>
            OPR>
            15:40:10        --Routing for Printer 0 [KL2102] Deleted--
            OPR>

        3.  To route all the output that is going to node DN200  to  node
            KL2102, use the following command:

                _____ ___________ ________ _____________
            OPR>ROUTE ALL-DEVICES GIDNEY:: KL2102::<RET>
            OPR>
            15:43:08        --Node DN200 Routed to KL2102--
            OPR>




























                                   3-111
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (SEND)
                                   (SEND)


   SEND - Sending Messages
   SEND - Sending Messages



   Function
   Function

        The SEND command sends single- or  multiple-line  messages  to  a
        specific destination as defined by the keyword.  The SEND command
        allows you to  specify  a  one-line  message  terminated  with  a
        carriage  return  or  a  multiple-line  message terminated with a
        CTRL/Z.

        If you specify SEND ALL,  you  can  only  specify  a  single-line
        message terminated by a carriage return.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SEND keyword nn /switch message<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      ALL
                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      JOB
                                      OPERATOR
                                      TERMINAL

        followed by a stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        and optionally, for the BATCH-STREAM and OPERATOR keywords:

                                      /NODE:node-name::
                                      /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

        followed by a single- or multiple-line message


   Keywords
   Keywords

        ALL                specifies  that  a  message  be  sent  to  all
                           terminals   in  the  entire  system.   If  you
                           specify   the    ALL    keyword    with    the
                           /CLUSTER-NODE:  switch, all terminals for that
                           node receive the  text.   You  can  give  only
                           single-line messages when you specify ALL.

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies  that  a  message  be  sent   to   a
                           particular batch job, or over an IBM emulation


                                   3-112
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (SEND)
                                   (SEND)


                           node to a remote IBM host.  The stream  number
                           must be supplied with this keyword.

        JOB                specifies  that  a  message  be  sent   to   a
                           particular  job  that  is currently processing
                           under timesharing or within the batch  system.
                           The  job  number  must  be  supplied with this
                           keyword.

        OPERATOR           specifies that a message be  sent  to  another
                           operator  at  another  node  with  the  /NODE:
                           switch.  If you  do  not  specify  the  /NODE:
                           switch,  the  message is sent to all operators
                           at all nodes.

        TERMINAL           specifies  that  a  message  be  sent   to   a
                           particular  logged-in  terminal.  The terminal
                           number must be supplied for this keyword.


   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                           This  switch  cannot  be  used  with  the  ALL
                           keyword.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular cluster  node  within
                           the  system cluster that your message is sent.
                           The "cluster-node-name" qualifier can  be  any
                           node  name  within  the cluster or an asterisk
                           (*).  The asterisk specifies all nodes  within
                           the  cluster.   (This switch is valid only for
                           the ALL keyword.)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SEND command to notify all users that timesharing
            ends in 30 minutes.

                ____ ___ ___________ ____ __ __ ____________
            OPR>SEND ALL TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES<RET>
            OPR>
            14:57:05        --SEND Command Completed--
            OPR>




                                   3-113
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (SEND)
                                   (SEND)


        2.  Specify the SEND command to notify all operators that  a  new
            stand-alone schedule has been posted.

                ____ ________ ___ ___________ ________ __ ___________
            OPR>SEND OPERATOR NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED<RET>
            OPR>
            12:05:35
            From Operator Terminal 1: NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED
            OPR>
            12:05:39        --SEND Command Completed--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the SEND command to notify job 32  to  stop  queueing
            print  requests due to a problem with the line printer at the
            central site.

                ____ ___ __ __ ___ ___________
            OPR>SEND JOB 32 DO NOT QUEUE-<RET>
             ___ _____ ____ _____ _____________
             ANY PRINT JOBS UNTIL NOTIFIED<RET>
            OPR>
            10:39:05        --SEND Command Completed--
            OPR>

































                                   3-114
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (SET)
                                   (SET)


   SET - Setting Parameters for System Devices
   SET - Setting Parameters for System Devices



   Function
   Function

        The SET command sets various system parameters for  the  system's
        devices and features.

        In addition, the SET command can be issued  before  a  particular
        device  (queue) or stream has been started or becomes active.  In
        particular, the SET command is very useful within the  PTYCON.ATO
        file  for system start-up and it can be used during normal system
        operation as well.

        Because the  SET  command  is  complex  with  multiple  keywords,
        arguments, switches, and numeric values, each SET keyword command
        is described in the same format as individual OPR commands.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SET keyword<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      DISK-DRIVE
                                      JOB
                                      NODE
                                      ONLINE
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PORT
                                      PRINTER
                                      SCHEDULER
                                      STRUCTURE
                                      TAPE-DRIVE

        followed by one or  keywords,  arguments,  switches,  and  values
        described in the SET command subsections.











                                   3-115
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET BATCH-STREAM)
                             (SET BATCH-STREAM)


   SET BATCH-STREAM - Setting Batch Stream Parameters
   SET BATCH-STREAM - Setting Batch Stream Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET  BATCH-STREAM  command  sets  the  characteristics  of  a
        particular  stream  or a range of streams.  These characteristics
        remain in effect until you reissue the SET BATCH-STREAM command.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

        where nn must be the stream number

        or a range:                   n:m

        and, optionally, the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      ATTRIBUTE BATCON
                                                SITGO
                                      NOOPR-INTERVENTION
                                      OPR-INTERVENTION
                                      PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                      n:m
                                      TIME-LIMITS nn
                                                  n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Arguments
   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a batch-stream number.   The  number
                           is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                           your  installation   uses   additional   batch
                           streams.

        n:m                specifies a range of batch streams.

        ATTRIBUTE          specifies whether the  batch  stream  operates
                           with the BATCON or with the SITGO program.



                                   3-116
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET BATCH-STREAM)
                             (SET BATCH-STREAM)


             BATCON        specifies that the batch stream use the BATCON
                           controller.   This is the system default batch
                           controller.

             SITGO         specifies the  SITGO  batch  processor,  which
                           consists   of  a  fast  FORTRAN  compiler  for
                           compiling FORTRAN programs in a batch stream.

        NOOPR-INTERVENTION specifies that a user cannot make any requests
                           in  the  batch job that require you to perform
                           an action of some kind or require you to  send
                           a    message.     If    a    batch   job   has
                           NOOPR-INTERVENTION set, any messages it  sends
                           are  ignored  and you are not asked to perform
                           any  action.   If  the  batch   job   requests
                           mountable  devices,  and  if the job must wait
                           until the device  is  mounted,  the  job  will
                           receive an error.

        OPR-INTERVENTION   specifies that the user can pass  messages  to
                           you  and  that  you  are  available to perform
                           actions that a user or batch job requests.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies  the  priority  limits  of  a  batch
                           stream  or  a  range  of  batch streams at the
                           central site or at a node.  The numeric  value
                           associated  with this argument means that only
                           batch  jobs  submitted  by  users   with   the
                           /PRIORITY:   switch  specifying the number (or
                           range)  you  set  for  the  batch  stream  can
                           execute in that stream.  The numeric value for
                           the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can be from 1  to
                           63.   The  higher  the  number, the higher the
                           priority.

        TIME-LIMITS nn     specifies the maximum execution time limit for
                           a  given  batch  stream  or  a  range of batch
                           streams.  When a  batch  job  enters  a  batch
                           stream,  it receives a default execution time,
                           such as five minutes.  If the job exceeds this
                           time  limit  and if the user who submitted the
                           batch job set up his control  file  to  handle
                           time limits, the batch system gives the job an
                           additional 10% of the allocated time.  If  the
                           job  exceeds  this  additional 10%, the job is
                           canceled.  The TIME-LIMITS argument allows you
                           to specify that batch jobs that are set to run
                           a certain length  of  time  will  run  in  the
                           specified batch-stream number (or range).  The
                           numeric value for the TIME-LIMITS argument can
                           be from 0 to 99999, representing minutes.


                                   3-117
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET BATCH-STREAM)
                             (SET BATCH-STREAM)


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::) following the node name is optional.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set stream  number  3
            to have a priority limit of 63.

                ___ ____________ _ _______________ _______
            OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 3 PRIORITY-LIMITS 63<RET>
            OPR>
            13:20:54        Batch-stream 3  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set streams 0 through
            2 for no operator intervention.

                ___ ____________ ___ _______________________
            OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0:2 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
            OPR>
            16:11:17        Batch-stream 0  --Set Accepted--
            16:11:21        Batch-stream 1  --Set Accepted--
            16:11:24        Batch-stream 2  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>

















                                   3-118
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)


   SET CARD-PUNCH - Setting Card Punch Parameters
   SET CARD-PUNCH - Setting Card Punch Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET CARD-PUNCH  command  specifies  what  kind  of  jobs  are
        scheduled  on  this  device.   You  can set the form type, output
        limits (card limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken
        when  a  job  exceeds  the  output  limit that you specify.  This
        command allows you to change  the  parameters  that  are  set  at
        GALGEN  time.   You can specify a specific unit number or a range
        of unit numbers.

        The card-punch device handles standard 12-row 80-column cards.

        The defaults for the card punch are set by your System Manager at
        software-installation   time   through   the  generation  of  the
        <SYSTEM>SPFORM.INI file.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

        where nn must be a unit number

        or a range:                   n:m

        and, optionally, the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      DESTINATION quoted string
                                      FORMS-TYPE name
                                      LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                      OUTPUT-LIMITS cards
                                      PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                      n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Arguments
   Arguments

        nn                 specifies  a  card-punch  unit  number.    The
                           number  is  usually  from  0  to 5, but can be


                                   3-119
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)


                           larger if your installation has acquired  more
                           card-punch devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of card-punch unit numbers.


        DESTINATION node"user password account"::device:[directory]

                           specifies the destination to receive IBM  card
                           punch  output.  This is valid only if node has
                           been defined as an  SNA-WORKSTATION  with  the
                                                               __________
                           DEFINE   NODE  command.   See  the  DECnet/SNA
                           _______ ______ ___ _____ ______ ___ __________
                           TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's
                           _____
                           Guide for more information.

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name of the type  of  card-punch
                           forms.   Your  installation can have different
                           names for different types of card-punch forms.
                           By  setting the FORMS-TYPE, you are specifying
                           the type of forms in the card punch.

        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a card-punch job that is currently punching
                           on the unit number you specify exceeds the set
                           limit  of  output.   The  limit  is set by the
                           OUTPUT-LIMITS  argument.   There   are   three
                           possible    words    associated    with    the
                           LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                           card-punch  job  exceeds  the  card  limit  on
                           output.  You then have the option to  continue
                           or abort the card-punch job.

             CANCEL        specifies   that   the   card-punch   job   is
                           automatically canceled when the limit has been
                           exceeded.

             IGNORE        specifies that the  card-punch  job  continues
                           automatically  and the set output (card) limit
                           is ignored.

        OUTPUT-LIMITS cards

                           specifies the maximum card limit  for  punched
                           output.   This  argument  can  also  specify a
                           range of card limits.  The card  limit  refers
                           to   the  number  of  output  cards  that  are
                           punched.  This command restricts the  size  of


                                   3-120
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)


                           jobs  that  is  sent  to  the  card  punch you
                           specify.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance) of a card punch or a range of card
                           punches at the central site or at a node.  The
                           numeric  value  associated  with this argument
                           means that only card-punch jobs  submitted  by
                           users  with  the /PRIORITY:  switch specifying
                           the number (or range) you  set  for  the  card
                           punch  can  execute  on  that card punch.  The
                           numeric value for the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument
                           can  be  from  1 to 63.  The higher the number
                           is, the higher the priority is.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  or  an SNA workstation.  The default
                           is your  own  node.   The  double  colon  (::)
                           following the node name is optional.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set the forms  type  to
            5081s for all card-punch devices at your installation.

                ___ __________ ___ __________ _________
            OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 FORMS-TYPE 5081<RET>
            OPR>
            10:13:17        Card-Punch 0  --Set Accepted--

            10:13:20        Card-Punch 1  --Set Accepted--

            10:13:23        Card-Punch 2  --Set Accepted--

            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set all card-punch jobs
            for a maximum output limit of 200 cards per job.



                                   3-121
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                              (SET CARD-PUNCH)


                ___ __________ ___ ____________ ________
            OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 OUTPUT-LIMIT 200<RET>
            OPR>
            10:30:16        Card-Punch 0  --Set Accepted--

            10:30:19        Card-Punch 1  --Set Accepted--

            10:30:22        Card-Punch 2  --Set Accepted--

            OPR>












































                                   3-122
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET DISK-DRIVE)
                              (SET DISK-DRIVE)


   SET DISK-DRIVE - Setting Disk-Drive Parameters
   SET DISK-DRIVE - Setting Disk-Drive Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET DISK-DRIVE command sets the availability  characteristics
        of a particular disk drive device.  With the use of this command,
        you can allow or disallow users  from  mounting  and  dismounting
        structures  on  the disk drive.  You must specify the channel and
        drive numbers, and either the AVAILABLE or UNAVAILABLE argument.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SET DISK-DRIVE CHANNEL nn argument DRIVE nn argument<RET>

        where nn must be the channel number

        optionally followed by the argument:

                                      CONTROLLER nn

        followed by the drive unit number

        and either of the following arguments:

                                      AVAILABLE
                                      UNAVAILABLE

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        CHANNEL nn         specifies the channel number that connects the
                           disk  drive  with the central processing unit.
                           The SHOW STATUS  DISK-DRIVE  command  displays
                           the available channels on your system.

        DRIVE nn           specifies the physical unit number of the disk
                           drive.   The  SHOW  STATUS  DISK-DRIVE command
                           displays the drive numbers that are associated
                           with the channels on your system.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        CONTROLLER nn      specifies  the  number  of  the   disk   drive


                                   3-123
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET DISK-DRIVE)
                              (SET DISK-DRIVE)


                           controller.    The   SHOW   STATUS  DISK-DRIVE
                           command displays the controller  numbers  that
                           are  associated  with  the disk drives on your
                           system.

        AVAILABLE          specifies that users can now MOUNT  structures
                           on  this particular disk drive.  This argument
                           cancels  the   effect   of   the   UNAVAILABLE
                           argument.    The  PTYCON.ATO  file  determines
                           whether  each  of  the  disk  drives  at  your
                           installation  are  available or unavailable at
                           system start-up.

        UNAVAILABLE        specifies that users cannot  MOUNT  structures
                           on  this particular disk drive.  This argument
                           cancels the effect of the AVAILABLE  argument.
                           If  a  user  is currently using a structure on
                           this  disk  drive,  the  disk  drive   becomes
                           unavailable after the user completes his work.
                           If the system  crashes  or  is  shutdown,  the
                           command  SET  DISK-DRIVE  CHANNEL  nn DRIVE nn
                           UNAVAILABLE remains in effect after the system
                           is in operation again.

                           When you specify the UNAVAILABLE argument, you
                           can  enter a single- or multiple-line response
                           and confirm with a carriage return, or you can
                           confirm  with  a  carriage  return immediately
                           after  the  UNAVAILABLE   argument   and   OPR
                           responds  with  ENTER  TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH
                           ^Z.  You then enter as many lines of text  for
                           a  response  as  you  need.   When  you  press
                           CTRL/Z,  the  OPR>  prompt  returns  and  your
                           report is logged into the ERROR.SYS file.


   Switch
   Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.







                                   3-124
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET DISK-DRIVE)
                              (SET DISK-DRIVE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET DISK-DRIVE command to set drive 2 on  channel
            2  to  be unavailable.  Any users currently using this device
            are allowed to finish their work before  the  device  becomes
            unavailable  to them.  Any users requesting a structure mount
            on this device receives a message  notifying  them  that  the
            structure is unavailable.

                ___ __________ _______ _ _____ _ ________________
            OPR>SET DISK-DRIVE CHANNEL 2 DRIVE 2 UNAVAILABLE<RET>
            Enter Text and Terminate with ^Z
            _____ ____ __ ________
            DRIVE MUST BE ADJUSTED^Z
                                   ^
                                   |
                                <CTRL/Z>
            OPR>
            10:23:56          --Disk Drive Set Unavailable--
                    Chan 2 Drive 2 set unavailable for mounting by MOUNTR
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SET DISK-DRIVE command to make any  structure  on
            disk drive 2 on channel 2 available for mounts and dismounts.

                ___ __________ _______ _ _____ _ ______________
            OPR>SET DISK-DRIVE CHANNEL 2 DRIVE 2 AVAILABLE<RET>
            OPR>
            12:02:24          --Disk Drive Set Available--
                    Chan 2 Drive 2 set available for mounting by MOUNTR
            OPR>

























                                   3-125
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SET JOB)
                                 (SET JOB)


   SET JOB - Setting Characteristics for Jobs
   SET JOB - Setting Characteristics for Jobs



   Function
   Function

        The SET JOB command sets the characteristics for a particular job
        number.   You  can set the job for operator intervention allowed,
        no operator intervention allowed, or you can change the scheduler
        class of the job.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET JOB nn argument /switch<RET>

        where nn must be the job number

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      NOOPR-INTERVENTION
                                      OPR-INTERVENTION
                                      SCHEDULER-CLASS n

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Arguments
   Arguments

        nn                 specifies  a  job  number  currently  in   the
                           system.   The  numeric  value can be from 0 to
                           99999.

        NOOPR-INTERVENTION specifies that a user cannot make any requests
                           in  the  job  that  require  you to perform an
                           action of some kind and/or produce  a  message
                           to  be  answered  by  you.   If  the job has a
                           NOOPR-INTERVENTION setting, the  messages  are
                           ignored;  you  are  not  asked  to perform any
                           action.

        OPR-INTERVENTION   specifies that  a  user  associated  with  the
                           specified  job number can pass messages to you
                           and you can perform the requested actions.

        SCHEDULER-CLASS n  specifies the scheduler class for the  job  be
                           changed.   This  keyword can be used only when
                           POLICY-PROGRAM     is     controlling     your
                           class-scheduling.    Refer   to   your  System


                                   3-126
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SET JOB)
                                 (SET JOB)


                           Manager  about  a  POLICY-PROGRAM   accounting
                           system before you issue this command.


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        If you attempt to set the SCHEDULER-CLASS for  a  particular  job
        without  the  POLICY-PROGRAM  initiated at your installation, you
        will receive the following error message:

        hh:mm:ss        --Set Job Scheduler Error: Cannot change class--


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET JOB command to  allow  operator  intervention
            for job number 100.

                ___ ___ ___ _____________________
            OPR>SET JOB 100 OPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
            OPR>
            15:55:15        Job 100  --Modified--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify  the  SET  JOB  command   to   not   allow   operator
            intervention for job number 50.

                ___ ___ __ _______________________
            OPR>SET JOB 50 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
            OPR>
            16:43:34        Job 50  --Modified--
            OPR>











                                   3-127
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SET NODE)
                                 (SET NODE)


   SET NODE - Setting Node Parameters
   SET NODE - Setting Node Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET NODE command is applicable only if your installation  has
        IBM communications software.

        The   SET   NODE   command    sets    the    modem-related    and
        data-transfer-related  parameters  for  DN60  nodes, and sets the
        characteristics for SNA workstations.

        Before you set the parameters for a node,  you  must  define  the
        node  name, type, and mode with the DEFINE command.  Refer to the
        DEFINE command in this chapter.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SET NODE keyword arguments <RET>

        where keyword is:             node-name::

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      BYTES-PER-MESSAGE b
                                      CLEAR-SEND-DELAY d
                                      RECORDS-PER-MESSAGE r
                                      TIMEOUT-CATEGORY PRIMARY
                                                       SECONDARY
                                      TRANSPARENCY ON
                                                   OFF

        or for SNA workstations, one of these arguments:

                                      APPLICATION name
                                      CHARACTER-SET filespec
                                      CIRCUIT circuit-id
                                      DATA string
                                      LOGON-MODE name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        node-name::        specifies the node name of the remote  station
                           for IBM communications.  The double colon (::)
                           following the node name is optional.





                                   3-128
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SET NODE)
                                 (SET NODE)


   Arguments
   Arguments

        BYTES-PER-MESSAGE b

                           specifies the number of bytes, b, per  message
                           that  the  front  end uses to communicate with
                           the remote site.  There is  no  limit  to  the
                           number of bytes you can supply.

        CLEAR-SEND-DELAY d

                           specifies a clear-to-send delay, where d =  0,
                           1, 3, 9, or 13 milliseconds.  The default is 3
                           milliseconds.

        RECORDS-PER-MESSAGE r

                           specifies the number of records  per  message,
                           where r can equal:

                           0 for unlimited number of records (the default
                             for 3780)

                           2 for a unit with no multirecord feature

                           7 for  a  unit  like  an  IBM  2780  with  the
                             multirecord feature (the default for 2780)

        TIMEOUT-CATEGORY PRIMARY
                         SECONDARY

                           specifies the timeout category used by the BSC
                           protocol  to  determine how connecting systems
                           bid for use of the line.  Two systems  bidding
                           for  the use of a line must not be in the same
                           timeout category,  since  this  condition  can
                           result  in  simultaneous bids for a line and a
                           "deadly embrace".  To prevent this, one system
                           is  placed in the PRIMARY (p) category and the
                           other in the SECONDARY (s) category.

                           The timeout category for the HASP  spooler  is
                           always  SECONDARY  so  when  the  TOPS-20 host
                           connects to a HASP system, it must  be  placed
                           in  the PRIMARY timeout category.  The timeout
                           category for IBM 2780s and  3780s  is  usually
                           hardwired as PRIMARY, so when the TOPS-20 host
                           connects  to  stations  like  these,  it  must
                           usually  be  placed  in  the SECONDARY timeout
                           category.  The timeout category  for  the  ASP
                           spooler  may  be PRIMARY.  The default timeout


                                   3-129
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SET NODE)
                                 (SET NODE)


                           category is PRIMARY.

        TRANSPARENCY ON    specifies  a  transmission  mode   where   the
                     OFF   specifies  a  transmission  mode   where   the
                           recognition  of  most  control  characters  is
                           suppressed (TRANSPARENCY  ON  argument).   The
                           argument  can  only  be  specified  when using
                           HASP.  The default TRANSPARENCY is OFF.


   Arguments
   Arguments (for SNA workstations)

                                                               __________
   For more information about SNA workstations, refer to  the  DECnet/SNA
   _______ ______ ___ _____ ______ ___ __________ _____
   TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's Guide.


        APPLICATION name         Specifies   the   name    of    the
                                 application  in  the  IBM  host  to
                                 which the workstation connects.

        CHARACTER-SET filespec   Specifies the name of the file that
                                 contains      the      ASCII/EBCDIC
                                 translation  table  used   by   the
                                 workstation.

        CIRCUIT circuit-id        Specifies the name of the  circuit
                                 that  the Gateway uses to reach the
                                 IBM host.

        DATA string              Supplies     additional      log-on
                                 information  required  by  the  job
                                 entry subsystem in the IBM host.

        LOGON-MODE name          Specifies a name that the IBM  host
                                 uses     to    obtain    predefined
                                 characteristics  for  the   session
                                 being established.


   These arguments for the SET NODE command correspond to parameters  set
   by  the IBM host's system manager.  The SET NODE command gives you the
   option of changing or adding to information associated with the access
   name  you  specified  in  the  DEFINE  command.  If you specify a null
   argument for any parameter, the parameter is automatically cleared and
   reset to the information specified in the access name.

   To use the APPLICATION parameter, you must know the name  of  the  IBM
   application  to  which  you  want to connect.  Contact your IBM system
   manager for this information.




                                   3-130
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SET NODE)
                                 (SET NODE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You specify the SET NODE command to change  the  TRANSPARENCY
            from the OFF default to ON for node IBM2::.

                ___ ____ ______ ____________ _______
            OPR>SET NODE IBM2:: TRANSPARENCY ON<RET>
            OPR>
            16:32:43        -- Set for Node IBM2 Accepted --
            OPR>

        2.  You specify the SET NODE command  to  set  the  clear-to-send
            delay of 3 milliseconds for node IBM1::.

                ___ ____ ______ ________________ ______
            OPR>SET NODE IBM1:: CLEAR-SEND-DELAY 3<RET>
            OPR>
            17:23:45        -- Set for Node IBM1 Accepted --
            OPR>




































                                   3-131
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET ONLINE)
                                (SET ONLINE)


   SET ONLINE - Setting a Device On-Line
   SET ONLINE - Setting a Device On-Line


   Function
   Function

        The SET ONLINE command sets the devices listed below on-line when
        the  device  has  been  newly  installed at your operations site.
        This command is valid only  if  your  site  has  a  DX20  channel
        controller installed and on-line.

        The devices that are interfaced through the DX20 are:

        1.  TX01 - tape controller

        2.  TX03 - channel selector

        3.  TX05 - tape drive selector

        4.  TU70 - tape drive

        5.  TU71 - tape drive

        6.  TU72 - tape drive

        In addition, this command is helpful when Field Service takes one
        of  these devices off-line for repair and then returns the device
        back to you for your control.

        The SET ONLINE command's arguments  are  channel  number,  device
        unit  number, and controller number, separated by commas.  If the
        device has no controller number, type -1.

                                      NOTE

                This  command  currently  accepts  an   alternate
                channel   number,   device   unit   number,   and
                controller number separated by commas.   However,
                these  alternate  arguments  are  not used by the
                system and are provided for future use.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET ONLINE ch,unit,cntrlr /switch<RET>

        where ch is the channel number

        unit is the device unit number

        cntrlr is the controller number



                                   3-132
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET ONLINE)
                                (SET ONLINE)


|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                 /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|  
   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        Once the monitor has been reloaded, you do not need  to  SET  the
        device  ONLINE  again.  The device is automatically recognized by
        the monitor as being on-line.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You set the hardware device TX05 on-line after  it  has  been
            installed  during  timesharing  with an address of channel 1,
            unit 1, controller 1.

                ___ ______ __________
            OPR>SET ONLINE 1,1,1<RET>
            OPR>
             8:32:13        --Set Online Accepted--
            OPR>

        2.  You set the hardware device TU70 on-line after Field  Service
            repaired the tape unit.

                ___ ______ __________
            OPR>SET ONLINE 1,2,1<RET>
            OPR>
            14:43:09        --Set Online Accepted--
            OPR>         











                                   3-133
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)
                           (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)


   SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH - Setting Paper-Tape-Punch Parameters
   SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH - Setting Paper-Tape-Punch Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command specifies what kind of jobs will
        be  scheduled on this device.  You can set the forms type, output
        limits (fold limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken
        when  a  job  exceeds  the  output  limit that you specify.  This
        command allows you change the parameters that are set  at  GALGEN
        time.   You can specify a specific unit number or a range of unit
        numbers.

        The defaults for the paper-tape punch  are  set  by  your  System
        Manager  at  software-installation time through the generation of
        the  <SYSTEM>SPFORM.INI  file.   These  defaults   are   normally
        referred to as NORMAL in most installations.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

        where nn must be a unit number

        or a range:                   n:m

        and, optionally, the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      FORMS-TYPE name
                                      LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                      OUTPUT-LIMITS folds
                                      PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                      n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Arguments
   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a paper-tape-punch unit number.  The
                           number  is  usually  from  0  to 5, but can be
                           larger if your installation has acquired  more
                           paper-tape-punch devices.


                                   3-134
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)
                           (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)


        n:m                specifies a range of paper-tape punches.

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name of the type  of  paper-tape
                           forms.   Typically  in some installations, the
                           normal paper-tape form is  referred  to  as  a
                           1-inch  wide  fan-fold, and can be abbreviated
                           as 1WFF or NORMAL.  Your installation can have
                           different  form  names  for different types of
                           paper-tape.  By setting  the  FORMS-TYPE,  you
                           are  specifying  the  type  of  forms  in  the
                           paper-tape punch.

        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a paper-tape job that is currently punching
                           on the unit number you specify exceeds the set
                           limit  of  output.   The limit is set with the
                           OUTPUT-LIMITS  argument.   There   are   three
                           possible    words    associated    with    the
                           LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                           paper-tape  job  exceeds  the  fold  limit  on
                           output.  You then have the option to  continue
                           or abort the paper-tape job.

             CANCEL        specifies   that   the   paper-tape   job   is
                           automatically canceled when the limit has been
                           exceeded.

             IGNORE        specifies that the  paper-tape  job  continues
                           automatically  and  the  specified output fold
                           limit will be ignored.

        OUTPUT-LIMITS folds

                           specifies the maximum fold limit  for  punched
                           paper-tape  output.   This  argument  can also
                           specify a range  of  fold  limits.   The  fold
                           limit  refers  to  the  number of output folds
                           that are punched.  This command restricts  the
                           size  of  jobs that are sent to the paper-tape
                           punch you specify.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                        n:m

                           specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance)  of  a paper-tape punch or a range
                           of paper-tape punches at the central  site  or


                                   3-135
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)
                           (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)


                           at  a node.  The numeric value associated with
                           this argument means that only paper-tape  jobs
                           submitted by users with the /PRIORITY:  switch
                           specifying the number (or range) you  set  for
                           the  paper-tape  punch  can  execute  on  that
                           paper-tape punch.  The numeric value  for  the
                           PRIORITY-LIMITS  argument can be from 1 to 63.
                           The higher  the  number  is,  the  higher  the
                           priority is.


   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::) following the node name is optional.

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  commmand is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command to set  the  default
            form  type  to  1WFF  for  a  paper-tape-punch device at your
            installation.

                ___ ________________ _ __________ _________
            OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0 FORMS-TYPE 1WFF<RET>
            OPR>
            12:45:09        Papertape 0  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command  form,  to  set  all
            paper-tape-punch  jobs for a maximum output limit of 25 folds
            per job.

                ___ ________________ ___ ____________ _______
            OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0:1 OUTPUT-LIMIT 25<RET>
            OPR>
            13:45:07        Papertape 0  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>






                                   3-136
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PLOTTER)
                               (SET PLOTTER)


   SET PLOTTER - Setting Plotter Parameters
   SET PLOTTER - Setting Plotter Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET PLOTTER command specifies what kind of jobs are scheduled
        on  this device.  You can set the forms type, output limits (step
        limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken when  a  job
        exceeds  the  output limit that you specify.  This command allows
        you change the parameters that are set at GALGEN time.   You  can
        specify a specific unit number or a range of unit numbers.

        The   plotter   device   draws   (or   plots)   ink   plots    of
        computer-generated data.  Its movement in producing the output is
        measured in "steps".  The steps refer to the speed per second  of
        the  plotter  and the distance (or size) that the pencils move on
        the output paper.  The paper for the plotter is either drum  feed
        or bed feed.

        The defaults for the plotter are set by your  System  Manager  at
        software-installation   time   through   the  generation  of  the
        <SYSTEM>SPFORM.INI file.   At  some  installations,  the  default
        settings for the plotter are referred to as NORMAL.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET PLOTTER nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

        where nn must be a unit number

        or a range:                   n:m

        and, optionally the switch:

                                      /NODE:node-name::

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      FORMS-TYPE name
                                      LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                      OUTPUT-LIMITS steps
                                      PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                      n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name




                                   3-137
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PLOTTER)
                               (SET PLOTTER)


   Arguments
   Arguments

        nn                 specifies a plotter unit number.   The  number
                           is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                           your installation has more plotter devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of plotter unit numbers.

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name  of  the  type  of  plotter
                           forms.   Typically,  the  normal plotter paper
                           form is referred to as roll feed or bed  feed.
                           This can be referred to as type ROLL, DRUM, or
                           BED.  Your  installation  can  have  different
                           form names for different plotter types.

        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a plotter job that is currently plotting on
                           the unit number you specify  exceeds  the  set
                           limit  of  output.   The limit is set with the
                           OUTPUT-LIMITS  argument.   There   are   three
                           possible    words    associated    with    the
                           LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                           plotter  job exceeds the step limit on output.
                           You then have the option to continue or  abort
                           the plotter job.

             CANCEL        specifies   that   the    plotter    job    is
                           automatically canceled when the limit has been
                           exceeded.

             IGNORE        specifies  that  the  plotter  job   continues
                           automatically  and the specified output (step)
                           limit will be ignored.

        OUTPUT-LIMIT steps

                           specifies the  number  of  plotter  steps  per
                           second.  A step is the horizontal and vertical
                           movement of the pen within  the  grid  on  the
                           paper.   This  is  referred to as the size (or
                           distance).  The number you specify  represents
                           nnK   steps   (K   =   1000).    For  example,
                           OUTPUT-LIMIT 3 is equal to 3000.






                                   3-138
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PLOTTER)
                               (SET PLOTTER)


        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                        n:m

                           specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance)   of  a  plotter  or  a  range  of
                           plotters at the central site  or  at  a  node.
                           The   numeric   value   associated  with  this
                           argument  means   that   only   plotter   jobs
                           submitted by users with the /PRIORITY:  switch
                           specifying the number (or range) you  set  for
                           the  plotter can execute on that plotter.  The
                           numeric value for the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument
                           can  be  from  1 to 63.  The higher the number
                           is, the higher the priority is.

   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                           station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                           default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                           (::) following the node name is optional.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET PLOTTER command to change the forms  type  of
            the plotter.

                ___ _______ _ __________ _________
            OPR>SET PLOTTER 1 FORMS-TYPE ROLL<RET>
            OPR>
             9:34:12        Plotter 1  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SET PLOTTER command to change the output limit.

                ___ _______ _ ____________ ______
            OPR>SET PLOTTER 0 OUTPUT-LIMIT 8<RET>
            OPR>
            10:11:12        Plotter 0  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>





                                   3-139
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PORT CI)
                               (SET PORT CI)


   SET PORT CI - Controlling the CI port
   SET PORT CI - Controlling the CI port



   Function
   Function

        The SET PORT CI command allows or disallows using the CI20  port.
        You can use this command only if your system has a CI20.

        Set the CI port UNAVAILABLE to run diagnostics on the CI hardware
        or  to remove a TOPS-20 system from a CFS cluster.  Never set the
        CI port UNAVAILABLE without approval from  your  system  manager.
                _______ ______ _________ _____
        See the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide for more information.

        Setting the CI port UNAVAILABLE  helps  you  perform  an  orderly
        TOPS-20 shutdown in a CFS configuration.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET PORT keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        CI

        and argument is one of the following:

                                      AVAILABLE
                                      UNAVAILABLE

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        CI                 specifies the CI port.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        AVAILABLE          specifies that TOPS-20 start  using  the  CI20
                           again.  When you give this command, the system
                           asks you whether there is another TOPS-20 node
                           in   the   cluster.    If  yes,  you  will  be
                           instructed  to  reboot  the  system.   If  you
                           answer  no  and  the  system discovers another
                           TOPS-20 system on the CI, one of  the  systems
                           will BUGHLT.

                           This  argument  cancels  the  effect  of   the


                                   3-140
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PORT CI)
                               (SET PORT CI)


                           UNAVAILABLE  argument.   Once  this command is
                           given and the CI20 microcode  is  successfully
                           loaded, the CI port remains AVAILABLE until it
                           is set UNAVAILABLE.

                           AVAILABLE is the default.

        UNAVAILABLE        specifies that TOPS-20 should stop  using  the
                           CI.

                           When you SET PORT CI UNAVAILABLE,  the  system
                           lists the structures that will be affected and
                           asks you to respond  with  ABORT,  PROCEED  or
                           FORCE.   You must be sure that all multiaccess
                           structures are  dismounted  properly,  or  the
                           users  will  be  "hung."  Notify  the users to
                           dismount the affected structures.

                           The SET PORT CI UNAVAILABLE command remains in
                           effect until you use the SET PORT CI AVAILABLE
                           command, even if the system crashes or is shut
                           down and rebooted.

                           If a massbus disk drive is dualported, it  may
                           be  necessary  to  switch  to  single  port so
                           access  to  the  drive  can  continue  on  one
                           system.

                           After giving the users time  to  dismount  the
                           structure, use the RESPOND command with one of
                           the following options:

             ABORT         cancels  the  command  without  changing   the
                           status of the CI or any structures.

             PROCEED       begins  the  procedure  to  set  the  CI  port
                           unavailable.

             FORCE         dismounts all structures and sets the CI  port
                           unavailable.  (Use caution with this response;
                           structures are dismounted whether or not users
                           are accessing the structure.)

        If a massbus drive is dualported, the system informs you  with  a
        message.  Respond by manually setting the port switch to a single
        system.  Then type the PROCEED response.







                                   3-141
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PORT CI)
                               (SET PORT CI)


   Switch
   Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Set the CI UNAVAILABLE to stop using the CI20.

                ___ ____ __ ___________ _____
            OPR>SET PORT CI UNAVAILABLE <RET>
            OPR>
            12:14:48  <1>     -- Port Unavailable Procedure Notice --
            Setting CI Port 7 UNAVAILABLE

            The following structure(s) need to be dismounted or removed.

            DISK DRIVE INFORMATION DISK PACK INFO...

                  Chan-Cont   Disk    Mount    Mount              Usage
             Type   Drive    Status   Status   Count Name         Options
            ----- ----------------    ------   ----- ------------ -------
            *RP06 0,  ,2     Avail    Mounted  1     AP02   (1/1)
             RA81 7,07,5     Avail    Mounted  1     EXODUS (1/1)
             RA60 7,07,254   Avail    Mounted  1     DRV354 (1/1)
             RA81 7,07,18    Avail    Mounted  0     DRV18  (1/1)
                  NOTE: Channel 7 indicates CI channel
                  (*) indicates dual ported disk drives

            Type 'RESPOND <number> option' where 'option' is one  of  the
            following:

                 ABORT           To cancel Port Unavailable Procedure.
                 PROCEED         To  follow   normal   port   unavailable
                                 procedure   verifying   each   structure
                                 change.
                 FORCE           To proceed with no further notification.
                                 Use this option with extreme caution.

                _______ _ _______ _____
            OPR>RESPOND 1 PROCEED <RET>
            OPR>
            12:15:33     -- Port Unavailable Procedure Notice --
                        Structure CHIP set exclusive due to 
                         port unavailable operation
                                        .


                                   3-142
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PORT CI)
                               (SET PORT CI)


                                        .
                                        .
            12:21:24     -- Port Unavailable Operation Completed --
                        Port Set Unavailable
            OPR>

        2.  Set the CI AVAILABLE to allow use  of  the  CI20  (single  CI
            system).

                ___ ____ __ _________ _____
            OPR>SET PORT CI AVAILABLE <RET>
            OPR>
            17:40:31  <16>    -- Port Available Procedure Notice --
                   Is there another TOPS-20 system 
                    currently running on the CI?
                   'RESPOND <number> Yes or No'

                _______ __ __ _____
            OPR>RESPOND 16 NO <RET>
            OPR>
            17:40:42      -- Port Available Operation Completed --
                   The following disk structures have been 
                   returned to available:
                   Structure DISK1 set shared due to 
                   port available operation
                   Channel 7 Controller 1 Drive 1 set available
                   Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 8 set available
                   Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 9 set available
                   Channel 7 Controller 8 Drive 254 set available
                   Port set available 

        3.  Set the CI AVAILABLE to allow use of the  CI20  (multiple  CI
            system).

                ___ ____ __ _________ _____
            OPR>SET PORT CI AVAILABLE <RET>
            OPR>
            17:42:33  <18>    -- Port Available Procedure Notice --
                   Is there another TOPS-20 system 
                   currently running on the CI?
                   'RESPOND <number> Yes or No'

                _______ __ ___ _____
            OPR>RESPOND 18 YES <RET>
            OPR>

            17:42:46    -- Port Available Procedure Notice --
                   CI port will not be in use until system is reloaded


            17:42:46    -- Port Available Operation Completed --
                   The following disk structures have been 
                   returned to available:
                   Structure DISK1 set shared due to 
                   port available operation


                                   3-143
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PORT CI)
                               (SET PORT CI)


                   Channel 7 Controller 1 Drive 1 set available
                   Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 8 set available
                   Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 9 set available
                   Channel 7 Controller 8 Drive 254 set available
                   Port not found but status set to available
















































                                   3-144
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PORT NI)
                               (SET PORT NI)


   SET PORT NI - Controlling the NI Port
   SET PORT NI - Controlling the NI Port



   Function
   Function

        You can use the SET PORT NI command only if your installation has
        an Ethernet interface.

        The SET PORT NI command allows or disallows using the NI port.

        Set the  NI  port  UNAVAILABLE  to  run  diagnostics  on  the  NI
        hardware.   Do  not  set the NI port UNAVAILABLE without approval
                                          _______ ______ _________  _____
        from the system manager.  See the TOPS-20 System Manager's  Guide
        for more information.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET PORT keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        NI

        and argument is one of the following:

                                      AVAILABLE
                                      UNAVAILABLE

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        NI                 specifies the NI port.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        AVAILABLE          specifies that users are allowed to access the
                           Ethernet interface.  This argument cancels the
                           effect of the UNAVAILABLE argument.

                           AVAILABLE is the default setting.

        UNAVAILABLE        specifies  that  users   cannot   access   the
                           Ethernet  interface.   This  includes  DECnet,
                           LAT, and the NI% JSYS.




                                   3-145
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PORT NI)
                               (SET PORT NI)


   Switch
   Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.











































                                   3-146
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PRINTER)
                               (SET PRINTER)


   SET PRINTER - Setting Line Printer Parameters
   SET PRINTER - Setting Line Printer Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET PRINTER command specifies what kind of jobs are scheduled
        on  this  device.   You  can  set  the  forms  type, page limits,
        priority limits, and the action to be taken when  a  job  exceeds
        the  output  limit  that you specify.  This command allows you to
        change the parameters that are  set  at  GALGEN  time.   You  can
        specify  a  specific  unit number or a range of unit numbers.  In
        addition, you can  specify  ranges  for  the  page  and  priority
        limits.

|       You can use an alias name defined with the DEFINE  ALIAS  command
|       to reference a printer specification in this command.

        The defaults for the line printers at your installation  are  set
        by  your System Manager at software-installation time through the
        generation of the  <SYSTEM>n-CONFIG.CMD  file  (where  n  is  the
        TOPS-20  software  generation  number) and the <SYSTEM>LPFORM.INI
        file.  These defaults are usually referred to as NORMAL  in  most
        installations.

        The printer is also commonly referred to as the line printer.

        There are two basic types of line printers, those that  print  in
        uppercase  characters  only  (64  character print drum) and those
        that  print  in  both  uppercase  and  lowercase  characters  (96
        character print drum).


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET PRINTER nn arguments /switch<RET>
|  
|       followed by the alias name

        or followed by the unit number:

                                      nn

        or a range of numbers:        n:m

        or optionally, one of these arguments:

                                      CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::



                                   3-147
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PRINTER)
                               (SET PRINTER)


        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
                                      or followed by: PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      DESTINATION quoted string
                                      FORMS-TYPE name
                                      LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                      PAGE-LIMITS pages
                                      PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                      n:m

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Arguments
   Arguments

|       aliasname          specifies  an  alias  name  defined  with  the
|                          DEFINE  ALIAS  command  to reference a printer
|                          specification.
|  
        nn                 specifies a printer unit number.   The  number
                           is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                           your installation has  acquired  more  printer
                           devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of printer unit numbers.

        CLUSTER nn         specifies a printer, or range of printers, on
                n:m        a node within  a  cluster.   A  cluster  is  a
                           configuration   of   processors  with  similar
                           internal characteristics.  Each  processor  in
                           the  configuration  is  identified  by  a node
                           name.   For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,   and
                           LOUIE::   can  be three nodes within a cluster
                           of TOPS-20 processors.

        DQS queuename      specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a


                                   3-148
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PRINTER)
                               (SET PRINTER)


                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

        LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

             PORT "name"   specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

           SERVICE "name"  specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

             SERVER "name" specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

        NODE node-name::   specifies that the printer and  reader  device
                           for  a  node  within  the  system's network be
                           started.  The double colon (::) following  the
                           node  name  is  optional.  Before you start an
                           IBM node, you must define the node and set the
                           parameters  for the node.  Refer to the DEFINE


                                   3-149
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PRINTER)
                               (SET PRINTER)


                           and SET NODE commands in this chapter.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS node-name and cannot be an
                           alias.

        DESTINATION node"user password account"::device:[directory]

                           specifies  the  destination  to  receive   IBM
                           printer  output.   This  is valid only if node
                           has been defined as  an  SNA-WORKSTATION  with
                                                               __________
                           the  DEFINE  NODE command.  See the DECnet/SNA
                           _______ ______ ___ _____ ______ ___ __________
                           TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's
                           _____
                           Guide  for  more information.  The DESTINATION
                           argument is valid only with the  specification
                           of unit number "nn" or a range of unit numbers
                           "n:m".

        FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name  of  the  type  of  printer
                           forms.   Typically,  the normal paper form for
                           the printer is referred to  as  1-ply-wide  or
                           1-ply-narrow.   These can be abbreviated as 1W
                           or 1N, or can be given some other name by your
                           System  Manager.   Your  installation can have
                           different names for different  types  of  line
                           printer forms.  By setting the FORMS-TYPE, you
                           are specifying the type of forms in  the  line
                           printer.   The  FORMS-TYPE  argument  is valid
                           with the unit  number  argument  and  the  LAT
                           (PORT   or   SERVICE)  arguments.   FORMS-TYPE
                           cannot be used if the CLUSTER or DQS arguments
                           are specified.

        LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                           specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                           if a printer job that is currently printing on
                           the  unit  number  you  specify  exceeds   the
                           specified  limit  of output.  The limit is set
                           with  the  PAGE-LIMITS  argument.   There  are
                           three   possible  words  associated  with  the
                           LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

             ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                           printer  job exceeds the page limit on output.
                           You then have the option to continue or  abort
                           the printer job.


                                   3-150
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PRINTER)
                               (SET PRINTER)


             CANCEL        specifies that the print job is  automatically
                           canceled when the limit has been exceeded.

             IGNORE        specifies  that  the   print   job   continues
                           automatically  and  the  specified output page
                           limit is ignored.

        PAGE-LIMITS pages  specifies the maximum page limit  for  printed
                           output.   This  argument  can  also  specify a
                           range of page limits.  The page  limit  refers
                           to   the  number  of  output  pages  that  are
                           printed.  This command restricts the  size  of
                           jobs that are sent to the printer you specify.

        PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                        n:m

                           specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                           importance)  of  a  line printer or a range of
                           line printers at the  central  site  or  at  a
                           node.   The numeric value associated with this
                           argument  means   that   only   printer   jobs
                           submitted by users with the /PRIORITY:  switch
                           specifying the number (or range) you  set  for
                           the  line printer can execute on that printer.
                           The  numeric  value  for  the  PRIORITY-LIMITS
                           argument  can be from 1 to 63.  The higher the
                           number is, the higher the priority is.


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET PRINTER command to set the default  printer's
            forms  type  to  1-ply-wide  for  all  line  printers at your
            installation.  NORMAL has  been  previously  defined  in  the
            LPFORM.INI file as 1-ply-wide paper.

                ___ _______ ___ __________ ___________
            OPR>SET PRINTER 0:2 FORMS-TYPE NORMAL<RET>

            OPR>


                                   3-151
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET PRINTER)
                               (SET PRINTER)


            13:10:10        Printer 0  --Set Accepted--

            13:10:11        Printer 1  --Set Accepted--

            13:10:12        Printer 2  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify   the   SET    PRINTER    command    to    set    the
            LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION  to IGNORE.  This means that all queued
            printer jobs that exceed their output page limit continue  to
            print and are not aborted.  In addition, there is no required
            operator action to take except  loading  paper  in  the  line
            printer.

                ___ _______ ___ _____________________ ___________
            OPR>SET PRINTER 0:1 LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION IGNORE<RET>
            OPR>
            15:43:17        Printer 0  --Set Accepted--

            15:43:18        Printer 1  --Set Accepted--
            OPR>

































                                   3-152
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET SCHEDULER)
                              (SET SCHEDULER)


   SET SCHEDULER - Setting System Performance
   SET SCHEDULER - Setting System Performance



   Function
   Function

        The SET SCHEDULER  command  changes  the  scheduling  scheme  (or
        allocation  of  system  resources) for batch jobs and timesharing
        jobs.

        Normally, if your installation is making use of the TOPS-20 class
        scheduling  of  jobs,  the  scheduling  classes are set up in the
        n-CONFIG.CMD file at system startup.  The SET  SCHEDULER  command
        allows  you  to  change these classes during timesharing, such as
        when first shift ends and second shift begins.

        You should refer to your  System  Manager  about  job  scheduling
        before you use this command with any of its available arguments.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET SCHEDULER argument /switch<RET>

        where argument can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-CLASS BACKGROUND
                                                  NONE
                                                  scheduler-class

                                      BIAS-CONTROL nn

                                      CLASS n nn  

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Arguments
   Arguments

        BATCH-CLASS        specifies that the class be  changed  for  all
                           batch   jobs  submitted  to  your  system  for
                           processing.   With  this  argument   you   can
                           specify BACKGROUND, NONE, or a scheduler-class
                           number.  To  check  the  current  batch  class
                           setting, give the SHOW SCHEDULER command.

             BACKGROUND    specifies that batch  jobs  for  a  particular
                           class  be  processed  in your system using the
                           CPU time that has not been  allocated  to  any


                                   3-153
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET SCHEDULER)
                              (SET SCHEDULER)


                           other class.

|                          If you are not using the class scheduler,  the
|                          BACKGROUND  argument  causes batch jobs to run
|                          in the lowest priority queue.

             NONE          specifies that batch  jobs  entered  into  the
                           system  be processed whenever CPU time becomes
                           available and is not assigned to a  particular
                           class  that has been allocated a percentage of
                           CPU time.

             scheduler-class

                           specifies that batch jobs be  processed  in  a
                           particular   class   number   that   has  been
                           allocated a certain percentage of CPU time.

        BIAS-CONTROL nn    specifies  that  the  allocation   of   system
                           resources   between   compute-bound  jobs  and
                           interactive jobs be changed.  The  "nn"  is  a
                           integer from 1 to 20 that determines which job
                           grouping  receives   the   higher   or   lower
                           priority.   To  allocate  a higher priority to
                           compute-bound jobs, set the integer in the  11
                           to   20   range  with  20  being  the  highest
                           priority.  To allocate a  higher  priority  to
                           interactive  jobs, set the integer in the 1 to
                           10 range with 1 being  the  highest  priority.
                           The  default  is set by your System Manager at
                           system  installation  time.   To   check   the
                           current  setting of the bias control, give the
                           SHOW SCHEDULER command.

        CLASS n nn         specifies the percentage of  CPU  time  for  a
                           particular   job   class   be   changed.   The
                           percentage (nn) cannot exceed a 100% total for
                           all  classes  in the system.  The class number
                           (n) can be from 0 to 7.  To check the  current
                           settings  of  the classes in your system, give
                           the SHOW SCHEDULER command.

   Switch
   Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all


                                   3-154
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET SCHEDULER)
                              (SET SCHEDULER)


|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You change the batch class and percentage at the end of first
            shift  to  allow  for  more CPU time for production jobs that
            process in the batch mode.

                ___ _________ ___________ ______
            OPR>SET SCHEDULER BATCH-CLASS 1<RET>
            OPR>
            15:31:09        --Scheduler Setting Modified--
                ___ _________ _____ _ _______
            OPR>SET SCHEDULER CLASS 1 60<RET>
            OPR>
            15:31:45        --Scheduler Setting Modified--
            OPR>

        2.  You  set  the  scheduler  bias-control   to   15   to   allow
            compute-bound  (production)  jobs  a  greater  allocation  of
            system resources than interactive jobs.

                ___ _________ ____________ _______
            OPR>SET SCHEDULER BIAS-CONTROL 15<RET>
            OPR>
            16:30:09        --Scheduler Bias set to 15--
            OPR>




























                                   3-155
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET STRUCTURE)
                              (SET STRUCTURE)


   SET STRUCTURE - Setting Structure Parameters
   SET STRUCTURE - Setting Structure Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET STRUCTURE command enters a new structure or  changes  the
        parameters of an existing structure.

        The SET STRUCTURE command enters the parameters  of  a  structure
        into  the  system's structure data base.  The structure data base
        contains a catalog of all the system's mountable  structures  and
        their   parameters.    Whenever   a  structure  is  mounted,  the
        parameters  in  the  structure  data  base  take  effect.   These
        parameters do not change if the system crashes or is shut down.

        You can display the contents of the structure data base with  the
        SHOW STATUS STRUCTURE command.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SET STRUCTURE keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword is the structure's name:

                                      structure-name:

        and argument must be one of the following:

                                      ACKNOWLEDGED
                                      AVAILABLE
                                      DOMESTIC
                                      DUMPABLE
                                      EXCLUSIVE
                                      FOREIGN
                                      IGNORED
                                      NODUMPABLE
                                      REGULATED
                                      SHARED
                                      UNAVAILABLE
                                      UNREGULATED
|  
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        structure-name:    specifies the alias for  the  structure.   The


                                   3-156
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET STRUCTURE)
                              (SET STRUCTURE)


                           alias  is  the  mounted  structure-name.   The
                           structure-name must be from 1 to 6  characters
                           in  length  and  must  include the colon.  The
                           alias is normally the  same  as  the  physical
                           identification  unless  a  privileged user has
                           specified a different alias.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        ACKNOWLEDGED       specifies that  structure  attributes  can  be
                           changed  only  with the SET STRUCTURE command.
                           If a structure attribute is  changed  by  some
                           other means, the Mountable D.

                           The opposite state of ACKNOWLEDGED is IGNORED.
                           When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                           structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                           ACKNOWLEDGED.

        AVAILABLE          specifies that the structure is  available  so
                           that users can MOUNT the structure.

                           The   opposite   state   of    AVAILABLE    is
                           UNAVAILABLE.   When a new structure is entered
                           into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                           state is AVAILABLE.

        DOMESTIC           specifies that the structure with its alias is
                           to  be DOMESTIC.  A user can ACCESS or CONNECT
                           to  his  directory  on  a  DOMESTIC  structure
                           without giving a password.

                           The opposite state  of  DOMESTIC  is  FOREIGN.
                           When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                           structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                           FOREIGN.

        DUMPABLE           specifies  to  allow  continuable  dumps  when
                           Dump-On-BUGCHK   is  enabled.   Dump-On-BUGCHK
                           (DOB) allows the system to take a  dump  at  a
                           time  specified by the System Manager, without
                           discontinuing system process  time.   This  is
                           referred  to  as  a  "continuable"  dump.  The
                           structure must be up  and  spinning,  but  the
                           structure  need not be MOUNTed.  The structure
                           must have a valid <SYSTEM>DUMP.EXE  file.   If
                           this  file  does  not exist or is invalid, the
                           structure is ignored when a  continuable  dump
                           occurs.



                                   3-157
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET STRUCTURE)
                              (SET STRUCTURE)


                           This SET command makes the structure  dumpable
                           regardless  of  any  system  reloads,  because
                           GALAXY  saves  the  dumpable  status  of   the
                           structure.

        EXCLUSIVE          specifies  that  the  structure   in   a   CFS
                           configuration  is  available  only to users on
                           the system that set the structure EXCLUSIVE.

                           The opposite state  of  EXCLUSIVE  is  SHARED.
                           When  a  new structure is mounted, its default
                           state is SHARED.  A structure set EXCLUSIVE on
                           one  CFS  system  should be set UNAVAILABLE on
                           all other systems in the CFS configuration.

        FOREIGN            specifies the structure with the alias  to  be
                           FOREIGN.   A  user must always give a password
                           to ACCESS or  CONNECT  to  a  directory  on  a
                           FOREIGN structure.

                           The opposite state  of  FOREIGN  is  DOMESTIC.
                           When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                           structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                           FOREIGN.   The  primary  public  structure  is
                           always  DOMESTIC.   An  attempt  to  set  this
                           structure FOREIGN is ignored by the system.

        IGNORED            specifies that the structure is not under  the
                           control  of  the  Mountable  Device Allocator.
                           Only privileged  users  can  change  structure
                           attributes  and  mount the structure, and only
                           by using direct monitor calls.

                           While the structure is in  an  IGNORED  state,
                           SET STRUCTURE commands are accepted but do not
                           take  effect  until  the  structure   is   set
                           ACKNOWLEDGED.   Also,  a  structure  cannot be
                           DISMOUNTED  through   the   mountable   device
                           allocator unless it is set ACKNOWLEDGED.

                           If the structure has already been MOUNTed by a
                           user  when the structure is set IGNORED, users
                           can continue to MOUNT the structure.   If  the
                           structure  is  not  MOUNTed  when  it  is  set
                           IGNORED, users cannot MOUNT the structure.

                           The opposite state of IGNORED is ACKNOWLEDGED.
                           When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                           structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                           ACKNOWLEDGED.



                                   3-158
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET STRUCTURE)
                              (SET STRUCTURE)


        NONDUMPABLE        specifies to disallow continuable  dumps  when
                           Dump-On-BUGCHK   is  enabled.   Refer  to  the
                           DUMPABLE argument for a  description  of  this
                           feature.

        REGULATED          specifies that the  structure  has  accounting
                           and that prior incrementing of the mount count
                           is required to use the structure.

                           The   opposite   state   of    REGULATED    is
                           UNREGULATED.   When a new structure is entered
                           into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                           state   is   REGULATED.   The  primary  public
                           structure is always UNREGULATED.   An  attempt
                           to  set this structure REGULATED is ignored by
                           the system.

        SHARED             specifies  that  the  structure   in   a   CFS
                           configuration  is  available  to  users on any
                           system.

                           The opposite state  of  SHARED  is  EXCLUSIVE.
                           When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                           structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                           SHARED.

        UNAVAILABLE        specifies  that  the   structure   cannot   be
                           mounted,  but allows those users who currently
                           have the structure  mounted  to  finish  their
                           work on it.

                           The   opposite   state   of   UNAVAILABLE   is
                           AVAILABLE.   When  a  new structure is entered
                           into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                           state is AVAILABLE.

        UNREGULATED        specifies that the  structure  does  not  have
                           accounting  and that prior incrementing of the
                           mount  count  is  not  required  to  use  this
                           structure.

                           The   opposite   state   of   UNREGULATED   is
                           REGULATED.   When  a  new structure is entered
                           into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                           state is REGULATED.








                                   3-159
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET STRUCTURE)
                              (SET STRUCTURE)


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SET STRUCTURE command to set structure DSKA1:  as
            unavailable for any MOUNT requests from users.

                ___ _________ ______ ________________
            OPR>SET STRUCTURE DSKA1: UNAVAILABLE<RET>
            OPR>
            15:27:03          -- Set Structure Command --
                            Structure DSKA1: set UNAVAILABLE
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SET STRUCTURE command to  prevent  the  structure
            TEST:  from being mounted by OPR/ORION.

                ___ _________ _____ ____________
            OPR>SET STRUCTURE TEST: IGNORED<RET>
            OPR>
            10:45:40          -- Set Structure Command --
                            Structure is currently set IGNORED.
                            Attributes will be applied when
                            structure is set to ACKNOWLEDGED.
                            Structure PACK: set IGNORED
            OPR>

            Later, to allow the structure to be mounted by OPR/ORION:

                ___ _________ _____ _________________
            OPR>SET STRUCTURE TEST: ACKNOWLEDGED<RET>
            OPR>
            15:26:43          --Set Structure Command --
                            Structure TEST: set ACKNOWLEDGED
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the SET STRUCTURE command to set structure MOON:   as
            FOREIGN.

                ___ _________ _____ ____________
            OPR>SET STRUCTURE MOON: FOREIGN<RET>
            OPR>
            15:35:42          -- Set Structure Command --
                            Structure MOON: set FOREIGN
            OPR>


                                   3-160
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


   SET TAPE-DRIVE - Setting Tape-Drive Parameters
   SET TAPE-DRIVE - Setting Tape-Drive Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The SET TAPE-DRIVE command sets the availability  characteristics
        of a particular tape-drive device.  With the use of this command,
        you can allow or disallow  users  from  requesting  tapes  to  be
        mounted  on  the  tape  drives.   In addition, you can initialize
        tapes with the SET TAPE-DRIVE  command.   You  must  specify  the
        logical  tape-drive  name,  and  either  the  keyword  AVAILABLE,
        INITIALIZE, or UNAVAILABLE.

   Format
   Format

        OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn: argument /switch<RET>

        where MTAn: is the logical tape-drive name

        followed by one of these arguments:

                                      AVAILABLE
                                      INITIALIZE
                                      UNAVAILABLE

        the INITIALIZE keyword has the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                      /COUNT:nn
                                      /DENSITY:nn
                                      /INCREMENT:nn
                                      /LABEL-TYPE:type
                                      /OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION:YES
                                                           NO
                                      /OWNER:name
                                      /PROTECTION:nnnnnn
                                      /TAPE-DISPOSITION:condition
                                      /VOLUME-ID:volid


   Keyword
   Keyword

        MTAn:              specifies the  logical  tape-drive  name;  the
                           colon  must be included.  The tape-drive name:
                           is in the format of  MTAn:,  where  n  is  the
                           tape-drive  number.   An  example of a logical
                           tape-drive name is MTA0:   for  Magnetic  Tape
                           Drive 0.




                                   3-161
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


   Arguments
   Arguments

        AVAILABLE          specifies that this particular tape drive  can
                           be  used  to satisfy user tape mount requests.
                           This  argument  cancels  the  effect  of   the
                           UNAVAILABLE  argument.   Once  this command is
                           given, the tape drive remains AVAILABLE  until
                           it is set UNAVAILABLE.

        INITIALIZE         specifies that the tape drive  is  unavailable
                           for  user mount requests and that the drive is
                           being used by  you  to  initialize  tapes.   A
                           labeled  tape  is initialized when you write a
                           volume identification at the beginning of  the
                           tape.   An  unlabeled tape is initialized when
                           you write a record of 80  null  characters  at
                           the beginning of the tape.  When the specified
                           number of tapes  have  been  INITIALIZEd,  the
                           tape drive automatically becomes available for
                           user mount requests.  You specify  the  number
                           of  tapes  to  be initialized with the /COUNT:
                           switch.

        UNAVAILABLE        specifies  that  this  particular  tape  drive
                           cannot  be  used  to  satisfy  user tape mount
                           requests.  This argument cancels the effect of
                           the   AVAILABLE  argument.   If  the  user  is
                           currently using a tape on this tape drive, the
                           tape  drive becomes unavailable after the user
                           completes his work.  If the system crashes  or
                           is  shutdown, the command SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:
                           UNAVAILABLE remains in effect after the system
                           is in operation again.

                                                NOTE

                               Drives that are set UNAVAILABLE can be
                               ASSIGNed  by  user  jobs.   This could
                               pose a security problem, as  no  label
                               processing    or    verification    is
                               performed by the system when  using  a
                               tape on an UNAVAILABLE drive.

                           When you specify UNAVAILABLE, you can enter  a
                           single-  or multiple-line reason and terminate
                           with a carriage return, or you  can  terminate
                           immediately  with  a carriage return after the
                           UNAVAILABLE  keyword  and  OPR  responds  with
                           ENTER  TEXT  AND  TERMINATE WITH ^Z.  You then
                           enter as many lines of text for  a  reason  as
                           you  need.   When  you  press CTRL/Z, the OPR>


                                   3-162
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


                           prompt returns and your report is logged  into
                           the ERROR.SYS file.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /COUNT:nn          specifies the  number  (nn)  of  tapes  to  be
                           initialized.    The   /COUNT:    switch,  when
                           specified,   provides    a    mechanism    for
                           initialization of multiple tapes with the same
                           attributes.  Each tape prompts you with a WTOR
                           message  for the volume identification.  After
                           initialization,  the  tape  is   automatically
                           unloaded and the tape drive is ready to accept
                           the next tape to  initialize.   When  as  many
                           tapes as specified by the /COUNT:  switch have
                           been initialized, the tape  drive  returns  to
                           the AVAILABLE state.

        /DENSITY:nn        specifies the BPI (bits-per-inch)  density  of
                           the  tapes to be initialized.  The number (nn)
                           can be 200, 556, 800, 1600, or 6250.   If  you
                           do  not  specify  the  /DENSITY:   switch, the
                           density defaults to 1600 BPI.

        /INCREMENT:nn      specifies the numeric value (nn) by  which  to
                           increment  the  tape  volumes.  This switch is
                           ignored  unless  you  also  use  the   /COUNT:
                           switch    and   specify   a   numeric   volume
                           identification (see the /VOLID:  switch)  that
                           contains  no  leading  zeros.   If  you do not
                           include this switch but do specify  a  numeric
                           volume identification that contains no leading
                           zeros, the default numeric value is 1.

        /LABEL-TYPE:type   specifies the type of label to be  written  on
                           the  tape.   The  type  can  be  ANSI, EBCDIC,
                           TOPS-20, or UNLABELED.  If you do not  specify
                           the   /LABEL-TYPE:   switch,  the  default  is
                           TOPS-20.




                                   3-163
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


        /OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION: (YES or NO)

                           specifies whether to check for expiration date
                           of  the  data  on the tape.  If you specify NO
                           and attempt to re-initialize  a  labeled  tape
                           whose  first  file  is not expired, the system
                           issues  an  error   message   and   does   not
                           re-initialize  the  tape.  If you specify YES,
                           each tape is  re-initialized  unconditionally.
                           If  you  are initializing brand new tapes, you
                           should specify YES to prevent the  tape  drive
                           from  "running away" when MOUNTR tries to read
                           a label from the tape.  If you do not  specify
                           this switch, the default is NO.

        /OWNER:name        specifies the name of the owner of the tape(s)
                           to  be  initialized.  This switch affects only
                           to TOPS-20 label types.  If you do not specify
                           the  /OWNER:   switch, the tape is initialized
                           as a scratch tape.

        /PROTECTION:nnnnnn

                           specifies  a  6-digit  octal  number  as   the
                           protection  number of the tape.  The number is
                           usually from 000000 (so that no  one  can  use
                           the tape) through 777777 (where anyone can use
                           the  tape).   If  you  do  not   specify   the
                           /PROTECTION:   switch,  the default is 777777.
                           This switch is ignored if the  label  type  is
                           ANSI, EBCDIC, or UNLABELED.

        /TAPE-DISPOSITION:condition

                           specifies what is to be done to the tape after
                           it  is  initialized.   The  condition  can  be
                           either HOLD or UNLOAD.  If you  specify  HOLD,
                           the  tape  is initialized and is not unloaded.
                           A user requesting the tape can use it  without
                           your  having  to  reload  it.   If you specify
                           UNLOAD,  the  tape  is  initialized   and   is
                           unloaded  from the tape drive.  The default is
                           UNLOAD.   If  a  value  greater  than   1   is
                           specified   by   the   /COUNT:    switch,  the
                           /TAPE-DISPOSITION:   switch  is  ignored   and
                           UNLOAD is assumed.

        /VOLUME-ID:volid   specifies  a  volume  identification  for  the
                           tape.    The   volid  must  be  from  1  to  6
                           characters.   The  volid  must  contain   only
                           alphanumeric   characters.    If   the   volid


                                   3-164
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


                           contains  leading  zeros  it   is   considered
                           nonnumeric,  and  the  /INCREMENT:   switch is
                           ignored.  This switch is not necessary if  the
                           tape  is  being  initialized  as  an unlabeled
                           tape.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        If you set a tape drive to be UNAVAILABLE before you set the tape
        drive to INITIALIZE, the following error message appears:

        hh:mm:ss        --Tape Drive MTAn: is Not Under Operator
        Control--

        The SET TAPE-DRIVE command to INITIALIZE must be given for a tape
        drive  that  is  AVAILABLE.  When the initialization is complete,
        the tape drive is left AVAILABLE.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  A user (J.JONES) has requested a tape mount of an  ANSI  tape
            with  a volid of TAPE01 and has requested that you initialize
            the tape first.  The volume is initialized with  ANSI  labels
            and  a volid of TAPE01.  The system default for density (1600
            BPI) is used.  When the tape is mounted  on  the  drive,  the
            tape  is  initialized and the drive then becomes available to
            the  user  (/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD).   AVR  takes  over   and
            satisfies the mount request for TAPE01.

            OPR>              --Tape Mount Request # 31--
            12:11:34        Mount ANSI volume TAPE01, 9-track, 
                            1600 BPI, WRITE-ENABLED
                            User J. JONES, Job 39, Terminal 13
                            User's remark: PLEASE INITIALIZE TAPE FIRST
                ___ __________ _____ __________ ______________________
            OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI-<RET>
            ____________________________________________
            /TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD/VOLUME-ID:TAPE01<RET>
            OPR>
            12:12:01          --Mount Tape To Be Initialized--
                            Mount tape volume TAPE01 for initialization
            on MTA3:
            OPR>

            You now load the tape on drive MTA3:.  When the  initializing
            is completed, OPR types the following message:

            12:13:14        --MTA3: Volume TAPE01 Initialized--
                            Label type: ANSI        Density: 1600
            OPR>
            12:13:19          --INITIALIZE Completed--


                                   3-165
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                              (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


                            MTA3: available for user tape requests
            OPR>
            12:13:30          --MTA3: Volume TAPE01, ANSI labeled tape
            mounted--
            OPR>
            12:13:33          --MTA3: Given to Request 31--
                            Volume TAPE01 now in use by
                            User J.JONES, Job 39, Terminal 13
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SET TAPE-DRIVE command to set  tape  drive  MTA1:
            to  be unavailable.  Any user job currently using this device
            is allowed to finish his work and dismount  the  tape  before
            the device becomes unavailable.

                ___ __________ _____ ________________
            OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA1: UNAVAILABLE<RET>
            Enter Text and Terminate with ^Z
            ____ _____ __ ______ __ _____ _______
            TAPE DRIVE IS NEEDED BY FIELD SERVICE^Z
                                                  ^
                                                  |
                                               <CTRL/Z>
            OPR>
            10:23:56          --Tape Drive Set Unavailable--
                            MTA1: set unavailable for assignment by
            MOUNTR
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the SET TAPE-DRIVE command to make tape  drive  MTA3:
            available for tape mounts.

                ___ __________ _____ ______________
            OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: AVAILABLE<RET>
            OPR>
            12:02:24          --Tape Drive Set Available--
                            MTA3: set available for assignment by MOUNTR
            OPR>


















                                   3-166
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (SHOW)
                                   (SHOW)


   SHOW - Displaying System Information
   SHOW - Displaying System Information



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW command shows (or displays) information from the system.
        The  SHOW  command  does not alter or change any jobs, queues, or
        devices.  The SHOW command can be issued before a particular job,
        queue,  or  device  has  been  changed; and then it can be issued
        after the change to check to see if  the  particular  change  was
        satisfactory.

        Because the SHOW command is complex,  having  multiple  keywords,
        subkeywords,  parameters, switches, and numeric values, each SHOW
        keyword command is described in the same format as an  individual
        OPR command.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW  keyword<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

|                              ALIAS
|                              BROADCAST-MESSAGES
                               CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS
                               CONFIGURATION
                               CONTROL-FILE
                               MESSAGES
                               OPERATORS
                               PARAMETERS
                               QUEUES
                               ROUTE-TABLE
                               SCHEDULER
                               STATUS
                               TIME

        followed by one or more of the keywords, arguments, switches, and
        values described in the SHOW command subsections.












                                   3-167
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


   SHOW ALIAS - Displaying Printer Alias Names
|  SHOW ALIAS - Displaying Printer Alias Names
|  
|  
|  
   Function
|  Function
|  
|       The  SHOW  ALIAS  command   displays   the   alias   to   printer
|       specification mappings that were previously defined.
|  
|  
   Format
|  Format
|  
|       OPR>SHOW ALIAS keyword argument /switch<RET>
|  
|  where keyword can be one of the following:
|  
|                                CLUSTER
|                                DQS
|                                LAT
|                                LOCAL
|  
|  followed by a unit number:
|  
|                                nn
|  
|  or a range:                   n:m
|  
|  followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                /NODE:node-name
|  
|  or
|                                CLUSTER nn
|                                        n:m
|  followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|  
|  or                            DQS queuename
|  followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|  
|  or                            LAT
|  followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
|                                SERVER "name"
|  or followed by:               PORT "name"
|                                SERVER "name"
|  
|  followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|  
   Arguments
|  Arguments


                                   3-168
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


|       CLUSTER nn         specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
|                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
|                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
|                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
|                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
|                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
|                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
|                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
|                          processors.
|  
|                 NODE node-name::
|  
|                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
|                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
|                          following the node name is not needed.
|  
|                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
|                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
|                          be the local node or an alias.
|  
|            DQS queuename
|  
|                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
|                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
|                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
|                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
|                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
|                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
|                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
|                          and dollar signs.
|  
|                 NODE node-name::
|  
|                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
|                          is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
|                          following the node name is not needed.
|  
|                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
|                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
|                          alias.
|  
|            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
|                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
|                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
|                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
|                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
|                          between your system, running LAT software, and
|                          the resource printer terminal.
|  
|                          You     cannot     use      the      following


                                   3-169
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


|                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:
|  
|                                    SERVICE name only
|                                    SERVER name only
|                                    PORT name only
|                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
|                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names
|  
|                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
|                          about LAT communications.
|  
|                 PORT "name"
|  
|                          specifies the communication path  between  the
|                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
|                          access point that the node represents  to  the
|                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
|                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
|                          and dollar signs.
|  
|                 SERVICE "name"
|  
|                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
|                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
|                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
|                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
|                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
|                          signs.
|  
|                 SERVER "name"
|  
|                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
|                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
|                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
|                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
|                          characters in length.
|  
|            LOCAL         specifies  to   display   the   line   printer
|                          parameters for your local logged-in system.
|  
|       nn                 specifies  a  numeric  value  representing   a
|                          batch-stream  number  or a device unit number.
|                          The number is usually from 0 to 5, but can  be
|                          larger   if  your  installation  has  acquired
|                          additional devices.
|  
|       n:m                specifies a range of unit numbers.
|  
|  



                                   3-170
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
|                          cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
|                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
|                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
|                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
|                          cluster.
|  
|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
|                          station.   The double colon (::) following the
|                          node name is optional.
|  
|  
   Examples
|  Examples
|  
|  
|       1.  Specify the SHOW ALIAS command to display the alias names for
|           CLUSTER, DQS, and LAT printer specifications.
|  
                ____ __________
|           OPR>SHOW ALIAS<RET>
|           OPR>
|           14:45:37       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|  
|           Cluster printers
|             Alias     Unit   Node  
|             ------    ----  ------  
|              RONCO       0   RONCO
|  
|           DQS printers
|             Alias              DQS queue name          Node  
|             ------    ------------------------------  ------  
|             NATASH                         TOPS$LN03   GALLO
|              XEROX                           SI$8700  JUNIPR
|               PLVD                          LVD$LN03     MED
|              XPLOT                         SI$87PLOT  MRSVAX
|             BENSON                         SI$BENSON  MRSVAX
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server  
|             ------    ----------------    ------  
|              ROCKY         24004_LN03A      LAT1  
|              BULLW         24004_LN03B     LAT70  
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71  
|  
|       2.  Specify the SHOW ALIAS command with the /CLUSTER-NODE  switch
|           to  display  which printer specifications on all the nodes in
|           the cluster use the alias name BORIS.



                                   3-171
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


                ___ _____ _____ ______________ ______
|           OPR>SHO ALIAS BORIS /CLUSTER-NODE: *<RET>
|  
|           14:46:04       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server  
|             ------    ----------------    ------  
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71  
|           OPR>
|           14:46:04  Received message from RONCO::
|           14:45:58       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server  
|             ------    ----------------    ------  
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71  
|  
|           14:46:05  Received message from CLOYD::
|           14:45:53       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server  
|             ------    ----------------    ------  
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71  
|  




























                                   3-172
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)
|                        (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)


   SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES - Displaying Status of Remote Broadcasting  of
|  SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES - Displaying Status of Remote Broadcasting  of
   ORION Messages
|  ORION Messages
|  
|  
|  
   Function
|  Function
|  
|       The SHOW  BROADCAST-MESSAGES  command  displays  whether  or  not
|       remote  broadcasting of ORION messages are enabled or disabled to
|       a particular node or nodes.
|  
|  
   Format
|  Format
|  
|       OPR>SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES keyword argument /switch<RET>
|  
|       where keyword is the optional keyword NODE
|  
|       followed by either of the arguments:
|  
|                                     cluster-node-name
|                                     *
|  
|       followed optionally by the  switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|  
   Keyword
|  Keyword
|  
|       NODE               specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
|                          cluster  to  display  or  an  asterisk  (*) to
|                          display all nodes in the cluster.
|  
   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
|                          cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
|                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
|                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
|                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
|                          cluster.
|  
|  
   Example
|  Example
|  
|       OPR>SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES<RET>
|  
|       OPR>


                                   3-173
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)
|                        (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)


|       17:01:54           -- Broadcast Messages --
|  
|                CLOYD  GIDNEY  Message type 
|               ------  ------  ------------ 
|                Ena     Ena   BATCH-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   MOUNT-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   PLOTTER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   PRINTER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   READER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   USER-MESSAGES
|  
|                Ena     Ena   BUGCHK-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   BUGINF-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   SYSTEM-MESSAGES
|  
|                Ena     Ena   LCP-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   NCP-MESSAGES






























                                   3-174
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                     (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)
                     (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)


   SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS - Displaying Cluster Link Status
   SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS - Displaying Cluster Link Status



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW  CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS  command  displays  NEBULA's
        DECnet connections to remote NEBULAs in the cluster.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS /switch<RET>

        where switch can be:          /NODE:node-name::
                                      /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.

                           If you do  not  specify  the  /NODE:   switch,
                           NEBULA's  link  status to every remote node in
                           the cluster is displayed.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
                           cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.


   Example
   Example

        You are logged in to GIDNEY and  you  wish  to  display  NEBULA's
        DECnet link status to the remote NEBULAs in the cluster.

            ____ _______________________________
        OPR>SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS<RET>
        OPR>
        19:28:26            -- Cluster Status --

                   Node      Sender Link Status  Listener Link Status
                  ------     ------------------  --------------------
                  THEP       Connected           Connected
                  CLOYD      Connected           Connected


                                   3-175
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                     (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)
                     (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)


                  RONCO      Connected           Connected




















































                                   3-176
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW CONFIGURATION)
                            (SHOW CONFIGURATION)


   SHOW CONFIGURATION - Displaying Disk Drive Configuration
   SHOW CONFIGURATION - Displaying Disk Drive Configuration



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW CONFIGURATION command displays information that uniquely
        identifies disk drives.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW CONFIGURATION (of) keyword /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        DISK-DRIVE

        followed by one of these switches:

                                      /ALL
                                      /FREE
                                      /MOUNTED

        and, optionally the switch:

                                      /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        DISK-DRIVE         specifies to display  information  about  disk
                           drives.


   Switches
   Switches

        /ALL               specifies  that  both  free  disk  drives  and
                           mounted disk drives be displayed.  This switch
                           is the default.

        /FREE              specifies that only those disk drives that are
                           available for structure mounts be displayed.

        /MOUNTED           specifies that only those disk drives that are
                           currently   mounted   and  being  accessed  be
                           displayed.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
                           cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name


                                   3-177
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW CONFIGURATION)
                            (SHOW CONFIGURATION)


                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.


   Example
   Example

        You are logged in on cluster  node  CLOYD  and  wish  to  display
        configuration  information  about  mounted disk drives on cluster
        node GIDNEY.

            ____ _____________ __________ ________ ______
        OPR>SHOW CONFIGURATION DISK-DRIVE /MOUNTED -<RET>
        _________________________
        /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
        OPR>
        09:12:39  Received message from GIDNEY::
        09:12:32             -- Disk Drive Configuration --

                             MOUNTED DRIVES

              Chan-Cont                        Mount    
         Type   Drive    Drive Serial Number   Status   Name
         ---- --------- ---------------------  -------  ------------
         RP06 0,  ,0    17170432  1156         Mounted  GIDNEY (1/1)
        *RP07 2,  ,0    17235968  8965         Mounted  CHOP   (1/1)
        *RP07 2,  ,2    17235968  10337        Mounted  REL7   (1/1)
        *RP07 2,  ,3    17235968  14402        Mounted  SLICE  (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,2    33882112  17697        Mounted  WORK   (2/2)
         RA81 7,01,11   33882112  4005         Mounted  WHITE  (1/1)
         RA81 7,01,12   33882112  3029         Mounted  LINK   (1/1)
         RA81 7,01,14   33882112  4258         Mounted  SNARK  (1/2)
         RA81 7,01,19   33882112  18036        Mounted  MOOSE  (1/1)
         RA81 7,01,21   33882112  4201         Mounted  WORK   (1/2)
         RA81 7,01,22   33882112  3411         Mounted  MORDOR (1/1)
         RP06 7,05,1    17170432  1368         Mounted  THEP   (1/1)
         RP06 7,06,1    17170432  370          Mounted  CLOYD  (1/1)
         RA81 7,01,8    33882112  18289        Mounted  MKT    (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,17   33882112  2463         Mounted  GREEN  (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,20   33882112  18035        Mounted  RIP    (1/1)
         RA60 7,00,16   33816576  1023         Mounted  DBMS20 (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,18   33882112  17878        Mounted  IGUANA (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,36   33882112  18053        Mounted  GALAXY (1/1)
         RA81 7,01,4    33882112  2003         Mounted  FTN    (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,15   33882112  4002         Mounted  SNARK  (2/2)
         RA81 7,00,13   33882112  3675         Mounted  SOFT   (1/1)
         RA81 7,01,0    33882112  17610        Mounted  COMMON (1/1)
        *RP06 1,  ,2    17170432  388          Mounted  APATCH (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,3    33882112  2014         Mounted  EXODUS (1/1)
         RA60 7,00,7    33816576  14375        Mounted  ROCKET (1/1)
        *RP06 1,  ,4    17170432  263          Mounted  JAWS   (1/1)
        *RP06 1,  ,6    17170432  1874         Mounted  GALKL  (1/1)
         RP07 7,06,546  17235968  9501         Mounted  DICE   (1/1)


                                   3-178
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW CONFIGURATION)
                            (SHOW CONFIGURATION)


         RP06 1,  ,3    17170432  1317         Mounted  B20    (1/1)
         RA81 7,02,6    33882112  4009         Mounted  RANDOM (1/1)

        09:12:39  Received message from GIDNEY::
        09:12:32             -- Disk Drive Configuration --

         RA81 7,03,7    33882112  4255         Mounted  MOLD   (1/1)
         RA81 7,02,1    33882112  4274         Mounted  PUBLIC (1/1)
         RA81 7,00,9    33882112  18264        Mounted  GUMBY  (1/1)
         RA81 7,03,11   33882112  18466        Mounted  POKEY  (1/1)
         RA81 7,03,12   33882112  18293        Mounted  DEMO   (1/1)
         RP06 7,11,1    17170432  8192         Mounted  RONCO  (1/1)
         RP06 7,11,2    17170432  775          Mounted  RDUMP  (1/1)
         RA60 7,02,10   33816576  12148        Mounted  DML60  (1/1)
              NOTE: Channel 7 indicates CI channel
              (*) indicates potential external port

        OPR>



































                                   3-179
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)
                            (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)


   SHOW CONTROL-FILE - Displaying Batch Control Files
   SHOW CONTROL-FILE - Displaying Batch Control Files



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW CONTROL-FILE command displays  the  control  file  of  a
        batch  job  that is processing in a particular batch stream.  The
        only keyword for this command is  BATCH-STREAM  followed  by  the
        stream number.  You must specify the BATCH-STREAM keyword.

        Some of the advantages of this command is that it enables you  to
        display  a  particular stream while the job is processing, to see
        any possible problems that might come about due to  an  incorrect
        command, and to check whether there are any commands that require
        an operator action of some kind.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE  keyword  nn  /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be the following:     BATCH-STREAM

        followed by a stream number:             nn

        and, optionally, the switch:             /LINES:number


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream.

        nn                 specifies  the  stream  number  of  the  batch
                           stream  to  be  displayed  by  OPR.   You must
                           specify this stream number.


   Switch
   Switch

        /LINES:number      specifies  the  number  of  lines   you   want
                           displayed  of  the  control  file in the batch
                           stream.  If you do  not  specify  the  /LINES:
                           switch, the default is ten lines.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to display  four  lines
            of a control file in batch stream 2.



                                   3-180
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)
                            (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)


                ____ ____________ ____________ ______________
            OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 2/LINES:4<RET>
            OPR>
            16:42:20    Batch-Stream 2   JOB #3   --SHOW-CONTROL-FILE--
                        Job MYFILE Req #121 for ADLEY

                        @MOUNT TAPE REEL1:
                        @COMPILE TEST2/FORTRAN
                        @EXECUTE
                        @DISMOUNT TAPE REEL1:

            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to display ten lines in
            batch stream 0.

                ____ ____________ ____________ ______
            OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 0<RET>
            OPR>
            13:20:30    Batch-Stream 0   JOB #12   --SHOW-CONTROL-FILE--
                        Job EDIT01 Req #211 for LATTA

                        *F.PG^[
                        *M.
                        *D.
                        *E 
                        @IF (ERROR) @GOTO DEL1
                        @EDIT
                        *F.PG^[
                        *M.
                        *D.
                        *E

            OPR>





















                                   3-181
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW MESSAGES)
                              (SHOW MESSAGES)


   SHOW MESSAGES - Displaying Outstanding Messages
   SHOW MESSAGES - Displaying Outstanding Messages



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW MESSAGES command displays any outstanding  messages  for
        which  you  must  perform an action and/or reply with the RESPOND
        command.

        With the SHOW MESSAGES command, you can  specify  an  outstanding
        message number or a node.  If you do not specify either a message
        number or a node, OPR responds with all outstanding messages that
        you are enabled to receive.

        Use the RESPOND command to respond  to  any  outstanding  message
        displayed by this SHOW command.  (Refer to the description of the
        RESPOND command in this chapter.)


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW MESSAGES nnnn /switch<RET>

        where, optionally, the message number is:

                                      nnnn

        or, optionally, the switch:   /NODE:node-name::

        or the switch:                /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keyword
   Keyword

        nnnn               specifies  the  outstanding  message   number.
                           Valid  message  numbers  can  range  from 0 to
                           9999.  If you do not specify a message number,
                           all  outstanding  messages with their sequence
                           numbers, if any, are displayed.


   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.

                           If you do not specify the /NODE:  switch,  all
                           outstanding   messages   with  their  sequence
                           numbers, if any, are displayed, provided  that


                                   3-182
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW MESSAGES)
                              (SHOW MESSAGES)


                           you have enabled the messages to appear at the
                           OPR terminal.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                           where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SHOW MESSAGES command to display all  outstanding
            messages  with  their  sequence  numbers.  You are enabled to
            receive the output display of all messages.

                ____ _____________
            OPR>SHOW MESSAGES<RET>
            OPR>          **  MESSAGES REQUIRING OPERATOR ACTION  **


            15:25:35  <2>   Printer 1     JOB #13
                            LPTSPL: Please load forms type 'NARROW'
                            Respond 'CONTINUE' when ready.

            17:23:40  <15>  Card-Punch 0    JOB #45
                            SPROUT: Please load 5081's
                            RESPOND GO when ready.

            23:20:50  <31>  Batch-stream 2   JOB #23
                            BATCON: Please mount the PAYROLL-MASTER-TAPE.
                            RESPOND GO when ready.

            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SHOW MESSAGES command to display  an  outstanding
            message with the message number 47.

                ____ ________ _______
            OPR>SHOW MESSAGES 47<RET>
            OPR>          **  MESSAGES REQUIRING OPERATOR ACTION  **

            12:30:30  <47>  Batch-stream 1   JOB #19
                            SPRINT: Please START the card-reader.
                            SEND message to User: McElmoyle when done.
            OPR>






                                   3-183
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW OPERATORS)
                              (SHOW OPERATORS)


   SHOW OPERATORS - Displaying Operators on the System
   SHOW OPERATORS - Displaying Operators on the System



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW OPERATORS command displays the terminal and job  numbers
        of  all  users  on  the  system who are running OPR.  The display
        shows the node, terminal number, job number, and user's name.

        In addition, you can specify the /NODE:  switch  to  display  the
|       operators  at a remote station.  The /ALL switch includes whether
|       or not operators will receive particular message types.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /switch<RET>

        where /switch can be one of the following:
|  
|                                       /ALL
                                        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                        /NODE:node-name::



   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                           where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.

|       /ALL               specifies whether  or  not  operators  receive
|                          particular  message  types.   It displays if a
|                          particular message type is enabled or disabled
|                          for  the  operators  listed.   If  any  of the
|                          switches:               /INFORMATION-MESSAGES,
|                          /JOB-MESSAGES,   or  /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES  are
|                          enabled for a message type that supports these
|                          switches, then that message type is considered
|                          enabled.


                                   3-184
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW OPERATORS)
                              (SHOW OPERATORS)


   Restriction
   Restriction

        If there are no users running OPR at the node you specify in  the
        SHOW OPERATORS command, OPR responds with:

        hh:mm:ss        --No Operators at Node name--

        where name is the node name or number.

        If you do not specify the /NODE:  switch, all  operators  on  the
        system (all nodes included) are displayed.


   Examples
   Examples


        1.  Specify the SHOW OPERATORS command to display  all  operators
            on cluster node THEP.

                ____ _________ _______________________
            OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /CLUSTER-NODE:THEP<RET>
            OPR>
            09:21:39  Received message from THEP::
            09:21:29        -- Operators --

                Node      Type   Terminal    Job        User
            -----------  ------  --------    ---  ---------------
            THEP         system       236    197  OPERATOR
            THEP         system       434    205  WONG

            **** SEMI-OPR is enabled ****
            OPR>
|  
|       2.  Specify the SHOW OPERATORS command with the  /ALL  switch  to
|           display  what types of messages are enabled for the operators
|           listed.
|  
                ____ _________ _________
|           OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /ALL<RET>
|           OPR>
|           17:02:12        -- Operators --
|  
|               Node      Type   Terminal    Job     User
|           -----------  ------  --------    ---  --------------
|           RONCO        system       236     69  OPERATOR
|  
|                           RONCO  Message type 
|                          ------  ------------ 
|                            Ena   BATCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   MOUNT-MESSAGES


                                   3-185
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW OPERATORS)
                              (SHOW OPERATORS)


|                            Ena   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PLOTTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PRINTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   READER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   USER-MESSAGES
|  
|                            Dis   BUGCHK-MESSAGES
|                            Dis   BUGINF-MESSAGES
|                            Dis   DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
|                            Dis   DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   SYSTEM-MESSAGES
|  
|                            Ena   LCP-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   NCP-MESSAGES
|  
|           RONCO        system       434     78  WONG
|                           RONCO  Message type 
|                          ------  ------------ 
|                            Ena   BATCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   MOUNT-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PLOTTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PRINTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   READER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   USER-MESSAGES
|  
|                            Ena   BUGCHK-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   BUGINF-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   SYSTEM-MESSAGES
|  
|                            Ena   LCP-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   NCP-MESSAGES
|  
             S
|            SEMI-OPR is enabled 
|  













                                   3-186
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)


   SHOW PARAMETERS - Displaying Device Settings
   SHOW PARAMETERS - Displaying Device Settings



   Function
   Function

        The  SHOW  PARAMETERS  command  displays  information   about   a
        particular  device  or  range  of  devices,  showing  its current
        defaults and values.  The  device  can  be  a  batch  stream,  an
        input/output unit number, or all devices known to the system.

        The SHOW PARAMETERS command is  very  useful  when  you  want  to
        change  the  defaults of a particular device.  You can issue this
        command to check the parameters before and after the changes have
        been made.

        If you do not  specify  any  keyword  with  the  SHOW  PARAMETERS
        command, the command defaults to all devices.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS keyword nn /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      NETWORK-NODE
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument

        followed by a stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        or a range:                   n:m

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

                                      CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"


                                   3-187
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)


        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and, optionally, the switches: /NODE:node-name::
                                      /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

        The NETWORK-NODE argument can only be followed by the node  name;
        no  switches or stream/unit numbers.  For example, to specify the
        node named KL2102, type NETWORK-NODE KL2102::.  You must type two
        colons (::) after the node name.


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                           range  of batch streams.  If no unit number or
                           range is  specified,  all  batch  streams  are
                           displayed.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                           range  of  card-punch  devices.   If  no  unit
                           number or range is specified,  all  card-punch
                           devices are displayed.

        NETWORK-NODE       specifies that the IBM network  parameters  of
                           the  nodes  currently  known  to the system be
                           displayed.  This argument displays information
                           only  if  your installation has DN60 software.
                           The display shows the value of  the  arguments
                           that  can  be  altered with the DEFINE and SET
                           NODE commands.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                           or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.  If no
                           unit  number  or  range  is   specified,   all
                           paper-tape-punch devices are displayed.

        PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                           range  of  plotter devices.  If no unit number
                           or range is specified, all plotter devices are
                           displayed.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                     n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                           TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled


                                   3-188
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)


                           configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                           processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                           processors.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

             DQS queuename

                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is processed.  The double colon (::) following
                           the node name is not needed.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only


                                   3-189
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)


                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

             LOCAL         specifies  to   display   the   line   printer
                           parameters for your local logged-in system.

        nn                 specifies  a  numeric  value  representing   a
                           batch-stream  number  or a device unit number.
                           The number is usually from 0 to 5, but can  be
                           larger   if  your  installation  has  acquired
                           additional devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of  batch  streams  or  unit
                           numbers.


   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the


                                   3-190
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)


                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                           where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SHOW PARAMETERS command to  display  the  current
            parameters of all batch streams.

                ____ __________ _________________
            OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS BATCH-STREAM<RET>
            OPR>
            18:25:07                -- System Device Parameters--

            Batch-Stream Parameters:
              Strm     Minutes    Prio  Opr-Intvn
              ----  -----------  -----  ---------
                 0      0:3600    1:63        Yes
                 1      0:10      1:19        Yes
                 2      0:11000   1:19        Yes
                 3      0:11000  20:63        Yes
                 4      0:3600    1:63        No

            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SHOW PARAMETERS command to  display  the  current
            parameters of the card punch.

                ____ __________ __________ ______
            OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS CARD-PUNCH 0<RET>
            OPR>
            19:43:30                -- System Device Parameters--

            Card-Punch Parameters:
              Unit  Card-Limits    Form    Prio  Lim-Ex  Dev-Chars
              ----  ------------  ------  -----  ------  ---------
                 0      1:500     NORMAL   1:63     Ask

            OPR>

        3.  Specify the SHOW PARAMETERS command to  display  the  current
            parameters of all cluster printer devices within the cluster.

                ____ __________ _______ _______ ____________________
            OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS PRINTER CLUSTER /CLUSTER-NODE:*<RET>


                                   3-191
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                             (SHOW PARAMETERS)


            OPR>
            09:31:19        -- System Device Parameters --

            Cluster printers
|             Alias    Unit     Node      Page Limits    Prio  Lim-Ex
|             ----    -------  ------     ------------  -----  ------
|             CHARLI      0    GIDNEY        0:10000     1:63  Ask     
|             BARR        0      THEP        0:10000     1:63  Ask     

            OPR>
            09:31:20  Received message from RONCO::
            09:31:18        -- System Device Parameters --

            Cluster printers
|             Alias     Unit     Node      Page Limits    Prio  Lim-Ex
|             -----     ----    ------     ------------  -----  ------
|             BINN        0      THEP        0:5000      1:63   Ask     


            09:31:20  Received message from THEP::
            09:31:10         -- There are no devices started --

            09:31:21  Received message from GIDNEY::
            09:31:13         -- There are no devices started --
            OPR>




























                                   3-192
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW QUEUES)
                               (SHOW QUEUES)


   SHOW QUEUES - Displaying Queued Job Requests
   SHOW QUEUES - Displaying Queued Job Requests



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW QUEUES  command  displays  the  job  requests  that  are
        active, that are waiting to be processed, and that are being held
        and must be rescheduled.  You can specify all jobs in all  queues
        or  only  those  jobs in a particular queue.  The default for the
        SHOW QUEUES command is ALL-JOBS.

        A queue is a list of jobs for a particular device or stream  that
        are  processing,  are  waiting to be processed, or are being held
        for rescheduling.

        The asterisk (*) before the job name in the output display of the
        SHOW  QUEUES  command indicates that the job request is currently
        active.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW QUEUES keyword /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      ALL-JOBS
                                      BATCH-JOBS
                                      CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
                                      MOUNT-REQUESTS
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
                                      PLOTTER-JOBS
                                      PRINTER-JOBS
                                      RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS

        and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

                                      /NODE:node-name::
                                      /ALL
                                      /SHORT
                                      /USER:name

        or the switch:                /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        ALL-JOBS           specifies all queues for  the  entire  system.
                           This is the default of the SHOW QUEUES command
                           if  you  do  not  specify  any  other  keyword


                                   3-193
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW QUEUES)
                               (SHOW QUEUES)


                           described below.

        BATCH-JOBS         specifies all batch jobs currently processing,
                           waiting,  or  being  held  in  the batch input
                           queue.

        CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    specifies  all   card-punch   jobs   currently
                           processing,  waiting,  or  being  held  in the
                           card-punch output queue.

        MOUNT-REQUESTS     specifies  all  requests  for  tape  and  disk
                           structure   mounts,   all  requests  that  are
                           currently using tape drives,  whether  or  not
                           the   tapes  are  labeled,  and  all  requests
                           waiting for a disk structure to be dismounted.
                           You   cannot   use  the  /NODE:   switch  with
                           MOUNT-REQUESTS.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                           specifies all paper-tape-punch jobs  currently
                           processing,  waiting,  or  being  held  in the
                           paper-tape-punch output queue.

        PLOTTER-JOBS       specifies   all   plotter    jobs    currently
                           processing,  waiting,  or  being  held  in the
                           plotter output queue.

        PRINTER-JOBS       specifies  all  line  printer  jobs  currently
                           processing, waiting, or being held in the line
                           printer output queue.

        RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS specifies all  file  retrievals  for  archived
                           and/or  migrated files waiting to be retrieved
                           from the retrieval request queue.  You  cannot
                           use      the      /NODE:       switch     with
                           RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS.


   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.  This switch cannot  be
                           used     with     the    MOUNT-REQUESTS    and
                           RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS keywords.

        /ALL               specifies that the following be added  to  the
                           display:     the    /ASSISTANCE,    /PRIORITY,
                           /RESTARTABLE, /NOTE, /SEQUENCE,  /UNIQUE,  and
                           /REMARK switches, whether a tape mount request


                                   3-194
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW QUEUES)
                               (SHOW QUEUES)


                           is for a labeled tape, and the tape volume-set
                           name.

        /SHORT             specifies that only the job name be displayed,
                           along  with  the request number, the scheduled
                           run time, and the user name of each job in the
                           queue.   There are no column headers and there
                           are no switches displayed in the output  queue
                           list.

        /USER:name         specifies  that   the   request   number   and
                           scheduled  runtime  of  a  particular  user be
                           displayed.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                           where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SHOW QUEUES command to display  batch  jobs  that
            are  processing  or  waiting  to  be  processed  by the batch
            system.

                ____ ______ __________ _________
            OPR>SHOW QUEUES BATCH-JOBS /ALL<RET>

            10:17:24        -- System Queues Listing --

            Batch Queue:
            Job Name   Req    Run Time            User
            --------  ------  --------  ------------------------
              CLDDAY      14  00:20:00  WIZARD                
                      /After:25-Mar-88 05:30
                             /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:No  /Assist:Yes
            /Output:Nolog
                             /Batlog:Super  /Seq:1208
              CLOYD        3  02:00:00  GSCOTT                
                      /After:26-Mar-88 00:10
                             /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:Yes  /Assist:Yes
            /Output:Nolog
                             /Batlog:Super  /Seq:151
              EASY20      15  00:15:00  MONITOR               
                      /After:31-Mar-88 06:00
                             /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:Yes  /Assist:Yes
            /Output:Nolog
                             /Batlog:Super  /Seq:1209
              CLDWEK      16  00:29:00  WIZARD                
                                   3-195
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW QUEUES)
                               (SHOW QUEUES)


                      /After:31-Mar-88 07:30
                             /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:Yes  /Assist:Yes
            /Output:Nolog
                             /Batlog:Super  /Seq:1210
            There are 4 jobs in the queue (none in progress)

            OPR>


        2.  Specify the SHOW QUEUES command with  the  /SHORT  switch  to
            display all jobs in the line printer queue.

                ____ ______ _______ ___________
            OPR>SHOW QUEUES PRINTER /SHORT<RET>
            OPR>
             8:27:41                -- System Queues Listing --

            Printer Queue:
            * DAPFIL      23      624  LSCD
              MEM50        5      672  LOFGREN
              MS-OUT       6        6  GUNN
            OPR>
































                                   3-196
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)
                             (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)


   SHOW ROUTE-TABLE - Displaying Node Routing Tables
   SHOW ROUTE-TABLE - Displaying Node Routing Tables



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command displays the routing tables  of  the
        nodes  whose  output  has  been transferred by means of the ROUTE
        command.   (Refer  to  the  ROUTE  command  description  in  this
        chapter.)

        The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command has no keywords and no switches.

        The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command is applicable at  your  installation
        only  if  your  installation  has  remote  station  communication
        software.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>

        and, optionally the switch:   /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Switch
   Switch

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                           where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command to display  the  current
            routing on cluster node CLOYD.

                ____ ___________ ________________________
            OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE /CLUSTER-NODE:CLOYD<RET>
            OPR>
            10:34:55        -- System Device Routing Table --

|           Printer 0 [CLOYD] (Alias:FOO) Routed to Cluster Printer 0
|           [GIDNEY] (Alias:BAR)

            OPR>



                                   3-197
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)
                             (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)


        2.  Specify the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command, but no routing has been
            performed.

                ____ ________________
            OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>
            OPR>
            16:30:23          --No Routing has been performed--
            OPR>














































                                   3-198
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW SCHEDULER)
                              (SHOW SCHEDULER)


   SHOW SCHEDULER - Displaying the System Scheduler
   SHOW SCHEDULER - Displaying the System Scheduler



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW SCHEDULER command displays the current settings  of  the
        scheduling  scheme  for  your  system.  The parameters and values
        shown in the display are  set  by  your  System  Manager  in  the
        n-CONFIG.CMD   file   at   system  installation  time.   You  can
        optionally change these  settings  with  the  SET  SCHEDULER  and
        ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULER commands.

        The scheduler information display shows the following:

        1.  the class scheduler setting (on or off)

        2.  the bias control setting

        3.  the batch class setting

        4.  the class number with its share (percentage) of CPU time, its
            use  percentage,  and load averages in intervals of 1, 5, and
            15 minutes

        5.  windfall setting (allocated or withheld)

        6.  the classes setting (by account or by policy program)

        Refer to the SET SCHEDULER and  ENABLE  CLASS-SCHEDULER  commands
        for a description of these parameters and values.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW SCHEDULER<RET>

        and, optionally the switch:   /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Switch
   Switch

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                           where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.



                                   3-199
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW SCHEDULER)
                              (SHOW SCHEDULER)


   Example
   Example

        Type SHOW SCHEDULER  to  display  the  current  settings  of  the
        scheduling scheme for cluster node GIDNEY.

            ____ _________ _________________________
        OPR>SHOW SCHEDULER /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
        OPR>
        10:28:14            -- System scheduler information --
                                       For node GIDNEY::
                            Class scheduler: off  Bias control: 11
                                Batch class: none set
        OPR>









































                                   3-200
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


   SHOW STATUS - Displaying Device/System Information
   SHOW STATUS - Displaying Device/System Information



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW STATUS command displays the current information about  a
        particular device or range of devices, showing its current status
        within the  system.   The  device  can  be  a  batch  stream,  an
        input/output  unit number, a tape-drive name, a structure name, a
        node, or all current devices known to the system.

        The SHOW STATUS command is useful  when  you  want  to  know  the
        current  status  of  the  system.   You can issue this command to
        check whether any devices are active or idle.

        If you do not specify any keyword with the SHOW  STATUS  command,
        the command defaults to batch streams, printers, and readers.  If
        your installation has a card punch, paper-tape punch, or plotter,
        the status of these devices are also displayed when no keyword is
        specified.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW STATUS keyword nn /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      DISK-DRIVE
                                      NETWORK-NODE
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument
                                      READER
                                      STRUCTURE
                                      TAPE-DRIVE

        followed by a stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        or a range:                   n:m

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

        or                            CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::
                                   3-201
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        or a structure name:          structure-name:

        or a tape-drive logical name: MTAn:

        and, optionally, the switches: /NODE:node-name::
                                       /SHORT
                                       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

        DISK-DRIVES has these optional switches:

                                       /ALL
                                       /FREE
                                       /MOUNTED

        STRUCTURE has these optional switches:

                                       /ALL
                                       /MOUNTED
                                       /UNMOUNTED

        TAPE-DRIVE has these optional switches:

                                       /ALL
                                       /CHARACTERISTICS
                                       /FREE

        The NETWORK-NODE argument can only be followed by the node  name;
        no  switches or stream/unit numbers.  For example, to specify the
        node named KL2102, type NETWORK-NODE BOSTON::.  You must type two
        colons (::) after the node name.


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies one or more batch input streams.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies one or more card-punch devices.

        DISK-DRIVE         specifies all the disk drives currently  known
                           to  the  system.   With  this keyword, you can
                           optionally  specify  the   /ALL,   /FREE,   or
                           /MOUNTED  switch.   The /ALL switch is assumed
                           if you do not specify a switch.

                                   3-202
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


        NETWORK-NODE       specifies the status of  all  nodes  currently
                           known to the system be displayed.  The display
                           shows each node name and whether the  node  is
                           off-line or on-line.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies   one   or   more   paper-tape-punch
                           devices.

        PLOTTER            specifies one or more plotter devices.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                     n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                           TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                           configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                           processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                           processors.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

             DQS queuename

                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.
                                   3-203
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

             LOCAL         specifies to display the  local  line  printer
                           parameters.
                                   3-204
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


        READER             specifies  one  or  more  punched-card   input
                           devices.

        STRUCTURE          specifies  all  structures  in  the   system's
                           structure  data  base.  With this keyword, you
                           can optionally specify a  structure  name,  or
                           the /ALL, /MOUNTED, or /UNMOUNTED switch.  The
                           /ALL switch is assumed if you do not specify a
                           switch.

                           When you specify a structure name, the display
                           shows  the names of all users who have mounted
                           the structure,  accessed  the  structure,  and
                           connected  to the structure.  In addition, the
                           disk  drive  status  for  the   structure   is
                           displayed.

        TAPE-DRIVE         specifies  one  or  more  magnetic  tape-drive
                           units known to the system.  With this keyword,
                           you can optionally specify a  tape-drive  name
                           (in the format of MTAn:), the /ALL switch, the
                           /CHARACTERISTICS switch, or the /FREE switch.

        nn                 specifies a batch stream number  or  a  device
                           unit  number.  The number is usually from 0 to
                           5, but can be larger if your installation  has
                           acquired additional devices.

        n:m                specifies a range of  batch  streams  or  unit
                           numbers.    The  n  represents  the  low-order
                           number; and the m  represents  the  high-order
                           number.

        structure-name:    specifies the name of a structure.

        MTAn:              specifies the logical  tape-drive  name.   The
                           colon   must   be   included   with  the  name
                           specified.  The  name  is  in  the  format  of
                           MTAn:, where n is the tape-drive number.

   Switches
   Switches

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                           cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.

        /SHORT             specifies that the status  display  list  only
                           the  stream/unit  number,  the current status,
                           the job name, the request-id number,  and  the
                           user  name with column headers.  If you do not
                           specify   the   /SHORT   switch,    additional
                           information  such  as  the  job number and the
                           runtime appears in the display  for  each  job
                                   3-205
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


                           request.   This  switch  is not valid with the
                           DISK-DRIVES or TAPE-DRIVE keyword.

        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                           specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                           where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                           "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                           within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                           asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                           cluster.

        The following switches are optional for the DISK-DRIVE keyword:

        /ALL               specifies  that  both  free  disk  drives  and
                           mounted disk drives be displayed.  This switch
                           is assumed if you do not specify a switch.

        /FREE              specifies that only those disk drives that are
                           available for structure mounts be displayed.

        /MOUNTED           specifies that only those disk drives that are
                           currently   mounted   and  being  accessed  be
                           displayed.


        The following switches are optional for the STRUCTURE keyword:

        /ALL               specifies  that  both  mounted  and  unmounted
                           structures   be  displayed.   This  switch  is
                           assumed if you do not specify a switch.

        /MOUNTED           specifies that only those structures that  are
                           currently mounted be displayed.

        /UNMOUNTED         specifies that only those structures that  are
                           free for mounting be displayed.

        The following switches are optional for the TAPE-DRIVE keyword:

        /ALL               specifies that all tape drives  known  to  the
                           system  be displayed.  The status display also
                           provides additional information, such  as  the
                           AVR  status,  the  label-type, and the density
                           (BPI).  If you do not specify the /ALL switch,
                           the  additional information does not appear in
                           the status display.

        /CHARACTERISTICS   specifies that the status display contain  the
                           characteristics of all tape drives or one tape
                           drive if  you  specify  the  tape  drive  name


                                   3-206
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


                           (MTAn:).    The  characteristics  include  the
                           drive name, the model name (TU45, TU78  etc.),
                           the  type  of  drive (7-track or 9-track), and
                           the tape densities the drive accepts.

        /FREE              specifies that the status display contain  all
                           tape  drives  that  are currently unloaded and
                           available  for  mounting  tape  volumes.   The
                           /FREE  switch  also displays those tape drives
                           that are loaded, but are not being accessed by
                           any user.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SHOW STATUS command to display the status of  all
            printers on all nodes within the cluster.

                ____ ______ _______ ____________________
            OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER /CLUSTER-NODE:*<RET>
            OPR>
            10:51:32  Received message from RONCO::
            10:51:30        -- System Device Status --

            Printer Status:

            Cluster printers
|             Alias     Unit     Node          Status       
|             -----     ----    ------    ---------------  
|             BINN         0      THEP    Idle             
|  
|  
|           DQS printers
|  
|             Alias           DQS queue name          Node   Status      
|             -----        -----------------------  ------   ------  
|             LARRY                        SI$8700  JUNIPR    Idle
|               JOE                       SWE$LN03  LATOUR    Idle
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name     Server       Status      
|             -----    -----------   ------  ---------------
|             LAT1           LN03    LAT100  Idle             
|  
|           10:51:32  Received message from THEP::
|           10:51:22        -- System Device Status --
|  







                                   3-207
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


|           Printer Status:
|  
|           Local printers
|             Alias  Unit      Status       
|             -----  ----  ---------------  
|               BAR     0  Idle             
|  
|           DQS printers
|             Alias         DQS queue name           Node     Status
|             -----      -----------------------    ------    ------  
|             CURLIE                     SI$8700    JUNIPR    Idle
|              SHEMP                    SWE$LN03    LATOUR    Idle
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name     Server       Status      
|             -----    -----------   ------  ---------------
|             LAT2          F00-NN   BAR--M  Idle             
|             LAT3            LN03   LAT100  Idle             
|  
|  
|           10:51:32  Received message from GIDNEY::
|           10:51:25        -- System Device Status --
|  
|           Printer Status:
|  
|           Local printers
|             Alias Unit      Status       
|             ----  ----   -----------  
|             RUND   0     Idle             
|  
|           DQS printers
|             Alias         DQS queue name           Node     Status
|             -----      ----------------------     ------    ------  
|             CURLIE                    SI$8700     JUNIPR    Idle
|              SHEMP                   SWE$LN03     LATOUR    Idle
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name     Server       Status      
|             -----    -----------  ------  ---------------
|              LAT1           LN03  LAT100  Idle             
|  
|  
|           10:51:32        -- System Device Status --
|  
|           Printer Status:
|  
|           Cluster printers
|             Alias   Unit     Node          Status       
|             -----   -----    ------    ---------------  
|              FOO    0        GIDNEY    Idle             
|             BINN    0        THEP      Idle             


                                   3-208
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


|           DQS printers
|             Alias         DQS queue name          Node   Status      
|             -----    -----------------------    ------  ---------  
|             CURLIE                   SI$8700    JUNIPR  Idle
|              SHEMP                  SWE$LN03    LATOUR  Idle
|  
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name   Server       Status      
|             -----   -----------  ------  ---------------
|             LAT3           LN03  LAT100  Idle             

            OPR>

        2.  Give the SHOW STATUS command to display the  status  of  free
            disk drives on cluster node GIDNEY.

                ____ ______ __________ _____ _________________________
            OPR>SHOW STATUS DISK-DRIVE /FREE /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
            OPR>
            10:55:34  Received message from GIDNEY::
            10:55:28         -- Disk Drive Status --

                             FREE DRIVES

            DISK DRIVE INFORMATION                   DISK PACK
            INFORMATION
                  Chan-Cont   Disk   Mount   Mount                Usage
             Type   Drive    Status  Status  Count   Name         Options
             ---- --------- -------- ------- -----   ------------ -------
             RP06 0,  ,1    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,0    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,4    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,3    Avail    Offline 
             RA60 7,01,7    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,13   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,15   Avail    Offline 
             RA60 7,01,16   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,17   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,18   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,20   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,36   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,22   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,14   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,12   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,01,2    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,21   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,11   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,19   Avail    Offline 
             RP06 1,  ,5    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,03,6    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,03,1    Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,00,8    Avail    Offline 


                                   3-209
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW STATUS)
                               (SHOW STATUS)


             RA81 7,01,9    Avail    Offline 
             RA60 7,03,10   Avail    Offline 
             RA81 7,02,12   Avail    Offline 
                  NOTE: Channel 7 indicates CI channel

            OPR>  















































                                   3-210
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHOW TIME)
                                (SHOW TIME)


   SHOW TIME - Displaying Date and Time
   SHOW TIME - Displaying Date and Time



   Function
   Function

        The SHOW TIME command displays the date and time.

        The date is shown in the format of dd-mmm-yy (dd=day,  mmm=month,
        yy=year).

        The time is shown in the format of hh:mm:ss (hh=hour, mm=minutes,
        ss=seconds).


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>


   Example
   Example

        Type SHOW TIME and confirm with a carriage return.  OPR  responds
        with the display of the current date and time.

            ____ _________
        OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>
        20-Apr-88 11:55:38
        OPR>

























                                   3-211
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SHUTDOWN)
                                 (SHUTDOWN)


   SHUTDOWN - Terminating Device Scheduling
   SHUTDOWN - Terminating Device Scheduling



   Function
   Function

        The SHUTDOWN command terminates scheduling  for  a  device.   The
        SHUTDOWN command is the opposite of the START command.

        When  you  issue  this  command,  the  job  currently  processing
        continues  until  it  has  been  completed.   When  the  job  has
        completed, the stream or device is terminated and no further jobs
        requiring the stream or device are processed.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SHUTDOWN keyword nn /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      NODE
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument
                                      READER

        followed by the stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        or a range:                   n:m

        or for the NODE keyword:      node-name::

        and, optionally, the following switches:

                                      /NODE:node-name::
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

        or                            CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename


                                   3-212
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SHUTDOWN)
                                 (SHUTDOWN)


        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                           range of batch-input streams.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                           range of card-punch devices.

        NODE node-name::   specifies to shutdown the printer  and  reader
                           device  for a node within the system's network
                           for remote station communication.  The  double
                           colon   (::)   following   the  node  name  is
                           optional.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS node-name and cannot be an
                           alias.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                           or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.

        PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                           range of plotter devices.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                     n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                           TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                           configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                           processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20


                                   3-213
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SHUTDOWN)
                                 (SHUTDOWN)


                           processors.

             DQS queuename

                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar


                                   3-214
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SHUTDOWN)
                                 (SHUTDOWN)


                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

        READER             specifies  a  particular  card-reader  (input)
                           device or a range of card-reader devices.

        nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                           be shutdown.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream/unit numbers.  You
                           can  specify  this  range  instead of a single
                           stream/unit number.  The colon  must  separate
                           the   two   numbers.   The  n  represents  the
                           low-order number  and  the  m  represents  the
                           high-order number.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
                           station.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the card  punch  at
            the central site.

                ________ __________ ______
            OPR>SHUTDOWN CARD-PUNCH 0<RET>
            OPR>
            13:23:33        Card-punch   0  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
            OPR>




                                   3-215
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SHUTDOWN)
                                 (SHUTDOWN)


        2.  Specify the SHUTDOWN command to terminate all batch streams.

                ________ ____________ ________
            OPR>SHUTDOWN BATCH-STREAM 0:2<RET>
            OPR>
            12:30:15        Batch-stream 0  --Shutdown--
            12:30:16        Batch-stream 1  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
            12:30:17        Batch-stream 2  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the  line  printers
            at your site.

                ________ _______ ________
            OPR>SHUTDOWN PRINTER 0:1<RET>
            OPR>
            16:23:45        Printer 0  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
            16:23:46        Printer 1  --Shutdown--
            OPR>




































                                   3-216
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (START)
                                  (START)


   START - Starting Device Scheduling
   START - Starting Device Scheduling



   Function
   Function

        The  START  command  starts  the  scheduling  for  the  specified
        devices.   The  START  command  is  the  opposite of the SHUTDOWN
        command.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>START keyword nn /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      NODE identifier::
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument
                                      READER

        followed by the stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        or a range:                   n:m

        optionally, followed by this switches:

                                      /NODE:node-name::
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

        optionally followed by (PRINTER keyword only):

                                      /DEVICE:MTAn:
                                              TTYn:

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

        or                            CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::


                                   3-217
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (START)
                                  (START)


        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and, for SERVER, the switch:  /TERMINAL-CHARACTERISTIC:


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                           range  of  batch  input  streams.  The maximum
                           number of batch streams is 63.  Note that this
                           maximum  can  be lowered by the system manager
                           using Galgen.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                           range of card-punch devices.

        NODE node-name::   specifies that the printer and  reader  device
                           for  a  node  within  the  system's network be
                           started.  The double colon (::) following  the
                           node  name  is  optional.  Before you start an
                           IBM node, you must define the node and set the
                           parameters  for the node.  Refer to the DEFINE
                           and SET NODE commands in this chapter.

                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS node-name and cannot be an
                           alias.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                           or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.

        PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                           range of plotter devices.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                     n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                           TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled


                                   3-218
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (START)
                                  (START)


                           configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                           processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                           processors.

             DQS queuename

                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"



                                   3-219
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (START)
                                  (START)


                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

        READER             specifies  a  particular  card-reader  (input)
                           device or a range of card-reader devices.

        nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                           be started.  You must specify a stream or unit
                           number.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream or  unit  numbers.
                           You can specify this range instead of a single
                           stream  or  unit  number.   The   colon   must
                           separate  the  two  numbers.  The n represents
                           the low-order number and the m represents  the
                           high-order number.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /DEVICE:MTAn:  or TTYn:

                           specifies that printer output is to be written
                           to tape, on device MTAn:, or to a terminal, on
                           device TTYn:.   The  "n"  is  the  tape  drive
                           number or the terminal line number.  The MTAn:
                           specification  allows  you  to  spool  printer
                           output  to tape.  This is particularly helpful
                           when printer  hardware  problems  exist.   The
                           TTYn:    specification  must  be  a  hardwired


                                   3-220
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (START)
                                  (START)


                           dedicated terminal line.

                           Before you use START PRINTER/DEVICE:MTAn:, you
                           must     specify    SET    TAPE-DRIVE    MTAn:
                                                      _______  __________
                           UNAVAILABLE.  Refer to the TOPS-20  Operator's
                           _____
                           Guide, for more information.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
                           station.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.

        /TERMINAL-CHARACTERISTIC:

                           specifies the printer  terminal  type  of  the
                           server.   The printer terminal type is defined
                           by your System Manager.   For  example,  LA50,
                           LA100, and LN03 are printer terminal types.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the START command to start the line  printer  at  the
            central site.

                _____ _______ ______
            OPR>START PRINTER 0<RET>
            OPR>
            20:31:09        Printer 0  --Startup Scheduled--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the START command to start all batch streams.

                _____ ____________ ________
            OPR>START BATCH-STREAM 0:3<RET>
            OPR>
            12:15:32        Batch-stream 0  --Startup Scheduled--
            OPR>
            12:15:38        Batch-stream 1  --Startup Scheduled--
            OPR>
            12:15:44        Batch-stream 2  --Startup Scheduled--
            OPR>
            12:15:50        Batch-stream 3  --Startup Scheduled--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the START command to start the card-punch devices  at
            your site.

                _____ __________ ________
            OPR>START CARD-PUNCH 0:1<RET>
            OPR>
            13:17:23        Card-punch 0  --Startup Scheduled--
            OPR>
            13:17:30        Card-punch 1  --Startup Scheduled--
            OPR>


                                   3-221
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (STOP)
                                   (STOP)


   STOP - Stopping Devices Temporarily
   STOP - Stopping Devices Temporarily



   Function
   Function

        The STOP command temporarily stops one of  six  possible  devices
        that are currently idle or processing a particular job.

        The STOP command only temporarily stops the device and the device
        is  still  active.   The  device has not been terminated and jobs
        requesting that device can still be scheduled.

        To re-activate the particular device after  a  STOP  command  has
        been issued, give the CONTINUE command.  Refer to the description
        of the CONTINUE command in this chapter.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>STOP keyword nn argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword can be one of the following:

                                      BATCH-STREAM
                                      CARD-PUNCH
                                      PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                      PLOTTER
                                      PRINTER argument
                                      READER

        followed by the stream/unit number:

                                      nn

        or a range:                   n:m

        optionally followed by the switches:

                                      /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

        or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

        or                            CLUSTER nn
                                              n:m
        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            DQS queuename


                                   3-222
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (STOP)
                                   (STOP)


        followed by:                  NODE node-name::

        or                            LAT
        followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                      SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"

        and, optionally, one of the following arguments:

                                      AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST
                                            EVERY-REQUEST
                                      IMMEDIATELY


   Keywords
   Keywords

        BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                           range of batch input streams.

        CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                           range of card-punch devices.

        PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                           or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.

        PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                           range of plotter devices.

        PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

             CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                     n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                           TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                           configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                           processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                           configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                           For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                           be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                           processors.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                           cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.



                                   3-223
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (STOP)
                                   (STOP)


                           For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                           specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                           be the local node or an alias.

             DQS queuename

                           specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                           allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                           systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                           specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                           the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                           specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                           string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  NODE node-name::

                           specifies the VMS node where the print request
                           is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                           following the node name is not needed.

                           For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                           specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                           alias.

             LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

                  PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the


                                   3-224
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (STOP)
                                   (STOP)


                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

                  SERVICE "name"

                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

                  SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.

        READER             specifies  a  particular  card-reader  (input)
                           device or a range of card-reader devices.

        nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                           be stopped.  You must specify a stream or unit
                           number.

        n:m                specifies a range of stream or  unit  numbers.
                           You can specify this range instead of a single
                           stream  or  unit  number.   The   colon   must
                           separate  the  two  numbers.  The n represents
                           the low-order number and the m represents  the
                           high-order number.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST

                           specifies that the device must stop after  the
                           current request is finished.

        AFTER EVERY-REQUEST

                           specifies that the  device  stop  after  every
                           request.   This  setting will remain in effect
                           until you use the SHUTDOWN and START  commands
                           to  shut  the  device  down  and  restart  the
                           device.


                                   3-225
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (STOP)
                                   (STOP)


        IMMEDIATELY        specifies  that  the  device  stop  processing
                           immediately.   Any job in progress is stopped.
                           This  action  is  the  default  for  the  STOP
                           command.


   Switches
   Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
                           station.   The double colon (::) following the
                           node name is optional.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the STOP command to stop the card reader while it was
            processing to prevent a card-reader jam.

                ____ ______ ______
            OPR>STOP READER 0<RET>
            OPR>
            09:20:10        Reader 0  --Stopped--
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the STOP command to stop  a  batch  stream  that  was
            currently processing a job.

                ____ ____________ ______
            OPR>STOP BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>
            OPR>
            18:23:55        Batch-stream 2  --Stopped--
            OPR>

        3.  Specify the STOP command to stop the line  printer  that  was
            currently processing.

                ____ _______ ______
            OPR>STOP PRINTER 1<RET>
            OPR>
            11:37:02        Printer 1  --Stopped--
            OPR>






                                   3-226
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SUPPRESS)
                                 (SUPPRESS)


   SUPPRESS - Suppressing Printer Form-Feeds
   SUPPRESS - Suppressing Printer Form-Feeds



   Function
   Function

        The  SUPPRESS  command  converts  all  vertical-form-feed  motion
        characters  to  single  space  characters.   All  form  feeds and
        multiple line feeds are converted to a single line  feed.   Thus,
        the  paging motion in a printer-job request is ignored.  However,
        this command does not cause printing to occur  across  the  forms
        page burst (perforation).

        The SUPPRESS command is very useful  when  you  want  to  stop  a
        user's  program  that  caused  a print loop, for example when bad
        code causes too many form feeds.  When this happens, you can stop
        the  printer,  issue  the SUPPRESS command, and then continue the
        printer, thus saving a lot of paper.

        The SUPPRESS command's only keyword  is  PRINTER  with  its  unit
        number  and,  optionally,  the  node  name  or  number.  You must
        specify the PRINTER keyword.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>SUPPRESS keyword nn (or) LAT /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by it alias name

        or followed by its unit number:

                                      nn

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

        or                            LAT

        followed by:                  SERVICE "name" SERVER "name"
        or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                      SERVER "name"


        and one of the following switches:

                                      /FILE
                                      /JOB


                                   3-227
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SUPPRESS)
                                 (SUPPRESS)


                                      /STOP

|       or, optionally the following switch:
|  
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        PRINTER            specifies a particular  line  printer  device.
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the
|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.

        nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                           that  will have its vertical motion suppressed
                           (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,  and  so
                           forth).  You must specify this unit number.

        LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                           used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                           hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                           LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                           and its SERVER name to establish communication
                           between your system, running LAT software, and
                           the resource printer terminal.

                           You     cannot     use      the      following
                           SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                     SERVICE name only
                                     SERVER name only
                                     PORT name only
                                     SERVICE name and PORT name
                                     SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                           Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                           about LAT communications.

             PORT "name"

                           specifies the communication path  between  the
                           host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                           access point that the node represents  to  the
                           user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                           have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                           alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                           and dollar signs.

             SERVICE "name"



                                   3-228
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SUPPRESS)
                                 (SUPPRESS)


                           specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                           access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                           the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                           characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                           characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                           signs.

             SERVER "name"

                           specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                           printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                           box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                           it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                           characters in length.


   Switches
   Switches

        You must specify one of the following switches:

        /FILE              specifies the current file being printed  that
                           was  originally  queued  to  process  multiple
                           files.    (Refer   to   the   BACKSPACE    and
                           FORWARDSPACE commands.)

        /JOB               specifies the current job being printed.  With
                           the /JOB switch, the entire job is suppressed,
                           regardless of how many files or switches  were
                           specified  when  the job was originally queued
                           to print.  The /JOB switch is the  default  of
                           the SUPPRESS command.

        /STOP              specifies  a  switch  used  to  resume  normal
                           printing  and stop the suppression of carriage
                           control on the line printer.  When you specify
                           this   switch,   the  job  that  is  currently
                           printing reverts to the print job format  that
                           occurred   before  the  SUPPRESS  command  was
                           issued.

|       You can optionally specify the following switches:
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.



                                   3-229
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SUPPRESS)
                                 (SUPPRESS)


|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
|                          station.   the double colon (::) following the
|                          node name is optional.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the SUPPRESS command to stop the waste  of  paper  on
            line  printer  0  that  is printing a run-away print program.
            This  SUPPRESS  command  affects  the  entire  job  that   is
            currently printing.

                ________ _______ ______
            OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0<RET>
            OPR>
             6:37:41        Printer 0  --Carriage control suppressed--
                            Job DUMP01 Req # 23 For: OPERATOR
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the SUPPRESS command to stop the suppression of  form
            feeds and carriage returns on line printer 0 after a run-away
            job has completed printing.  The line printer is now free  to
            print the next job in the queue.

                ________ _______ _ __________
            OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0 /STOP<RET>
            OPR>
             7:32:12        Printer 0  --Carriage control activated--
                            Job DUMP01 Req # 23 For: OPERATOR
            OPR>

























                                   3-230
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (SWITCH)
                                  (SWITCH)


   SWITCH - Switching Tape Drives and Volids
   SWITCH - Switching Tape Drives and Volids



   Function
   Function

        The SWITCH command switches a tape-mount request from one  volume
        to another that is on another tape drive.  This command should be
        used when a user program wishes to switch volumes without issuing
        another tape MOUNT request.

        In particular, this command is useful when  you  want  to  handle
        tape  volume  switching for unlabeled tapes used by certain COBOL
        programs.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>SWITCH nnn volid MTAn: /switch<RET>

        where nnn is the tape-mount request number

        followed by the new tape-volume identification (volid)

        followed by the tape-drive name (MTAn:)

|       followed optionally by the switch /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|  
   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                                specifies the  particular  cluster  node
|                                within  the  TOPS-20  cluster  where the
|                                command     is      processed.       The
|                                "cluster-node-name" qualifier can be any
|                                node  name  within  the  cluster  or  an
|                                asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk specifies
|                                all nodes within the cluster.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

         The following list are the restrictions for the SWITCH command:

                                 1.  You must specify a new volid.

                                 2.  The tape drive name is optional.  If
                                     specified,  it must be a drive other
                                     than the drive that the  request  is


                                   3-231
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (SWITCH)
                                  (SWITCH)


                                     currently  using.  If not specified,
                                     the drive  must  be  the  same  tape
                                     drive.

                                 3.  If you give a drive name,  you  must
                                     have  the  new  volume  mounted  and
                                     ready on the tape drive.

                                 4.  The switched  tape  and  tape  drive
                                     must  be  the  same  track-type  and
                                     density.


   Example
   Example

        A user has requested that you SWITCH volid COBOL1 to COBOL2.  You
        have already mounted and made ready COBOL2 on tape drive MTA1:.

            ______ __ ______ __________
        OPR>SWITCH 90 COBOL2 MTA1:<RET>
        OPR>
         7:45:06          --Tape Drive Released By User--
                        MTA0: Volume COBOL1 Being unloaded
        OPR>
         7:45:06          --MTA1: Given To Request 90--
                        Volume COBOL2 now in use by
                        User BROWN, Job 16, Terminal 114
        OPR>


























                                   3-232
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (TAKE)
                                   (TAKE)


   TAKE - Executing OPR Commands Automatically
   TAKE - Executing OPR Commands Automatically



   Function
   Function

        The TAKE command executes a series of commands that reside  in  a
        TAKE command file.  This command serves as an aid to you when you
        execute the same commands over and over again.  You can create  a
        command  file  that consists of the commands used most frequently
        and then execute these commands by issuing the TAKE command.

        There is no minimum  or  maximum  limit  on  the  number  of  OPR
        commands that you can put in a TAKE command file.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>TAKE filespec /switch<RET>

        where filespec is the input-file specification

        and, optionally, /switch can be:              /DISPLAY
                                                      /NODISPLAY


   Keywords
   Keywords

        filespec           specifies the input filename and file type  of
                           the  file  that  contains  the  executable OPR
                           commands.  If you do not specify the dev:, OPR
                           defaults to DSK:.


   Switches
   Switches

        /DISPLAY           specifies that OPR displays all messages  from
                           the TAKE command file, any error messages that
                           occur, and the OPR  commands  once  they  have
                           been executed.

        /NODISPLAY         specifies that OPR does not  display  the  OPR
                           commands  that  exist in the TAKE command file
                           after their  execution.   All  other  messages
                           appear  with  the /NODISPLAY switch specified.
                           This  switch  is  the  default  of  the   TAKE
                           command.






                                   3-233
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (TAKE)
                                   (TAKE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Specify the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR  commands
            that are in OPR-TAKE01.CMD, which resides in your directory.

                ____ _____________________________
            OPR>TAKE <OPERATOR>OPR-TAKE01.CMD<RET>
            OPR>
            14:54:10        Batch-stream 0  --Startup Scheduled--

            14:54:12        Batch-stream 1  --Startup Scheduled--

            14:54:15        Batch-stream 2  --Startup Scheduled--

            START BATCH-STREAM 0:2
            OPR>
            14:54:18        Printer 0  --Startup Scheduled--

            14:54:21        Printer 1  --Startup Scheduled--

            START PRINTER 0:1
            OPR>

        2.  Specify the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR  commands
            from SYS:OPRCMD.CMD.  You do not specify SYS:  as this is the
            default device type.

                ____ __________ _______________
            OPR>TAKE OPRCMD.CMD /NODISPLAY<RET>
            OPR>
            16:43:07        Card-punch 0  --Shutdown Scheduled--

            16:43:11        Plotter 0  --Shutdown Scheduled--

            16:43:15        Reader 0  --Shutdown Scheduled--

            16:43:18        Paper-tape-punch 0 --Shutdown Scheduled--

            OPR>
















                                   3-234
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (UNDEFINEn)
                                (UNDEFINEn)


   UNDEFINE - Removing Structure Parameters
   UNDEFINE - Removing Structure Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The UNDEFINE command removes a structure's  attribute  definition
        from the structure data base.  The structure data base contains a
        list of all the system's structures and  their  parameters.   You
        can display the contents of the structure data base with the SHOW
        STATUS STRUCTURE command.

        Use the UNDEFINE command when a structure in the  structure  data
        base is no longer used.  You can also use the UNDEFINE command if
        you incorrectly enter a new structure name with the SET STRUCTURE
        command.


   Format
   Format

|       OPR>UNDEFINE keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword must be:             STRUCTURE

        followed by the argument:          structure-name:

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|  
|                           /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


   Keywords
   Keywords

        STRUCTURE          specifies a disk structure.


   Arguments
   Arguments

        structure-name:    specifies the alias name of the disk structure
                           to remove from the structure table.


   Switch
|  Switch
|  
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|  
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all


                                   3-235
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (UNDEFINEn)
                                (UNDEFINEn)


|                          nodes within the cluster.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        The UNDEFINE command functions  only  if  the  structure  is  not
        mounted.


   Examples
   Examples

        Specify  the  SHOW  STATUS  STRUCTURE  command  to  verify   that
        structure  JACK:   is  not  mounted.   Then  specify the UNDEFINE
        STRUCTURE command to remove structure JACK:  from  the  structure
        data base.

            ____ ______ _________ __________
        OPR>SHOW STATUS STRUCTURE JACK:<RET>
        OPR>
        10:14:21             -- Structure Status --

                      Mount   Mount File
        Alias  Name   State   Count Count Status         Access...
        ------ ------ ------- ----- ----- -------- ------------...
        JACK                              Unavail  Shared      ...

        Structure is not mounted on a disk drive

            ________ _________ __________
        OPR>UNDEFINE STRUCTURE JACK:<RET>
        OPR>
        10:14:22          -- Undefine Structure Command --
                        Structure JACK: deleted from data base
        OPR>





















                                   3-236
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (WAIT)
                                   (WAIT)


   WAIT - Controlling Input from Batch Jobs
   WAIT - Controlling Input from Batch Jobs



   Function
   Function

        The WAIT command causes OPR to wait a specified number of seconds
        before accepting input.

        The WAIT command is used in batch control files to try to prevent
        OPR  from  accepting a command before a previously issued command
        has been processed.

        The OPR program  is  designed  to  accept  and  process  commands
        immediately,  and the batch system (BATCON) will send commands to
        OPR as soon as the previous command is accepted.

        Most OPR commands require processing  by  other  modules  of  the
        operating  system.   OPR can accept a command, dispatch it to the
        appropriate module, and accept another  command  from  the  batch
        file  before  the  output  from the first command returns to OPR.
        For example, it is possible for an EXIT command in the batch file
        to  be processed before the response to previously issued command
        is displayed.  The WAIT command should  be  entered  between  the
        previous command and the EXIT command, to allow the first command
        to finish processing before the EXIT command is sent to OPR.


   Format
   Format

        OPR>WAIT n<RET>

        where n is the number of seconds  that  OPR  should  wait  before
        accepting  the  next  command  in the batch file.  The value of n
        must be between 1 and 60.


   Warning
   Warning

        Using the WAIT command does NOT guarantee that  the  output  from
        the  first command will be successfully displayed before the EXIT
        command is accepted and processing by OPR.   OPR  will,  however,
        WAIT  the  specified  number  of seconds, and the output from the
        first command will  be  displayed  if  it  is  ready  before  the
        specified number of seconds is up.


   Example
   Example

        The following batch file may be submitted to the batch system:



                                   3-237
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                   (WAIT)
                                   (WAIT)


             @ENABLE
             $OPR
             *SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
             *EXIT

        When this job is processed, the SHOW STATUS command is issued and
        accepted  by  OPR,  passed  to ORION for processing, and then the
        output is passed back through OPR  to  BATCON.   However,  BATCON
        will  send  the EXIT command immediately after OPR dispatches the
        SHOW STATUS command.  When OPR  receives  the  EXIT  command,  it
        causes  the  batch  job  to exit from OPR immediately, before the
        output from SHOW STATUS is received by OPR.

        The WAIT command is used to cause OPR to WAIT for  the  specified
        number  of  seconds  before  accepting  the  EXIT  command.   The
        following batch file would probably work successfully:

             @ENABLE
             $OPR
             *SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
             *WAIT 10
             *EXIT































                                   3-238












                                 CHAPTER 4
                                 CHAPTER 4

                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS



   4.1  INTRODUCTION
   4.1  INTRODUCTION

   LCP is the LAT Control Program.   LAT  is  the  Local  Area  Transport
   protocol,   used  to  control  communication  between  LAT  hosts  and
   terminals on the  Ethernet.   LCP  allows  you  to  perform  LAT  host
   management functions at a TOPS-20 host.

                                  WARNING

           The  LCP  commands  described  in  this  chapter   can
           seriously  affect  system performance.  If you are not
           sure of what you are doing, do not use LCP commands to
           set or clear LAT parameters.

                                    NOTE

           This introduction describes the  LAT  protocol  as  it
           pertains  to  TOPS-20  LAT  hosts.   The  LCP  command
           descriptions in this chapter apply only  to  LAT  host
           management  functions  on  TOPS-20  nodes.   For  more
           information about LAT architecture  and  LAT  Terminal
                                                       _____ ____
           Server  Configuration  Guidelines  see  the Local Area
           _________ _____ ____________ _______  _________  _____
           Transport (LAT) Architecture Network  Manager's  Guide
                   _______ ______ _________ _____
           and the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide.

   To run LCP, you must first run OPR, and therefore  must  have  OPR  or
   WHEEL privileges enabled.

   Many hundreds of hosts and terminals can  be  connected  on  the  same
   Ethernet.   LAT  terminal  servers  allow terminal users to connect to
   TOPS-20 hosts that are connected to the same Ethernet.  There must  be
   corresponding  server  software  in the host.  The host server and the
   terminal server use the  LAT  protocol  to  enable  the  (potentially)
   thousands of communications links to efficiently utilize the Ethernet.
   Users do not need to be aware of the LAT servers.

   Three types of parameters control the action of  a  TOPS-20  LAT  host


                                    4-1
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS



   server:

         o  permanent

         o  static

         o  dynamic

   You can change permanent parameters only by  rebuilding  the  monitor.
   You can change static parameters by editing n-CONFIG.CMD and reloading
   the monitor.  You can change dynamic  parameters  with  LCP  commands.
   LAT operation and some dynamic parameters are discussed below.

   There is one physical connection between all hosts  and  LAT  terminal
   servers:   the Ethernet.  All communication is transmitted on that one
   physical connection.  All communication between users of a  particular
   LAT  terminal server and a particular host is transmitted on a logical
   connection known as a  virtual  circuit.   Software  in  the  terminal
   server  and  in the host ensures that each message is delivered to the
   correct destination.

   Each message received (by  a  host  or  a  terminal  server)  must  be
   acknowledged  by the receiver.  The acknowledgement can be included in
   a data message, or can be sent as a separate message when there is  no
   data.   If  a  host does not receive an acknowledgement from a server,
   the host can send one more message to that server, at which  time  the
   host   starts  its  retransmit  timer.   When  the  host  receives  an
   acknowledgement from the server, this timer is stopped.  If  the  host
   receives  no  acknowledgement and the host's retransmit timer expires,
   the host retransmits all unacknowledged messages  to  the  server  and
   restarts  the  timer.   The  host  can  retransmit  these  messages  a
   specified number of times, known as the retransmit limit.  You can use
   LCP  commands  to  change  the  host's retransmit timer and retransmit
   limit in response to network load.

   Hosts present themselves to users of terminal servers  as  "services".
   Dynamic parameters associated with the services, such as service-name,
   group, and service-rating, let you control access  to  the  hosts.   A
   host  can  offer more than one service.  For example, a host can offer
   one service that is the host itself, and another service that  is  the
   host as part of a cluster.

   Service-names identify the services to users of the terminal  servers.
   The  service-name can be the host's node name.  More than one host can
   use the same service-name, letting you identify a cluster of hosts  as
   one  service.   The  fact  that  two  or  more  services have the same
   service-name is transparent to the user.

   The ratings of identically named services determine to which host  the
   connection  will  be  made.   You  can set the rating to be an integer
   between 0 and 255, or  you  can  set  it  to  be  dynamic.   The  host


                                    4-2
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS



   periodically updates a dynamic rating to be

                 255 - (4 * 15-minute load average)

   When a user requests a connection to a service that is offered by  two
   hosts,  the connection is made to the service with the highest rating.
   Terminal  servers  and  host  services  are  organized  into   logical
   categories  called  groups.   Each  group  is identified by an integer
   between zero and 255 that  controls  access  to  the  service  by  the
   terminal  server.   A service or a terminal server can be in more than
   one group.  Terminal servers can connect only to services  with  which
   they  have  a group in common.  For example, a terminal server that is
   in group 2 (only) can connect to a service only  if  that  service  is
   also  a  member  of  group 2.  By default, all terminal servers are in
   group zero.  Therefore, a service that is in group zero  (the  TOPS-20
   default)  is  accessible  to all terminal servers unless you clear the
   terminal server from group zero.

   At intervals determined by its multicast-timer, each host broadcasts a
   multicast message (a message to all terminal servers on the Ethernet),
   listing the services that the host offers.  This message also contains
   information  about  service-ratings  and  the  host's  groups.  Before
   sending  the  multicast  message,  the  host   updates   any   dynamic
   service-ratings.

   In response to a user request, a terminal server displays  a  list  of
   services  that  consists  of only those services to which the terminal
   server can connect.  Each service is identified by a service-name  and
   a service-identification string.  When the user logs in to the service
   (using the servicename), the host displays the  service-identification
   string.   This  is  a  descriptive  message about the service, such as
   "Node A of cluster ABC".  You can set and change the service-name  and
   service-identification with LCP commands.



   4.2  LOADING AND DUMPING LAT TERMINAL SERVERS
   4.2  LOADING AND DUMPING LAT TERMINAL SERVERS

   You load and dump LAT terminal servers with  the  NCP  LOAD  and  DUMP
                          ________________  ______  _________  _____
   commands.    See  the  DECnet-20/PSI-20  System  Manager's  Guide  for
   information on using these commands.



   4.3  OPR COMMANDS AVAILABLE IN LCP
   4.3  OPR COMMANDS AVAILABLE IN LCP

   Certain OPR commands can be executed from LCP.

         o  ENTER (command subset) name




                                    4-3
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS



         o  EXIT (to monitor level)

         o  PUSH (to EXEC level)

         o  RETURN (to Operator Command Level)

         o  TAKE (commands from) file /DISPLAY
                                      /NODISPLAY

         o  WAIT (for) seconds

   These OPR commands are described briefly on the next  page.   You  can
   find complete descriptions of these commands in Chapter 3 (OPR Command
   Descriptions) of this manual.


        Command                            Function
        Command                            Function

        ENTER name         enters another command level such as NCP.

        EXIT               exits from LCP and returns to TOPS-20  command
                           level.  For example:

                               _____ ________
                           OPR>ENTER LCP<RET>
                               _________
                           LCP>EXIT<RET>
                           $



























                                    4-4
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS



        Command                            Function
        Command                            Function

        PUSH               exits LCP enters a new TOPS-20 command  level.
                           You  can then perform any software task or run
                           a utility.  To return, give  the  TOPS-20  POP
                           command.  For example:

                               _________
                           LCP>PUSH<RET>

                            TOPS-20 Command processor 7.0(186)
                            ___________
                           @ENABLE<RET>
                            ___________
                           $DUMPER<RET>
                           DUMPER>
                                .
                                .
                                  _________
                           DUMPER>EXIT<RET>
                            ________
                           $POP<RET>
                           LCP>

        RETURN             returns immediately to OPR command level.  You
                           do  not  lose any commands or actions that you
                           specified in LCP.

                               ___________
                           LCP>RETURN<RET>
                           OPR>

        TAKE input-filespec

                           executes a series of  commands  in  a  command
                           file  automatically.  The commands in the TAKE
                           command file can be both OPR and LCP commands.

                               ____ ____________
                           LCP>TAKE LCP.CMD<RET>
                           LCP>

                           The TAKE command works in LCP the same way  as
                           in  OPR.   You can specify either the /DISPLAY
                           switch  or   the   /NODISPLAY   switch.    The
                           /NODISPLAY switch is the default if you do not
                           specify either switch.

        WAIT n             waits from 1 to 60  seconds  before  executing
                           the  next  command.   This  is useful when you
                           TAKE (see above) commands from a file, to give
                           each command time to execute.



   4.4  LCP COMMANDS
   4.4  LCP COMMANDS

   The LAT Control Program (LCP) enables you to control and  monitor  LAT


                                    4-5
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS



   activity  associated  with the host on which you are running LCP.  For
   example, LCP commands:

         o  Clear LAT parameters.

         o  Set LAT parameters.

         o  Show the current parameters,  terminal  connections,  counter
            and server information.

         o  Change certain counter settings to zero.

   This chapter explains how to enter and exit LCP, and describes the LCP
   commands listed below.

         o  CLEAR

         o  SET

         o  SHOW

         o  START

         o  STOP

         o  ZERO

                                     WARNING

                The LCP commands described in  this  chapter  can
                seriously  affect system performance.  If you are
                not sure of what you are doing, do  not  use  LCP
                commands to set or clear LAT parameters.

   You start the LCP program from within OPR.  To enter LCP use  the  OPR
   command, ENTER, as shown below.

            _____ ________
        OPR>ENTER LCP<RET>

        LCP>

   There are three ways to exit LCP:

         o  You can exit LCP and return to OPR command level.

         o  You can exit LCP and return to monitor command level.

         o  You can exit LCP by entering another command level, such as
            NCP.

   To return to OPR command level, use the RETURN command as below:


                                    4-6
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS



            ___________
        LCP>RETURN<RET>

        OPR>

   To return to EXEC command level, use the EXIT command as below:

            _________
        LCP>EXIT<RET>


   The LCP commands are in alphabetical order on the following pages.











































                                    4-7
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                  (CLEAR)
                                  (CLEAR)


   CLEAR - Clearing LAT host parameters
   CLEAR - Clearing LAT host parameters



   Function
   Function

        The CLEAR  command  resets  parameters  specified  with  the  SET
        command.


   Format
   Format

        LCP>CLEAR keyword argument<RET>

        Keywords:

                           _          _                       
                     /    |            | \
             GROUPS / n   |,n1, ....   |  \
                    \ m:n |,m1:n1, ....|  /
                     \    |_          _| /
             IDENTIFICATION
                      /               \
             MAXIMUM / ACTIVE-CIRCUITS \
                     \ SESSIONS        /
                      \               /
             MULTICAST-TIMER
             NUMBER
                         /     \
             RETRANSMIT / LIMIT \
                        \ TIMER /
                         \     /
             SERVICE-NAME text


   Keywords
   Keywords

        GROUPS n           clears the specified GROUPS setting.  You  can
                           clear the current setting for single groups or
                           a range of groups.  You can specify  a  number
                           from 0 to 255, a range of numbers (m:n) from 0
                           to 255, or a list of both.

                           For example:

                           CLEAR GROUPS 7

                           CLEAR GROUPS 8:10, 22

        IDENTIFICATION     resets the host identification information  to
                           the system banner as defined in MONNAM.TXT.


                                    4-8
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                  (CLEAR)
                                  (CLEAR)


        MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS

                           changes to 20 the maximum  number  of  virtual
                           circuits  that can simultaneously be connected
                           to your host.

        MAXIMUM SESSIONS   changes  the  maximum  number  of  active  LAT
                           terminals allowed to connect to the host.  The
                           new  value  is  the  maximum  number  of   LAT
                           terminals   allowed   in   the   host   system
                           configuration.

        MULTICAST-TIMER    changes   the   time   period   set   on   the
                           multicast-timer    to    30    seconds.    The
                           multicast-timer  specifies  the  interval   at
                           which  the  host transmits a multicast message
                           announcing host services that are available to
                           LAT terminal servers.

        NUMBER             resets the host identification number to  that
                           specified in n-CONFIG.CMD.

        RETRANSMIT LIMIT   changes to 30 the number of times that  a  LAT
                           host can retransmit unacknowledged messages to
                           the   server.    After   the   last    message
                           transmission,   the  host  detaches  all  jobs
                           associated with the virtual  circuit  to  that
                           server.

        RETRANSMIT TIMER   changes  the   setting   of   the   LAT   host
                           retransmit-timer   to   1000  milliseconds  (1
                           second).  The retransmit-timer  specifies  the
                           amount of time before the host retransmits any
                           unacknowledged  messages   to   the   terminal
                           server.

        SERVICE-NAME text  cancels the service identified by service-name
                           text.   The  CLEAR  SERVICE-NAME  command also
                           clears   all   RATING    and    IDENTIFICATION
                           information associated with service text.

                                                NOTE

                               If   there   is   only   one   service
                               associated  with  a  host,  you cannot
                               CLEAR that service.







                                    4-9
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                  (CLEAR)
                                  (CLEAR)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You no longer wish the host to serve groups 2, 4, 14, 15, 16,
            or 20.

                _____ ______ _________________
            LCP>CLEAR GROUPS 2,4,14:16,20<RET>
            LCP>

        2.  You reset the multicast timer to the default value.

                _____ ____________________
            LCP>CLEAR MULTICAST-TIMER<RET>
            LCP>

        3.  You no longer wish the host to provide the service named
            KLUDGE.

                _____ ____________ ___________
            LCP>CLEAR SERVICE-NAME KLUDGE<RET>
            LCP>



































                                    4-10
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SET)
                                   (SET)


   SET - Setting LAT host parameters
   SET - Setting LAT host parameters




   Function
   Function

        You can  specify  LCP  parameters  with  the  SET  command.   The
        parameters that you can set and the LCP commands to do it are:

         o  Host Id                     SET IDENTIFICATION

         o  Host Number                 SET NUMBER

         o  Maximum Active Circuits     SET MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS

         o  Maximum Sessions            SET MAXIMUM SESSIONS

         o  Retransmit Limit            SET RETRANSMIT LIMIT

         o  Retransmit Timer            SET RETRANSMIT TIMER

         o  Multicast Timer             SET MULTICAST-TIMER

         o  Groups                      SET GROUPS

         o  Service Name(rating)        SET SERVICE-NAME/RATING:

         o  Service Id                  SET SERVICE-NAME /IDENTIFICATION:

        You can clear the current settings for each of  these  parameters
        with the CLEAR command.


   Format
   Format

        LCP>SET keyword argument /switch<RET>

        where keyword, argument, and switch syntax is:

                         _          _                       
                   /    |            | \
           GROUPS / n   |,n1, ....   |  \
                  \ m:n |,m1:n1, ....|  /
                   \    |_          _| /
           IDENTIFICATION "quoted string"
                    /                  \
           MAXIMUM / ACTIVE-CIRCUITS n  \
                   \ SESSIONS n         /
                    \                  /
           MULTICAST-TIMER n


                                    4-11
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SET)
                                   (SET)


           NUMBER n
                       /       \
           RETRANSMIT / LIMIT n \
                      \ TIMER n /
                       \       /                                      
                                      _         _                   _ _
                                     |         |                     | |
           SERVICE-NAME service-name |/RATING: |n                    | |
                                     |         |DYNAMIC              | |
                                     |         |_                   _| |
                                     |/IDENTIFICATION:"quoted string"  |
                                     |_                               _|


   Keywords
   Keywords

        GROUPS n             specifies for the host a group, a  range  of
                             groups,  or  a  list  that  can contain both
                             single  groups  and  group   ranges.    Only
                             terminal servers that have the corresponding
                             groups set can connect to the host.   Groups
                             can  be  integers  from  0  to 255.  You can
                             specify any combination of ranges or  single
                             numbers,  separated  by commas.  Zero is the
                             default.  For example:

                                  SET GROUPS 7:9, 22, 45:49
                                  SET GROUPS 8, 12, 14:17

        IDENTIFICATION "quoted string"

                             specifies host  identification  information.
                             This    host    identification   is   purely
                             descriptive, and is  displayed  when  a  LAT
                             terminal  server  displays information about
                             the host node.  You can specify a string  of
                             up  to  64  characters.  You can include any
                             printable characters.  You must enclose  the
                             string  in  double  quotes (").  This string
                             defaults to the  system  banner  defined  in
                             MONNAM.TXT

        MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS n

                             sets  the  maximum  number  of  LAT  virtual
                             circuits  that  can  exist simultaneously at
                             the host.  MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS can be an
                             integer  between  1 and 173, inclusive.  The
                             default is 20.

        MAXIMUM SESSIONS n   sets  the  maximum  number  of  active   LAT


                                    4-12
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SET)
                                   (SET)


                             terminals  that can be connected to the host
                             at one time.   MAXIMUM SESSIONS  can  be  an
                             integer  between  1  and 50, inclusive.  The
                             default is the maximum number  of  terminals
                             allowed in your system configuration.

        MULTICAST-TIMER n    sets the interval (in seconds) at which  the
                             host  transmits  to  all servers a multicast
                             message announcing  the  services  available
                             from   that   host.    You   can   set   the
                             MULTICAST-TIMER to an integer between 8  and
                             48, inclusive.  The default is 30 seconds.

          NUMBER n           specifies  a  unique   host   identification
                             number.

          RETRANSMIT LIMIT n sets the maximum number of  times  that  the
                             host  retransmits unacknowledged messages to
                             the server.  If the  final  transmission  is
                             not acknowledged, the host detaches all jobs
                             associated with the virtual circuit  to  the
                             server.   The  RETRANSMIT LIMIT  can  be  an
                             integer between 0 and  64,  inclusive.   The
                             default is 60.

          RETRANSMIT TIMER n sets the host retransmit-timer.  This  timer
                             determines    the   amount   of   time   (in
                             milliseconds) before  the  host  retransmits
                             any  unacknowledged  messages to the server.
                             The  RETRANSMIT TIMER  can  be  set  to   an
                             integer  between  100 (.1 second) and 100000
                             (100  seconds).    The   default   is   2000
                             milliseconds (1 second).

          SERVICE-NAME text  specifies that the  host  offers  a  service
                             named  text.   Users  select the name of the
                             service, rather than the name  of  the  host
                             when  they  request the server to initiate a
                             terminal session.  The  SERVICE-NAME  (text)
                             can  be  up  to  16 characters long, and can
                             contain any alphanumeric characters,  dollar
                             sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_).


   Switches
   Switches

                  _     _
                 |       |
        /RATING: |n      |
                 |DYNAMIC|
                 |_     _|


                                    4-13
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SET)
                                   (SET)


                           specifies the rating assigned to the  service.
                           When you select a service name that is used by
                           more  than  one  available  host,  the  server
                           connects  you  to  the  host  with the highest
                           rating.  You can specify n as  an  integer  in
                           the range 0-255, inclusive, or you can specify
                           DYNAMIC.  When you  use  the  SET  command  to
                           specify a service but do not specify a rating,
                           the default rating is zero.

        /IDENTIFICATION: "quoted string"

                           specifies  a  descriptive  phrase  that   will
                           display  when  a  user connects to the service
                           (specified by SERVICE-NAME).  You can  specify
                           a  string  of  up  to  64 characters.  You can
                           include any printable  characters.   You  must
                           enclose the string in double quotes (").


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You wish the host to serve groups 2, 4, 14, 15, 16, and 20.

                ___ ______ _________________
            LCP>SET GROUPS 2,4,14:16,20<RET>
            LCP>

        2.  You set the host to retransmit unacknowledged messages 30
            times.

                ___ ________________ _______
            LCP>SET RETRANSMIT-LIMIT 30<RET>
            LCP>

        3.  You set the identification string for a service named  ALPHA,
            and allow the service-rating to default to DYNAMIC.

                ___ ____________ ______________________________
            LCP>SET SERVICE-NAME ABClustr/IDENTIFICATION:-<RET>
            ______ __ ______________
            "Alpha of ABClustr"<RET>
            LCP>




   SHOW - Displaying LAT Host and Terminal Server Parameters
   SHOW - Displaying LAT Host and Terminal Server Parameters

   The SHOW command displays the following LAT information:

         o  Dynamic and permanent parameters of the LAT host

         o  Active LAT terminal server connections to the LAT host



                                    4-14
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SHOW)
                                   (SHOW)


         o  Server information

         o  Counter information


   Format
   Format

        LCP>SHOW keyword /switch argument<RET>

        Keywords:

             CHARACTERISTICS
             COUNTERS [/SERVER:server-name]
             HOST-INITIATED-REQUESTS
             PENDING-REQUESTS
                     _         _
                    |           |
             SERVER |server-name|
                    |/ALL       |
                    |_         _|
             SESSIONS


   Keywords
   Keywords

        CHARACTERISTICS    displays the dynamic parameters  and  many  of
                           the permanent LAT parameters.

        COUNTERS           displays the counter totals for all servers on
                           the system.

                           To  display  the  counters  for  a  particular
                           server,  use the /SERVER:  switch and supply a
                           server name.

        HOST-INITIATED-REQUESTS

                           displays all the currently active outgoing LAT
                           connections.

        PENDING-REQUESTS   displays all the  currently  pending  outgoing
                           LAT connections.

        SERVER server-name displays information about  the  servers  that
                           have  connected  to  the local LAT host.  SHOW
                           SERVER with no switch displays  a  summary  of
                           server  information including the server name,
                           number  and  Ethernet  address.   SHOW  SERVER
                           followed  by a server name displays additional
                           information   about   the   specified   server
                           including  the  server  location, type, status


                                    4-15
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SHOW)
                                   (SHOW)


                           and timers.

             server-name   specifies the  server  for  which  to  display
                           information.

        SESSIONS           displays information  about  the  current  LAT
                           terminal connections including:

                            o  Job number

                            o  Line number

                            o  Program name

                            o  Server name

                            o  Port name

                            o  User


   Switches
   Switches

        /SERVER: server-name

                           displays counters for  the  specified  server.
                           You  must  specify  a  server  name  with this
                           switch.  Use this switch only  with  the  SHOW
                           COUNTERS command.

             server-name   specifies the  server  for  which  to  display
                           information.

        /ALL               displays   summary   information   about   the
                           specified  server.   Use this switch only with
                           the SHOW SERVER command.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You display the LAT host parameters.

                ____ ____________________
            LCP>SHOW CHARACTERISTICS<RET>
            LCP>
            13:12:44 [LCP]  -- Host Characteristics --

            LAT Access State: ON
            Host Name: CLOYD
            Host id: Cloyd, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20172)
            Host number: 140
            Retransmit Limit: 60


                                    4-16
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SHOW)
                                   (SHOW)


            Retransmit Timer: 1000
            Multicast Timer: 30
            Groups: 3:4,7,10,18,21:23,29,45,47

                                 Current   Maximum
                                 -------   -------
            Allocated circuits      12        32
            Active circuits          9        32
            Sessions                16       128

            Service name   Rating        Identification
            ------------   ------   ------------------------
               CLOYD         1      CLOYD - The toe tag has been removed
               TOPS20        D      Software Engineering Cluster
            LCP>

        2.  You display a list of all LAT terminal sessions connected to
            the host.

                ____ _______ _________
            LCP>SHOW SESSION /ALL<RET>
            LCP>
            13:13:18 [LCP]  -- Active LAT Sessions --

            Job Line Program   Server Name       Port Name     User
            --- ---- ------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------
            140  326 EXEC    LAT95            RASPUZZI_2       RASPUZZI
            141  327 EXEC    LAT96            DAWN_EVANS       EVANS
            134  330 EXEC    LAT1             GREG_SCOTT       GSCOTT
            133  331 EXEC    LAT99            H_MAYBERRY       MAYBERRY
            138  333 EXEC    LAT1             J_DUSSEAULT      DUSSEAULT
            142  334 EXEC    LAT1             D_LOMARTIRE      LOMARTIRE
            144  335 EXEC    LAT1             TIPH_WORLEY      WORLEY
            145  336 MS      LAT1             LAT1_PORT23      GAGNE
            146  337 EXEC    LAT98            JACK_WONG        WONG
            147  340 OPR     LAT97            E_BROWN          EBROWN
            148  341 EMACS   LAT92            RUTH_FONG        FONG
            149  342 EXEC    LAT1             JIM_MCCOLLUM     MCCOLLUM
            151  343 EXEC    LAT308           TSN_IN_308_1     KSTEVENS
            152  345 EXEC    LAT49            DIALIN_49_17     WORLEY
            LCP>

        3.  You display information about LAT terminal server CICERO.

                ____ ______ ___________
            LCP>SHOW SERVER CICERO<RET>
            LCP>
            16:57:39       [LCP] Information about server CICERO 

            Server Number: 6
            Server Location: MRO1-2 Pole J9
            Server Type: Ethernet Terminal Server
            Ethernet Address: AA-00-03-00-01-0E


                                    4-17
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (SHOW)
                                   (SHOW)


            Server Status: Connected
            Max Slots: 33
            Data Link Size: 1514
            Circuit Timer(ms): 80
            Keep-alive Timer(s): 12
            LCP>

        4.  You display the counters for LAT terminal server CICERO.

                ____ ________ ________ ___________
            LCP>SHOW COUNTERS /SERVER: CICERO<RET>
            LCP>
            16:57:00       [LCP] Counters for server CICERO

            Messages received: 1315
            Messages transmitted: 1398
            Messages retransmitted: 0
            Sequence errors received: 0
            Illegal messages received: 0
            Illegal slots received: 0
            Resource failures: 0
            LCP>

        5.  You  display  the  counters  for  all  LAT  terminal  servers
            connected to the host.

                ____ _____________
            LCP>SHOW COUNTERS<RET>
            LCP>
            16:57:13       [LCP] Counter totals for all servers 

            Messages received: 7502
            Messages transmitted: 8167
            Messages retransmitted: 0
            Sequence errors received: 0
            Illegal messages received: 0
            Illegal slots received: 0
            Resource failures: 0
            LCP>
















                                    4-18
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                  (START)
                                  (START)


   START - Making the LAT Host Available
   START - Making the LAT Host Available



   Function
   Function

        The  START  command  notifies  all  servers  that  the  host   is
        available,  and  sets  the  LAT-ACCESS-STATE to ON.  See the STOP
        command for information about restricting  access  to  the  local
        host.


   Format
   Format

        LCP>START<RET>






































                                    4-19
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (STOP)
                                   (STOP)


   STOP - Making the LAT Host Unavailable
   STOP - Making the LAT Host Unavailable


   Function
   Function

        The STOP command terminates all existing  LAT  terminal  sessions
        and  rejects  any  new  connections  from servers.  See the START
        command for information on permitting access to the local host.


   Format
   Format

        LCP>STOP<RET>








































                                    4-20
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                LCP COMMANDS
                                   (ZERO)
                                   (ZERO)


   ZERO - Resetting LAT Counters to Zero
   ZERO - Resetting LAT Counters to Zero



   Function
   Function

        The ZERO COUNTERS command changes specified LAT counters to zero.


   Format
   Format

        LCP>ZERO keyword /switch argument<RET>


   Keyword:

        ZERO [/SERVER: server-name]


   Switch
   Switch

        /SERVER:           sets the counters for a particular  server  to
                           zero.    This   switch  does  not  affect  the
                           counters for the combined server totals.   You
                           must specify a server name with this switch.


             server-name   specifies the server  for  which  to  set  the
                           counters to zero.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You reset all counters to zero.

                ____ _____________
            LCP>ZERO COUNTERS<RET>
            LCP>

        2.  You reset counters for LAT terminal server CICERO to zero.

                ____ ________ ___________________
            LCP>ZERO COUNTERS /SERVER:CICERO<RET>
            LCP>











                                    4-21

























































                                    5-1












                                 CHAPTER 5
                                 CHAPTER 5

                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS



   5.1  INTRODUCTION
   5.1  INTRODUCTION

   The commands in this chapter  must  be  given  with  a  ^E  (<CTRL/E>)
   preceding  the command and these commands can affect the entire system
   or a specific user.  Thus, these commands  are  called  ^E  Privileged
   Commands.

   Because these commands can easily destroy your system security,  their
   usage  is  restricted  to users who have WHEEL or OPERATOR capability.
   WHEEL capability  allows  you  to  execute  all  privileged  commands.
   OPERATOR capability allows you to execute only the privileged commands
   relevant to system operations.

   WHEEL and OPERATOR capabilities can be  granted  when  you  create  or
   change  a  directory.   Normally,  the  user  name OPERATOR, which you
   should be using, has the OPERATOR capability.

   Before you can successfully issue a privileged command, you must  type
   the  ENABLE  command  to  enable  your capabilities.  If you are using
   recognition input, the command is ENABLE (CAPABILITIES).  Once you are
   enabled, the prompt character changes from @ to $.  For example,

         ______ ___________________
        @ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)<RET>
        $

                                    NOTE

           Even if you do not have WHEEL or OPERATOR  capability,
           ENABLE changes the prompt to $.

   Once you are at privileged  command  level,  you  must  type  <CTRL/E>
   before  each  command.   The  <CTRL/E>  prints as ^E on your terminal.
   Then type the remainder of the command.  There are nine (9) privileged
   commands and most of them have subcommands.

   If you do not have the privileges needed to execute the command or you
   have not typed ENABLE, you get the message:


                                    5-1
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS



        ?Unrecognized command

   and your terminal is at operating system command level.

   When  you  complete  a  privileged  command,  disable   your   special
   capabilities  by  typing  DISABLE.  The prompt character changes to @.
   For example,

         ____________
        $DISABLE<RET>
        @

                                    NOTE

           It is very important that you give the DISABLE command
           after  you  use  a privileged command.  This safeguard
           protects you against accidentally damaging part of the
           system.

   In the following sections of  each  privileged  command,  <CTRL/E>  is
   indicated by ^E.  Where you would press the RETURN key is indicated by
   the <RET> symbol.  You can abbreviate a privileged command  by  typing
   as  few  of the beginning characters as are needed to make the command
   unique.  Recognition with  guide  words  is  given  with  the  command
   formats.

   You can easily get a list of all ^E commands by typing ENABLE<RET> AND
   THEN  <CTRL/E>?   (question  mark).   The following is printed on your
   terminal.

         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
        $^E? one of the following:
           CEASE  CREATE    DEFINE    EDDT      PRINT     QUIT      SEND
           SET    SPEAK
        $



   5.2  PRIVILEGED COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
   5.2  PRIVILEGED COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

   The following descriptions of the ^E privileged commands are listed in
   alphabetical order.












                                    5-2
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECEASE)
                                 (^ECEASE)


   ^ECEASE - Scheduling System Shutdown
   ^ECEASE - Scheduling System Shutdown



   Function
   Function

        The ^ECEASE command schedules system shutdown at a specified time
        to end timesharing.


   Format
   Format

        ^ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) downtime (RESUMING AT) uptime


   Arguments
   Arguments

        downtime           NOW
                           TODAY +hh:mm
                           day-of-week +hh:mm
                           +hh:mm
                           date-and-time

                           Legal formats for dates are:

                           FRIDAY
                           6 DEC 79
                           7-APR-79
                           11 JULY 1979
                           24-OCTOBER-1979
                           NOV 26, 79
                           APRIL 30, 1979

                           Other date formats might be accepted; however,
                           they  are  not  recommended  because  of their
                           ambiguity.

                           Legal formats for times are:

                           +1:00                (1 hour from now)
                           day-of-week +8:00    (8 hours after midnight)
                           1630                 (4:30 p.m.)
                           1200                 (noon)
                           116                  (1:16 a.m.)
                           16:30                (4:30 p.m.)
                           00:00                (midnight)
                           1:12:13              (13 seconds after 1:12
                           a.m.)
                           23:59:59             (1 second before
                           midnight)



                                    5-3
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECEASE)
                                 (^ECEASE)


        uptime             date and time given in the same format as  for
                           downtime.  The uptime argument is optional and
                           does not need to be specified.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        After you type the ^ECEASE command and press RETURN,  the  system
        outputs  the name of the system to be shutdown (displayed only if
|       the system is part of a DECnet or INTERNET network) and the  time
        of the scheduled shutdown.  For example:

             BADGER Shutdown scheduled for 4-Apr-84 18:00:00

        If the output is not what you expected, type CTRL/C to abort  the
        command.  Otherwise, confirm the command by pressing RETURN.

        When the command is in effect, downtime and uptime, if specified,
        are  reported to users when they first type CTRL/C or RETURN on a
        terminal.  They receive a message similar to:

             System shutdown scheduled for 22-Apr-84 18:00:00,
             Up again at 22-Apr-84 20:00:00

        When you issue the command,  you  and  users  already  logged  in
        receive one of the following messages.

        If downtime is more than one hour away, the  message  is  similar
        to:

             [System going down at 2-Apr-84 11:30:00]

        If the downtime is 60 or  fewer  minutes  away,  the  message  is
        similar to:

             [System going down in 30 minutes at 2-Apr-84 11:30:00]

        When the downtime is one minute away, the message is:

             [System going down in one minute!!]

        One of the preceding messages is also printed at hourly intervals
        before  downtime  and  30  minutes,  15  minutes,  10  minutes, 5
        minutes, and 1 minute before downtime to indicate how long it  is
        before the actual shutdown.

        In addition, if:

         o  your system is part of a CFS cluster   AND




                                    5-4
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECEASE)
                                 (^ECEASE)


         o  any other system in the cluster has access  to  any  of  your
            disks through the MSCP server   AND

         o  you issue this command  with  downtime  scheduled  within  60
            minutes

        the following message appears on the CTY and on the  terminal  of
        anyone who is running OPR:

             Check other cluster systems for possible structure dismount
             instructions.

        If your system is part of a CFS cluster and another system in the
        cluster  has  access  to your disks as described above, the above
        message also appears on the CTY and on the terminal of anyone who
        is  running OPR at 30 minutes, 15 minutes, 10 minutes, 5 minutes,
                                               _______  __________  _____
        and 1 minute before downtime.  See the TOPS-20  Operator's  Guide
        for more information.

        When downtime is reached, if you specified uptime, a message such
        as the following is printed.

             [System down, up again at 2-Apr-84 12:00:00]

        When downtime occurs, SHUTDOWN COMPLETE is printed  on  the  CTY.
        All jobs are then logged out, except the CTY, so PTYCON continues
        to run.  Processes under  SYSJOB  continue  to  run,  but  PTYCON
        subjobs  are  logged  out.   Then,  no further LOGINs are allowed
        except from the CTY.

        To cancel an existing plan for a shutdown, type ^ECEASE and press
        RETURN.  Then you and all users receive the message:

             [Shutdown cancelled]

        If you do not know the uptime, omit it by pressing  RETURN  after
        (RESUMING AT).  The message output to users before they log in is
        similar to:

             System shutdown scheduled for 2-Apr-84 16:30:00

        The uptime is  only  informational;  it  does  not  initiate  any
        automatic  startup.  To resume timesharing, you should use ^ESEND
        to say that the system is being reloaded, enter the  PARSER  with
        <CTRL/\>, type SHUTDOWN, and reload via a load switch.


   Hints
   Hints

        After giving the command, look at the output message to check the
        dates  and  times.  The output times are based on a 24-hour clock


                                    5-5
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECEASE)
                                 (^ECEASE)


        for example, twelve is  added  to  the  hours  between  noon  and
        midnight.  The times are given as hh:mm:ss, where hh is the hour,
        mm is the minute, and ss is the second.

        If you use AM or PM in the time, do not put a space before either
        of  them.  For example, 6:00 PM causes the error message "INVALID
        DATE FORMAT" explained in the Restrictions  section  below.   You
        must use 6:00PM.

        For the time, you must specify minutes if you are also specifying
        hours,  for  example, for 6p.m.  you must use 6:00PM or 1800.  If
        you use 6PM, it is interpreted as 12:06p.m..

        If you give the command with an incorrect date  or  time,  retype
        the command correctly.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        Error messages associated with the ^ECEASE command are:

        ?Downtime has already passed

             The time you specified for downtime has already gone by.

        ?Downtime cannot be more than 7 days in the future

             You specified a downtime that was too far in the future.

        ?Invalid date format

             You typed an unacceptable date or you typed a  space  before
             AM  or  PM,  which  causes  the  time  specified  not  to be
             recognized as time format.

        ?Invalid time format

             You typed an unacceptable time.

        ?Timesharing will resume before it ends

             You typed an uptime that comes before the downtime.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  By using recognition input and typing ?, you get  the  prompt
            for downtime:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _______ ____________ ___ _
            $^ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) ? Date/time, or NOW for immediately,


                                    5-6
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECEASE)
                                 (^ECEASE)


             or null to cancel shutdown
             or "+" to enter amount of time from now
             or day of the week or TODAY

            Then, if you type ?  for uptime, you get:

            (RESUMING AT) ? Date and time of restart of null if unknown
             or "+" to enter amount of time from now
             or day of the week or TODAY

        2.  To stop timesharing at 6 p.m.  on July 16, 1984, and have  it
            resume at 8 p.m.  the same day:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _______ ____________ ___ __ ___ __ ____ ______
            $^ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) 16 JUL 88 1800 -<RET>
            _________ ___ __ ___ __ _________
            (RESUMING AT) 16 JUL 84 2000<RET>
             GIDNEY Shutdown scheduled for 16-Jul-84 18:00:00
                     _____
            [Confirm]<RET>
            [System going down at 16-Jul-84 18:00:00]
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>

        3.  To stop timesharing at the end of the day July 23,  1984  and
            resume at noon July 24, 1984.

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _______ _________ _______ _________ ____________
            $^ECEASE 24-JUL-84 12:00AM 24-JUL-84 12:00PM<RET>
             BOSTON Shutdown scheduled for 24-Jul-84 00:00:00
                     _____
            [Confirm]<RET>
            [System going down at 24-Jul-84 00:00:00]
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>

        4.  To stop timesharing one hour from the  current  time  without
            knowing when the system resumes timesharing:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _______ __________
            $^ECEASE +1:00<RET>
             Shutdown scheduled for 4-Apr-84 16:30:00
                     _____
            [Confirm]<RET>
            [System going down in 60 minutes at 4-Apr-84 16:30:00]
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>

        5.  To cancel a shutdown:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ____________
            $^ECEASE<RET>
            [Shutdown cancelled]
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @





                                    5-7
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


   ^ECREATE - Creating/Removing Directories
   ^ECREATE - Creating/Removing Directories



   Function
   Function

        The ^ECREATE command is used to:

        1.  Create a directory for a user.

        2.  Create a files-only directory.

        3.  Create a directory on a mountable structure.

        4.  Change the parameters for an existing directory.

        5.  Remove a user from the system.

        6.  Remove a user and his files from the system.


   Format
   Format

        ^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) structure:<directory>

        or

        ^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) structure:<directory>
                                               (PASSWORD) password


   Arguments
   Arguments

        structure:         specifies the 1- to  6-character  alphanumeric
                           name  or  logical  name  for  the structure on
                           which you want to create or alter a directory.
                           You  must  type  a  colon  (:) after the name.
                           Also, you must MOUNT the structure using  this
                           name,  unless  the  structure  is  the  public
                           structure   or   an   unregulated   structure.
                           (Regulated   and  unregulated  structures  are
                           discussed in Chapter 3, in the  SET  STRUCTURE
                           command  description.)  If  you do not specify
                           structure:,  you  can  create   or   alter   a
                           directory    on    your    currently-connected
                           structure.  If you have  not  connected  to  a
                           specific   structure,  you  are  connected  by
                           default to the public structure.  Note that  a
                           user  must  have  a  directory  on  the public
                           structure to be able to log in.



                                    5-8
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


        <directory>        specifies the name of the directory  that  you
                           want  to create or alter.  The name is 1 to 39
                           alphanumeric  characters,  including  hyphens,
                           underlines, and dollar signs.  Angle or square
                           brackets must enclose the name.  This name  is
                           used  when  a  user  tries  to  log  in to the
                           system,  connect  to  a  directory,  access  a
                           directory,  or  change  directory  parameters.
                           You can use recognition on this  name  if  the
                           directory already exists.

        password           specifies 1 to 39 letters, digits, or hyphens.
                           You  can omit the password here and specify it
                           later in  a  subcommand.   You  can  omit  the
                           password    completely    for   a   files-only
                           directory.  The password is used when  a  user
                           tries  to  log  in to the system, connect to a
                           directory,  access  a  directory,  or   change
                           directory parameters.

   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        To create a directory on a structure, the directory name  in  the
        ^ECREATE  command  must  be different from any existing directory
        name on the structure and must be enclosed in angle brackets.  If
        the  directory name contains one or more periods (.), for example
        <T.YOW>, the directory is a subdirectory.  Before you can  create
        a  subdirectory, you must first create its superior directory, in
        this case <T>.  You can determine the superior  directory  for  a
        subdirectory   by   using   the  name  of  the  subdirectory  and
        eliminating the last period (.) and the characters after it.  For
        example,  the  superior  directory for <FP.BONS> is <FP>, and the
        superior directory for <R.ACE.LT.MEM> is <R.ACE.LT>.

        After you type the ^ECREATE command using either format and press
        RETURN, the system outputs [NEW] or [OLD] on the next line and $$
        on the following line.  Be sure you check this output.  If  [NEW]
        is  printed,  you are creating a directory.  If [OLD] is printed,
        you are altering an existing directory.  If  the  output  is  not
        what  you  expected,  type  ABORT<RET>  and  retype  the ^ECREATE
        command.  The $$ (double-dollar-signs)  indicates  that  you  can
        give  a  subcommand  or  press RETURN to finish the command.  The
        ^ECREATE subcommands are  described  under  Subcommands  in  this
        section.

        If  you  are  creating  a  directory  and  you  press  RETURN  at
        subcommand  level  without  giving  any subcommands, you create a
        directory with default parameters.  (Refer to Table 5-1  in  this
        section for the default parameters.)

        For example, using recognition input,


                                    5-9
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


              ________                  __________
             $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TES><RET>
             [New]
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        or simply

              ________ __________
             $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
             [New]
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        If you use the second format of the ^ECREATE command (see  Format
        section  below),  to  create  a directory and you press RETURN at
        subcommand level without giving any  subcommands,  you  create  a
        directory with default parameters except for the password.

        For example,

              ________                  _____            ________
             $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TES> (PASSWORD) XAP<RET>
             [New]
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        or simply

              ________ _____ ________
             $^ECREATE <TES> XAP<RET>
             [New]
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        To change the password for an existing  directory,  you  can  use
        either ^ECREATE command format.  However, one format requires the
        PASSWORD subcommand.  For example,

              ________ ___________            __________
             $^ECREATE SQM:<HOGAN> (PASSWORD) JOHNQ<RET>
             [Old]
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        or

              ________ ________________
             $^ECREATE SQM:<HOGAN><RET>
             [Old]
               ________ __________
             $$PASSWORD JOHNQ<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        Also, see Hint under PASSWORD subcommand,  described  later,  for
        another way of changing a password.



                                    5-10
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


   Subcommands
   Subcommands

        To create a directory with some nondefault parameters or to alter
        some directory parameters of an existing directory, you must give
        the appropriate  subcommands  to  ^ECREATE.   You  can  list  the
        subcommands  available  with  ^ECREATE  by  typing a ?  (question
        mark) at subcommand level.

         ________ _____________
        $^ECREATE <SAMPLE><RET>
        [New]
          _
        $$? confirm with carriage return
          or one of the following:
|        ABORT                            ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
         ACCOUNT-DEFAULT                  ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
         CONFIDENTIAL                     DECNET-ACCESS
         DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION          DIRECTORY-GROUP
         DISABLE                          ENABLE
         ENQ-DEQ                          FILES-ONLY
|        GENERATIONS                      INTERNET-ACCESS
|        INTERNET-WIZARD                  IPCF
         KILL                             LIST
         MAINTENANCE                      MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES
         NOT                              NUMBER
         OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT       ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT
         OPERATOR                         PASSWORD
         PERMANENT                        PRESERVE
         PROTECTION                       PUSH
         REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES            SEMI-OPERATOR
         SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP          TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER...
         USER-OF-GROUP                    WHEEL
         WORKING
        $$





















                                    5-11
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


   Table 5-1:  Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands
   Table 5-1:  Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands

   _____________________________________________________________________

   Subcommand                         Default   Help Text
   _____________________________________________________________________

   ABORT                               -        <RET>(1)
|  ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS          NOT       <RET>
      (CAPABILITY)
   ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN)        NONE SET  DEFAULT ACCOUNT
                                                FOR USERS LOGGING
                                                INTO THIS DIRECTORY
   ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES       NOT       <RET>
   CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION
        ACCESS CAPABILITY)            NOT       <RET>
   DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)         NOT       <RET>
   DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION
        (NUMBER)                      777700    6-DIGIT OCTAL NUMBER
   DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER)           NONE SET  DECIMAL GROUP NUMBER
   DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)             ENABLE    <RET>
   ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)              ENABLE    <RET>
   ENQ-DEQ (CAPABILITY)               NOT       <RET>
   FILES-ONLY                         NOT       <RET>
   GENERATIONS (TO KEEP)              1         DECIMAL NUMBER OF
                                                GENERATIONS TO
                                                RETAIN PER FILE
|  INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)       NOT       <RET>
|  INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)       NOT       <RET>
   IPCF (CAPABILITY)                  NOT       <RET>
   KILL (THIS DIRECTORY)               -        <RET>
   LIST                                -        ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
                                                FAST NAME-ONLY VERBOSE
   MAINTENANCE (CAPABILITY)           NOT            
   MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES             NONE SET  DECIMAL NUMBER OF
        (ALLOWED)                               SUBDIRECTORIES ALLOWED
                                                UNDER THIS DIRECTORY
   NOT                                 -        ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
                                                ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS
                                                ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED...
                                                ARPANET-ACCESS
                                                ARPANET-WIZARD
                                                CONFIDENTIAL
                                                DECNET-ACCESS
                                                DIRECTORY-GROUP
                                                ENQ-DEQ
                                                FILES-ONLY
                                                IPCF
                                                KILL

   (1) <RET> in this column means to press the RETURN key.


                                    5-12
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


   Table 5-1 (Cont.) Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands
   Table 5-1 (Cont.) Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands

   _____________________________________________________________________

   Subcommand                         Default   Help Text
   _____________________________________________________________________

                                                MAINTENANCE
                                                OPERATOR
                                                REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
                                                SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP
                                                USER-GROUP
                                                WHEEL
   NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY)              FREE ONE  OCTAL DIRECTORY NUMBER
   OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT         90        EXPIRATION DATE OR "+n"
   ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT          60        EXPIRATION DATE OR "+n"
   OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)              NOT       <RET>
   PASSWORD                           NONE SET  1 TO 39 ALPHANUMERIC
                                                CHARACTERS OR HYPHENS
   PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE
        PAGE LIMIT)                   250       DECIMAL NUMBER OF PAGES
                                                OR INFINITY
   PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)                   <RET>
   PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY)          777700    6-DIGIT OCTAL NUMBER
   PUSH                                -        <RET>
   REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES              NOT       <RET>
   SEMI-OPERATOR                      NOT       <RET>
   SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP
        (ALLOWED)                     NONE SET  DECIMAL GROUP NUMBER
   TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER   NONE SET  OCTAL NUMBER IN RANGE
        (FOR COMPATIBILITY)                     10-377777, 6-DIGIT
                                                OCTAL NUMBER
   USER-OF-GROUP (NUMBER)             NONE SET  DECIMAL GROUP NUMBER
   WHEEL (CAPABILITY)                 NOT       <RET>
   WORKING (DISK STORAGE
      PAGE LIMIT)                     250       DECIMAL NUMBER OF PAGES
                                                OR INFINITY
   ____________________________________________________________________


   Subcommand Characteristics
   Subcommand Characteristics

        When you give a subcommand, you need to type only  the  beginning
        characters  up  to the point that the abbreviation is unique.  If
        you want to see the guide words, press the ESCape key  after  you
        give  the  subcommand  or its abbreviation.  You can also see the
        help text for the argument by typing ?  (question mark) in  place
        of  the argument.  After the help text is printed, the subcommand
        is repeated up to the argument.  At any point before you end  the
        subcommand, you can delete the subcommand line by typing CTRL/U.



                                    5-13
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


        To end the subcommand, press  RETURN  or  LINE  FEED.   When  you
        finish  giving subcommands to alter, kill, or create a directory,
        you must type an extra RETURN or LINE FEED for confirmation.

        For the system to ignore the  creation  of  a  directory  or  any
        changes  to  an  old  directory  since  the last ^ECREATE, type a
        CTRL/C any time during the ^ECREATE, or type ABORT at  subcommand
        level, instead or waiting to give the final RETURN or LINE FEED.

                                      NOTE

                Remember that you need to use a  subcommand  only
                if you want to assign a nondefault value when you
                are creating a directory or if you want to change
                any  value  for  an  existing directory.  See the
                Subcommands  Table  for  a  list   of   all   the
                subcommands  and  their  defaults.   You can also
                print the defaults on your terminal by giving the
                LIST  subcommand  to  ^ECREATE before you specify
                any  other  subcommands  (or  you  can  use   the
                INFORMATION  DIRECTORY command at TOPS-20 command
                level).

                If  you  change  a  directory  parameter  for   a
                logged-in  user  and  the user complains that the
                change has not occurred, tell the user to log out
                and  log  in again.  Some directory parameters do
                not take effect until a user logs in.

        The  ^ECREATE  subcommands  and  their  guide  words,  functions,
        arguments,  and  defaults  are given on the following pages.  The
        discussion of a subcommand also contains the explanation  of  any
        corresponding negative function.

        ABORT
        ABORT

             This  subcommand  returns  you  to  system   command   level
             immediately.   It is equivalent to typing CTRL/C at any time
             before you give the final <RET> to the ^ECREATE command.  As
             a  result, the system ignores the creation of a directory or
             any changes to an old  directory  since  the  last  ^ECREATE
             command was given.

                                 ----- Example -----

             If you give an incorrect name, you can simply abort and type
             ^ECREATE again with the correct name.

              ________                  ______________
             $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TESTING><RET>
             [New]
               __________
             $$ABORT<RET>


                                    5-14
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


              ________                  ___________________
             $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) FORT:<TESTING><RET>
             [Old]
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS (CAPABILITY)
|       ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS (CAPABILITY)
|  
|            This subcommand grants a user the ABSOLUTE INTERNET  SOCKETS
             capability.   This  capability  allows  a  user  to  specify
|            absolute socket numbers in a certain privileged monitor call
|            on a system running TCP/IP.

             Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
             can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
             break system security.

|            NOT  ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS,  which   is   the   default,
             withholds this capability from the user.

                                 ----- Example -----

|            To  give  a  TCP/IP  user  the  ABSOLUTE  INTERNET   SOCKETS
|            capability:

              ________ _____________
             $^ECREATE <CIRINO><RET>
             [New]
               _________________________             _____
|            $$ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS (CAPABILITY)<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) account
        ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) account

             This subcommand specifies  the  default  account  for  users
             logging  into this directory.  A user with a default account
             can press RETURN for the account in the LOGIN  command  when
             logging  into  this  directory, and the account specified in
             this subcommand is used.

             If this subcommand is not given, no default account is  set.
             To eliminate a default account, give this subcommand without
             an  argument.   To  change  a  default  account,  give  this
             subcommand with the new default account as the argument.  At
             some installations,  a  user  can  also  change  an  account
             default with the command SET DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             You  can   also   use   ENABLE   and   the   SET   DIRECTORY
             ACCOUNT-DEFAULT command to change the default account.  When
             you  have  OPERATOR  capability  enabled,  you  can  type  a
             fictitious password in the command.


                                    5-15
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                                 ----- Example -----

             If  user  J.SMITH  wants   his   default   account   to   be
             PAYROLL.TEST, type the following:

              ________ ______________
             $^ECREATE <J.SMITH><RET>
             [Old]
               _______________             _________________
             $$ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) PAYROLL.TEST<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
        ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

             This subcommand specifies that expired disk files are to  be
             automatically  marked for archiving.  The TOPS-20 Operator's
             Guide discusses archiving.

             NOT  ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES,  which  is  the  default,
             causes  all  files  in  the  directory to remain on the disk
             regardless of the expiration date.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To ensure that user GORE's  files  are  archived  some  time
             after  the  expiration  date  is reached, give the following
             command:

              ________ ___________
             $^ECREATE <GORE><RET>
             [Old]
               _________________________________
             $$ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)
        CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand grants a user the  confidential  information
             access  capability.  This capability lets a user obtain some
             confidential  information  within  the  system  via  certain
             monitor calls.

             Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
             can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
             break system security.

             NOT CONFIDENTIAL,  which  is  the  default,  withholds  this
             capability from the user.

                                 ----- Example -----

             If you need to give  a  user  the  confidential  information
             access capability, give the CONFIDENTIAL subcommand.


                                    5-16
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


              ________                  ___________
             $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TESS><RET>
             [New]
               ____________                                _____
             $$CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)
        DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand, in conjunction with pre-established  system
             manager  controls, grants a user the capability to establish
             DECnet network connections.  Note that this is  the  default
             in the absence of system manager controls.

             NOT DECNET-ACCESS denies access to the network.  This is the
             default  if  the  system  manager has exercised control over
             network access.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To enable access to the DECnet network, type the following:

              ________ ____________
             $^ECREATE <CURRY><RET>
             [Old]
               _____________             _____
             $$DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION (NUMBER) 6-digit octal number
        DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION (NUMBER) 6-digit octal number

             This subcommand specifies the default file-access protection
             for   files   within  this  directory.   (You  can  find  an
             explanation of file-access protection in the TOPS-20  User's
             Guide.)  The  argument  for  this command is a 6-digit octal
             number.  If you do not  use  this  subcommand,  the  default
             protection is 777700.

             To change  the  default  file  protection  for  an  existing
             directory,  give this subcommand with the new protection.  A
             user can also change  this  default  with  the  command  SET
             DIRECTORY FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT.

             Do not  confuse  this  value  with  the  protection  of  the
             directory,  which  is set with the PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY)
             subcommand.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             You  can   also   use   ENABLE   and   the   SET   DIRECTORY
             FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT  command  to change the default file
             protection.  When you have OPERATOR capability enabled,  you
             can type a fictitious password in the command.


                                    5-17
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                                 ----- Example -----

             To make the default file protection 775252 for user TES:

              ________ __________
             $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
             [New]
               _______________________ ___________
             $$DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION 775252<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number
        DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number

             This subcommand specifies a group number  for  a  directory.
             If  the group number is n, users in group n have group-level
             access to this directory.  (See the subcommand USER-OF-GROUP
             to  put  a  user  into  a  group.) The group-level access is
             determined by the  directory-  and  file-access  protection.
             (Refer  to  the  TOPS-20  User's Guide for an explanation of
             access protection.)

             The argument is a decimal number from 1 to 262143 (2**18-1).
             Because  you  can  specify only one number for the argument,
             you must repeat  the  subcommand  for  each  group  that  is
             allowed  to  access  the  files  in  the directory.  You can
             specify a maximum  of  40  different  group  numbers  for  a
             directory.

             NOT DIRECTORY prevents the directory from being accessed  at
             the group level by users in that group.  Because a directory
             does not belong to any group by default,  NOT  DIRECTORY  is
             needed  to  prohibit group access only if DIRECTORY had been
             given for that group.  You must repeat  the  subcommand  for
             each group for which you want access prohibited.

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  To make a directory accessible to groups 4 and 9:

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <WHITE><RET>
                 [New]
                   _______________          ______
                 $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 4<RET>
                   _______________          ______
                 $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 9<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

             2.  If you want to create a directory of library subroutines
                 called  <LIBRARY>, which is accessible to users in group
                 6, give the  subcommand  DIRECTORY  6  when  you  create
                 <LIBRARY>.

                  ________ ______________
                 $^ECREATE <LIBRARY><RET>


                                    5-18
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                 [New]
                   _______________          ______
                 $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 6<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

                 Then, to allow a user to access  the  library,  put  the
                 user in user group 6 (see USER subcommand).

                  ________        ____________
                 $^ECREATE (NAME) <ROSEN><RET>
                 [Old]
                   __________          ______
                 $$USER-GROUP (NUMBER) 6<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

        DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)
        DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)

             This subcommand disables any capabilities that you may  have
             activated  with  the ENABLE subcommand or the ENABLE TOPS-20
             command.

        ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)
        ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)

             This  subcommand  allows  you  to  activate  any  privileged
             capabilities  that the system manager has given you and that
             you may need during  the  ^ECREATE  session.   This  is  the
             default setting.

        ENQ-DEQ (CAPABILITY)
        ENQ-DEQ (CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand gives a  user  the  ability  to  do  certain
             ENQUEUE and DEQUEUE functions.

             Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
             can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
             break system security.

             NOT ENQ-DEQ, which is the default,  withholds  this  ability
             from a user.

                                 ----- Example -----

              ________ _____________
             $^ECREATE <UPDATE><RET>
             [New]
               ____________
             $$ENQ-DEQ<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        FILES-ONLY
        FILES-ONLY

             This subcommand makes the directory simply a  storage  place
             for  files.  A user cannot give the LOGIN or ACCESS commands
             for this directory.  A user can  gain  owner  privileges  to
             this   directory   by   giving  the  CONNECT  command.   The
                                    5-19
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             subdirectories of a FILES-ONLY directory must be FILES-ONLY.
             A FILES-ONLY directory cannot receive mail.

             NOT FILES-ONLY, which is the default, allows a user to  give
             the LOGIN and ACCESS commands for the directory.

             If  a  FILES-ONLY  directory  does  not  have  a   password,
             connecting  to  it  depends on directory protection and user
             groups.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             To temporarily disable a user from logging in and leave  his
             files  intact,  simply make his directory FILES-ONLY.  Then,
             to restore his log-in  privilege,  make  his  directory  NOT
             FILES-ONLY.   This  method  does not change any of the other
             directory parameters.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To  make  the  directory   <LIBRARY>   on   structure   FORT
             FILES-ONLY:

              ________ ___________________
             $^ECREATE FORT:<LIBRARY><RET>
             [New]
               _______________
             $$FILES-ONLY<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        GENERATIONS (TO KEEP) decimal number
        GENERATIONS (TO KEEP) decimal number

             This specifies the default number of generations that a file
             can  have in this directory.  The argument must be a decimal
             number from 0 to 63, where 0 means an infinite number.   The
             default  is  1.   Currently,  it  is  advisable  to use this
             default to limit disk usage.

             To change  the  number  of  default  generations,  use  this
             subcommand and specify a new number.  At some installations,
             a user can also change this default  with  the  command  SET
             DIRECTORY GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             You  can   also   use   ENABLE   and   the   SET   DIRECTORY
             GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT  command  to  change  the
             default number  of  generations  to  keep.   When  you  have
             OPERATOR  capability  enabled,  you  can  type  a fictitious
             password in the command.

                                 ----- Example -----


                                    5-20
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             To allow a user two generations of a file by default:

              ________                  ____________
             $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TRESS><RET>
             [New]
               ___________           ______
             $$GENERATIONS (TO KEEP) 2<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)
|       INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand, in conjunction with pre-established  system
             manager  controls, grants a user the capability to establish
|            INTERNET network connections.  Note that this is the default
             in the absence of system manager controls.

|            NOT INTERNET-ACCESS denies access to the network.   This  is
             the default if the system manager has exercised control over
             network access.

                                 ----- Example -----

|            To  enable  access  to  the  INTERNET  network,   type   the
|            following:

              ________ ______________
             $^ECREATE <SIMMONS><RET>
             [Old]
               _______________             _____
|            $$INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)
|       INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)
|  
|            This  subcommand  grants  a   user   the   INTERNET   WIZARD
             capability.   This  capability  allows  a  user  to  execute
|            certain privileged monitor calls on a system running TCP/IP.

             Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
             can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
             break system security.

|            NOT INTERNET-WIZARD, which is the  default,  withholds  this
             capability from the user.

                                 ----- Example -----
|  
|            To give a TCP/IP user the INTERNET WIZARD capability:

              ________ ________________
             $^ECREATE <CROSSLAND><RET>
             [New]
               _______________             _____
|            $$INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>


                                    5-21
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             $

        IPCF (CAPABILITY)
        IPCF (CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand grants a user the  capability  of  executing
             all privileged IPCF functions.

             Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
             can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
             break system security.

             NOT IPCF, which is the default,  withholds  this  capability
             from the user.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To give a user the IPCF capability:

              ________ ___________________
             $^ECREATE <COMMUNICATOR><RET>
             [New]
               _________
             $$IPCF<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        KILL (THIS DIRECTORY)
        KILL (THIS DIRECTORY)

             This subcommand allows you to eliminate a directory from the
             system.   After  you  give  the subcommand, you are asked to
             [CONFIRM].  [CONFIRM] warns you that KILL also  deletes  all
             the  files  in the directory.  At this time be sure that you
             typed the correct directory.  If you did not, type CTRL/C to
             abort  immediately.   If  it  is  the right directory, press
             RETURN  after  [CONFIRM].   When  you  get   the   next   $$
             (double-dollar-signs),  you  can  continue  with the KILL by
             pressing RETURN again or cancel the KILL by typing NOT KILL.

             NOT KILL, which is the default, cancels  a  KILL  subcommand
             when it is given before the ^ECREATE command is completed.

                                  ----- Hints -----

             Do not kill a directory  that  is  logged  in,  because  the
             system  is  not  able  to  use  that user's job number until
             TOPS-20 is reloaded.  If you must kill that  directory,  log
             out the user first and then kill the directory.

             When you kill a directory, you lose all  the  files  in  the
             directory.

             If you try to kill a directory and get:



                                    5-22
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                  ?Directory file is mapped

             the directory is being used.  You cannot kill the  directory
             until it is not in use.

             If you try to kill a directory and get:

                  ?Internal format of directory is incorrect

                             _______  __________  _____
             refer  to  the  TOPS-20  Operator's  Guide  to  delete   the
             directory.

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  To eliminate the user ALPHONSE from the system:

                  ________ __________________
                 $^ECREATE PS:<ALPHONSE><RET>
                 [Old]
                   _________
                 $$KILL<RET>
                 [Confirm]<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

             2.  To prevent killing a directory when  you  discover  that
                 you typed the wrong name:

                  ________ ________________
                 $^ECREATE <ROSENBURG><RET>
                 [Old]
                   _________
                 $$KILL<RET>
                 [CONFIRM]^C
                           ^
                           |
                        <CTRL/C>
                 $

        LIST argument
        LIST argument

             This subcommand lets you  check  the  directory  parameters.
             Consequently,  it  helps  to use it before you terminate the
             ^ECREATE command, so you can make any necessary changes.

             The acceptable arguments are FAST, NAME-ONLY,  and  VERBOSE.
             If no argument is typed, FAST is assumed.

                                ----- Arguments -----

             If you type LIST FAST or LIST<RET>, the output  is  a  short
             list  equivalent  to  the  output  from the ^EPRINT command.
             Items not listed have default values.

             If you type LIST NAME-ONLY, the output gives the name of the


                                    5-23
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             directory  that  you  specified  after the ^ECREATE command.
             This is equivalent to the output from  the  ^EPRINT  command
             with the NAME-ONLY subcommand.

             If  you  type  LIST  VERBOSE,  the  output  lists  all   the
|            parameters  except  PASSWORD, NOT ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS,
|            and NOT INTERNET-WIZARD.  This is equivalent to  the  output
             from  the  ^EPRINT  command  with  the  VERBOSE  subcommand,
             providing the directory was previously completed.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             If you typed KILL as a subcommand, the LIST output is simply
             KILLED.  For example,

                    _________
                  $$KILL<RET>
                  [Confirm]<RET>
                    _________
                  $$LIST<RET>
                   Killed
                  $$

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  To get a brief list of parameters for <SMITH>:

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <SMITH><RET>
                 [Old]
                   _________
                 $$LIST<RET>
                  Name <SMITH>
                  Working disk storage page limit 800
                  Permanent disk storage page limit 600
                  WHEEL
                  Number of directory 142
                  Account default for LOGIN BASIC
|                 Last interactive login 10-AUG-83 07:58:28
|                 Last non-interactive login Never
                  TOPS10 project-programmer number 27-5434

                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

             2.  To get a complete list of  parameters  for  <SMITH>  and
                 increase  the  permanent  disk storage page limit by 200
                 pages:

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <SMITH><RET>
                 [Old]
                   ____ ____________
                 $$LIST VERBOSE<RET>
                  Name <SMITH>
                  Working disk storage page limit 800
                  Permanent disk storage page limit 400


                                    5-24
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                  WHEEL
                  not OPERATOR
                  not CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
                  not MAINTENANCE
                  not IPCF
                  not ENQ-DEQ
                  not SEMI-OPERATOR
                  not FILES-ONLY
|                 SECURE
                  Number of directory 142
                  Default file protection 777700
                  Account default for LOGIN BASIC
                  Protection of directory 777700
                  Generations to keep 1
                  Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|                 Last interactive login 10-Jun-90 07:58:28
|                 Last non-interactive login Never
|                 Password expiration date is 1-Jul-90 15:41:37
|                 No interactive login failures
|                 No non-interactive login failures
                  User of groups - none set
                  Directory groups - none set
                  Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
                  Online expiration default 60 days
                  Offline expiration default 90 days
                  TOPS10 project-programmer number 27-5434

                   _________                           ________
                 $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 600<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $


             3.  To list just the name of the directory.

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <SMITH><RET>
                 [Old]
                   ____ ______________
                 $$LIST NAME-ONLY<RET>
                  NAME <SMITH>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

        MAINTENANCE (CAPABILITY)
        MAINTENANCE (CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand grants a user  the  MAINTENANCE  capability.
             It  allows  the  user  to execute certain system maintenance
             functions.

             Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
             can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
             break system security.



                                    5-25
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             NOT  MAINTENANCE,  which  is  the  default,  withholds  this
             capability from the user.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To  give  the  field  service  directory   the   MAINTENANCE
             capability:

              ________ ____________________
             $^ECREATE <FIELD-SERVICE><RET>
             [New]
               ________________
             $$MAINTENANCE<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @

        MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES (ALLOWED) decimal number
        MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES (ALLOWED) decimal number

             This subcommand specifies a limit for the sum of the  number
             of  subdirectories  that can be created in the directory and
             the number of subdirectories that can currently be delegated
             to subdirectories in the directory.  The limit can be from 0
             to 262143.

             A number of subdirectories is delegated when the  value  for
             MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES  is  specified  for a subdirectory in
             the directory.   After  subdirectories  are  delegated,  the
             value  for  MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES in the superior directory
             is automatically decremented by the number delegated.

             The default value is zero.  You can  change  the  value  for
             this parameter by giving the subcommand with a new value.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To let user WIZARD create two subdirectories and allow those
             subdirectories to create a total of four subdirectories:

              ________ _____________
             $^ECREATE <WIZARD><RET>
             [Old]
               ______________________           ______
             $$MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES (ALLOWED) 4<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @

        NOT subcommand
        NOT subcommand

             The NOT must be followed by one of the following
             subcommands:

|                 ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
                  ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES


                                    5-26
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                  CONFIDENTIAL
                  DECNET-ACCESS
                  DIRECTORY-GROUP
                  ENQ-DEQ
                  FILES-ONLY
|                 INTERNET-ACCESS
|                 INTERNET-WIZARD
                  IPCF
                  KILL
                  MAINTENANCE
                  OPERATOR
                  REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
                  SEMI-OPERATOR
                  SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP
                  TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER
                  USER-OF-GROUP
                  WHEEL

             The function for NOT  subcommand  is  discussed  under  each
             subcommand,  for  example, NOT USER-GROUP is described under
             the subcommand USER-GROUP.

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  To take away the ENQ-DEQ capability from JONES:

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <JONES><RET>
                 [Old]
                   ___ ____________
                 $$NOT ENQ-DEQ<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

             2.  To prohibit the directory <GAMES> on structure FUN  from
                 being  accessed  by  users in group 9 when the directory
                 protection does not allow all users to access <GAMES>:

                  ________ ________________
                 $^ECREATE FUN:<GAMES><RET>
                 [Old]
                   ___ _______________ ______
                 $$NOT DIRECTORY-GROUP 9<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

        NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY) octal directory number
        NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY) octal directory number

             This subcommand allows you to  assign  an  unused  directory
             number  to  the directory that you are creating.  The number
             must be octal.  Certain programs use  a  specific  directory
             number.   Also,  directory numbers 1 through 17 are reserved
             for use by DIGITAL.  Currently, <ROOT-DIRECTORY>,  <SYSTEM>,


                                    5-27
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             <SUBSYS>,  <ACCOUNTS>,  <OPERATOR>,  and  <SPOOL>  must have
             directory numbers 1 to 6, respectively.

             If you do not use  this  subcommand,  a  default  number  is
             chosen by TOPS-20.  You should always use the default number
             unless the directory must have a specific number.

             While creating a new directory, you can change  a  directory
             number  you specified by repeating the subcommand with a new
             number or by giving the  subcommand  NUMBER  0  to  get  the
             default.  However, once you create the directory, you cannot
             change this number.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To re-create  the  directory  <OPERATOR>,  which  must  have
             directory number 5:

              ________ _______________
             $^ECREATE <OPERATOR><RET>
             [New]
               ______                ______
             $$NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY) 5<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS)
        OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) date or +n

             This subcommand establishes the  tape  expiration  date  for
             files  in  your directory that are to go off line because of
             migration or archiving.  To generate a relative  date,  give
             the  "+n"  argument,  where  n represents the number of days
             from the removal date.

             After issuing this subcommand, you  may  receive  the  error
             message:

                  ?Offline expiration time cannot exceed system maximum.

             In this situation, you have requested a longer  interval  of
             time than that established by the system manager.  Issue the
             INFORMATION (ABOUT) SYSTEM-STATUS command to learn what  the
             system  default  is.   (Refer to the description of the PUSH
             subcommand, below, for information on entering  and  exiting
             from TOPS-20 command level during the ^ECREATE session.)

                                 ----- Example -----

             To indicate that all off-line files  can  be  expunged  from
             tape  two  months after the removal date, give the following
             command:

              ________ _______________
             $^ECREATE <ANDERSON><RET>
             [New]
               __________________________      ________
             $$OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) +60<RET>
                                    5-28
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS)
        ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) date or +n

             This subcommand establishes the  expiration  date  for  disk
             files  that  are  to  be  created  in  the  directory.  Upon
             expiration, the  files  will  be  automatically  marked  for
             archiving     if     you     previously     specified    the
             ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES  subcommand.   To  indicate   a
             relative  date,  give  the "+n" argument, where n represents
             the number of days from the creation date.

                                 ----- Example -----

             If user HILL wants all newly  created  files  to  expire  on
             Labor Day, issue the following:

              ________                  ___________
             $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <HILL><RET>
             [New]
               _________________________      _____________
             $$ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) 6-SEP-82<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)
        OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand  grants  a  user  the  OPERATOR  capability.
             Normally,   it   is   given   to  the  operator's  directory
             <OPERATOR>.

             NOT OPERATOR, which is the default, withholds the capability
             from a user.

             SEMI-OPERATOR  capability  is  a  subset  of  the   OPERATOR
             capability (see SEMI-OPERATOR).

                                 ----- Example -----

             To give <2-OPERATOR> the OPERATOR capability:

              ________ _________________
             $^ECREATE <2-OPERATOR><RET>
             [New]
               _____________
             $$OPERATOR<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @

        PASSWORD 1 to 39 alphanumeric characters or hyphens
        PASSWORD 1 to 39 alphanumeric characters or hyphens

             This subcommand specifies the password for the directory.  A
             user must give his correct password to log in to the system.
             The identifier may be 1 to 39 letters, digits, or hyphens.

                                    5-29
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             If this subcommand is not given  and  the  password  is  not
             specified  on the same line as ^ECREATE, no password is set.
             To eliminate a password, give  this  subcommand  without  an
             argument.

             You  can  change  an  existing  password  by   giving   this
             subcommand  with the new password.  At some installations, a
             user can  also  change  a  password  with  the  command  SET
             DIRECTORY PASSWORD.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             You can also ENABLE your WHEEL  or  OPERATOR  capability  to
             change the password with the SET DIRECTORY PASSWORD command.
             This method  has  the  advantage  of  not  echoing  the  new
             password.

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  To change a user's password to NEW-ONE:

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <JONES><RET>
                 [Old]
                   ________ ____________
                 $$PASSWORD NEW-ONE<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

             2.  To create a new directory named ELLIS with a password of
                 JOAN:

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <ELLIS><RET>
                 [New]
                   ________ _________
                 $$PASSWORD JOAN<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

        PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument
        PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument

             This subcommand specifies the limit of the sum of disk space
             that  the  directory  can have for permanent storage and the
             disk space that can be delegated to  subdirectories  in  the
             directory for permanent storage.

             Disk space for permanent storage is delegated when the value
             for  PERMANENT  is  specified  for  a  subdirectory  in  the
             directory.  After permanent storage is delegated, the  value
             for  PERMANENT  in  the  superior directory is automatically
             decremented by the amount delegated.



                                    5-30
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             You should make permanent storage  less  than  or  equal  to
             working   storage.   You  can  change  the  value  for  this
             parameter by giving the subcommand with a new value.

             The arguments are the number of pages or INFINITY.

                                ----- Arguments -----

             The number of pages argument is a  decimal  number  where  a
             page is 512 36-bit words.  The default value is 250 pages.

             The INFINITY argument allocates an unlimited number of pages
             to  the  directory.   The  permanent storage of the superior
             directory must also be INFINITY.  The number of  pages  that
             can  be  used  by  the user is limited to the number of free
             pages on the  structure.   This  argument  is  intended  for
             special  system  directories; it is not intended for general
             users.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To give user FOX 200 pages of permanent storage:

              ________ __________
             $^ECREATE <FOX><RET>
             [NEW]
               _________                           ________
             $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 200<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @

        PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)
        PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)

             This  subcommand  preserves  the  values  of  the   superior
             directory's  PERMANENT,  WORKING  and MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES
             parameters.  Normally, when you create a  subdirectory,  the
             PERMANENT,  WORKING,  and MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES subcommands
             subtract equal values from the permanent superior directory.
             The  PRESERVE  subcommand,  when  used  with  the PERMANENT,
             WORKING, and MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES subcommands, stops  this
             subtraction.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             This subcommand allows you to create a subdirectory  without
             first increasing the pages in the superior directory.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To create a subdirectory for user  FOX  with  100  pages  of
             permanent  and working storage without subtracting 100 pages
             from the  permanent  and  working  quotas  of  the  superior


                                    5-31
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             directory:

              ________ ______________
             $^ECREATE <FOX.SUB><RET>
             [New]
               _________                            ________
             $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT ) 100<RET>
               _______                            ________
             $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT ) 100<RET>
               ________ _________ ____________
             $$PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY) 6-digit octal number
        PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY) 6-digit octal number

             This  subcommand  specifies  the  access  protection  for  a
             directory.  (You can find an explanation of directory-access
                               _______ ______ _____
             protection in the TOPS-20 User's Guide.)  The  argument  for
             this  command  is a 6-digit octal number.  If you do not use
             this subcommand, the directory protection is 777700.

             To change the protection of an existing directory, give this
             subcommand  with the new protection.  A user can also change
             the protection of a directory with the command SET DIRECTORY
             PROTECTION.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             You can also use ENABLE and  the  SET  DIRECTORY  PROTECTION
             command  to  change  the protection.  When you have OPERATOR
             capability enabled, you can type a  fictitious  password  in
             the command.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To  make  the  <LIBRARY>  directory  protection  775252   on
             structure APPL:

              ________ ___________________
             $^ECREATE APPL:<LIBRARY><RET>
             [New]
               __________                ___________
             $$PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY) 775252<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
        PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)

             This subcommand creates a level of TOPS-20 inferior  to  the
             one  from  which you issued the ^ECREATE command, and leaves
             your terminal at this new level.  You can issue any  TOPS-20
             command  from this level.  Give the POP command to return to
             your ^ECREATE session.

             With this subcommand you  can  leave  the  ^ECREATE  command
             sequence  in  order  to  issue  a  user,  operator, or other
             privileged command.  Following this, you can resume ^ECREATE
             activities, with your previous work intact.
                                    5-32
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             You can use the PUSH subcommand to create an  inferior  EXEC
             of  your choice.  Normally, PUSH creates the EXEC defined by
             the system logical name  DEFAULT-EXEC:.   You  can  use  the
             DEFINE  command  to define a job definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:
             with the name of the EXEC you want to create each  time  you
             PUSH.

             Note  that  many  TOPS-20  programs  have  their  own   PUSH
             commands.   However,  only  the  EXEC  and OPR PUSH commands
             refer to the job definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:; all other PUSH
             commands refer to the system definition.

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  You may be  called  upon  to  perform  some  unscheduled
                 software  task,  such  as initializing tapes or handling
                 tape mount requests while you are in  the  middle  of  a
                 ^ECREATE  session.  The PUSH subcommand allows you to do
                 this:

                  ________                  _____________
                 $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TUCKER><RET>
                 [Old]
                   ____________________________ _____
                 $$ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES <RET>
                   _________________________      _________
                 $$ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) +180<RET>
                   _______________             ________
                 $$ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) 172<RET>
                   ____                _____
                 $$PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)<RET>
                  TOPS-20 Command processor 5(702)
                  ______               _____
                 @ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)<RET>
                  ________
                 $OPR<RET>
                     ___ __________ _____ __________
                 OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE
                 _________________________
                 /LABEL-TYPE:TOPS-20-<RET>
                 ________________________ ____________________________
                 /OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION:YES /TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD-<RET>
                 ______________________
                 /VOLUME-ID:SAMPLE<RET>
                 OPR>

                 When you are notified of  a  successful  initialization,
                 exit  from  OPR;  give  the POP command to return to the
                 ^ECREATE  session;  then   continue   issuing   ^ECREATE
                 subcommands:

                     _________
                 OPR>EXIT<RET>
                  ________
                 $POP<RET>
                 [Continuing BUILD of directory PS:<TUCKER>]
                   _______________________          ___________
                 $$DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION (NUMBER) 770000<RET>
                   _________                           ________
                 $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 600<RET>
                   _______                           ________
                 $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 600<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

             2.  Suppose you gave an unacceptable argument to the WORKING
                 subcommand, as follows:


                                    5-33
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                  ________                  _______________________
                 $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TUCKER.OPERATOR>-<RET>
                             _________
                  (PASSWORD) TEST<RET>
                 [Old]
                   _______                           _______
                 $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 30<RET>
                   _________                           _______
                 $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 21<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 ?Working space insufficient for current allocation.
                 Please fix incorrect subcommands.

                 $$

                 The error message above indicates  that  the  number  of
                 pages  currently  assigned to your directory exceeds the
                 working space quota that  you  desire.   Give  the  PUSH
                 subcommand.   Then,  while at this new level of TOPS-20,
                 give  the  INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  DISK-USAGE  command  to
                 display the current page assignment:

                   _________
                 $$PUSH<RET>

                  TOPS-20 Command processor 5(703)
                  ___________         __________               _____
                 @INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE (OF DIRECTORY)<RET>
                  PS:<TUCKER.OPERATOR>
                  37 Pages assigned
                  75 Working pages, 75 Permanent pages allowed
                  4452 Pages free on PS:, 147548 pages used.
                 @

                 If you are unwilling for  the  working  space  quota  to
                 equal  or  exceed  the  current page assignment, you can
                 delete files to sufficiently  reduce  the  current  page
                 assignment:

                                 .
                  ______         _____________
                                 _            
                 @DELETE (FILES) .QXAMPLE<RET>
                  CREATE.QXAMPLE.2 [OK]
                  OPR-POP.QXAMPLE.1 [OK]
                  OPR-PUSH.QXAMPLE.5 [OK]
                  POP-RETURN.QXAMPLE.5 [OK]
                  PUSH-ERROR.QXAMPLE.4 [OK]
                  SYSJ.QXAMPLE.7 [OK]

                  _______             _____
                 @EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY) <RET>
                  PS:<TUCKER.OPERATOR> [30 pages freed]

                 Only seven pages are  assigned  to  the  directory  now.
                 Return  to  your  ^ECREATE  session,  and  respecify the
                 working space quota.

                  ________
                 @POP<RET>
                 [Continuing BUILD of directory PS:<TUCKER.OPERATOR>]
                   _______                           _______
                 $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 30<RET>


                                    5-34
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

        REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
        REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES

             This subcommand allows  the  user,  when  logging  onto  the
             system, to read all messages in SYSTEM:MAIL.TXT.  Thus, when
             a    user    logs    into    his    directory    with    the
             REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES  attribute  enabled, all messages from
             SYSTEM:MAIL.TXT will be displayed at his terminal.

             NOT REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES, which is the  default,  withholds
             this attribute from the user.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To give a user the REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES attribute:

              ________ ____________
             $^ECREATE <BROWN><RET>
             [Old]
               __________________________
             $$REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        SEMI-OPERATOR
        SEMI-OPERATOR

             This subcommand allows the user to execute a sub-set of  OPR
             commands.   The  subset are those OPR commands for accessing
             information and controlling certain devices.   (The  devices
             are  determined by the System Administrator when a GALGEN is
             performed.)

             After this subcommand is issued for a particular  user,  the
             operator must turn-on SEMI-OPR with the OPR command ENABLE.

                                 ----- Example -----

              ________ ____________
             $^ECREATE <BROWN><RET>
             [Old]
               _____________             _____
             $$SEMI-OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) decimal group number
        SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) decimal group number

             This subcommand specifies what user groups can be  specified
             in  the USER-OF-GROUP or SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP subcommands
             for a subdirectory in this directory.

             The argument is a decimal number from 1 to 262143 (2**18-1).
             You  can  specify a maximum of 40 different groups.  Because


                                    5-35
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             you can give only one number for the argument, however,  you
             must  repeat  the  subcommand  for each different group.  If
             this subcommand is being specified for a  subdirectory,  the
             user-group  number  must be in the list of subdirectory user
             groups allowed in the superior directory.

             NOT SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP removes a group from the list of
             groups  allowed.   To  remove  more  than one group from the
             list, you must repeat the subcommand for each group.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To allow the subdirectories of directory <A> to specify user
             groups or subdirectory user groups of 1, 2, 3, or 4:

              ________ ________
             $^ECREATE <A><RET>
             [New]
               _______________________           ______
             $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 1<RET>
               _______________________           ______
             $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 2<RET>
               _______________________           ______
             $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 3<RET>
               _______________________           ______
             $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 4<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER (FOR COMPATIBILITY) n,n
        TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER (FOR COMPATIBILITY) n,n

             This subcommand sets  a  TOPS-10  project-programmer  number
             (PPN)  to  the directory.  This allows TOPS-10 programs that
             require PPNs to be compatible with TOPS-20.

             The project-programmer number consists of two octal numbers,
             separated  by  a  comma, that identify the user and his file
             storage area on a TOPS-10 file structure.

             To change the  PPN  in  an  existing  directory,  give  this
             subcommand with the new PPN.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To assign user JONES a TOPS-10 PPN:

              ________ ____________
             $^ECREATE <JONES><RET>
             [Old]
               ________________________________ ____________
             $$TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER 27,5434<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        USER-OF-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number
        USER-OF-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number

             This subcommand places the user of the directory in a  group
             and  gives  the user group-level access to other directories


                                    5-36
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             with the same directory group number.  (See  the  subcommand
             DIRECTORY-GROUP to specify a directory group number.)

             The argument is a decimal number from 1 to 262143 (2**18-1).
             A  user  can  belong  to  a  maximum of 40 different groups.
             However, because you  can  give  only  one  number  for  the
             argument,  you must repeat the subcommand for each different
             group.   If  this  subcommand  is  being  specified  for   a
             subdirectory,  the  user group number must be in the list of
             subdirectory user groups allowed in the superior directory.

             NOT USER-OF-GROUP removes  a  user  from  the  group  number
             specified.   To  remove a user from more than one group, you
             must repeat the subcommand for each group.

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  To put a user in groups 3, 9, and 27:

                  ________ __________
                 $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
                 [New]
                   _____________ ______
                 $$USER-OF-GROUP 3<RET>
                   _____________ ______
                 $$USER-OF-GROUP 9<RET>
                   _____________ _______
                 $$USER-OF-GROUP 27<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

             2.  To allow an instructor whose  directory  is  <TEACH>  to
                 have  group-level  access  to his students' directories,
                 which have a directory group number of 5:

                  ________ ____________
                 $^ECREATE <TEACH><RET>
                 [New]
                   _____________ ______
                 $$USER-OF-GROUP 5<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

             3.  To remove a user from group 3:

                  ________ __________
                 $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
                 [Old]
                   ___ _____________ ______
                 $$NOT USER-OF-GROUP 3<RET>
                   _____
                 $$<RET>
                 $

        WHEEL (CAPABILITY)
        WHEEL (CAPABILITY)

             This subcommand grants the WHEEL capability to a user.





                                    5-37
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                                         NOTE

                 Be  very  cautious  about  giving  this  capability,
                 because  it  allows  a  user  to  do anything on the
                 system and possibly destroy system security.

             NOT WHEEL, which is the default, withholds  this  capability
             from a user.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To give user <SYSTEM-ACE> WHEEL capability:

              ________ _________________
             $^ECREATE <SYSTEM-ACE><RET>
             [New]
               __________
             $$WHEEL<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
             $

        WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument
        WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument

             This subcommand specifies the limit of the sum of  temporary
             working  space that a user of the directory can have on disk
             while logged in and the temporary working space that can  be
             delegated to subdirectories in the directory.

             Temporary working space is  delegated  when  the  value  for
             WORKING  is  specified  for a subdirectory in the directory.
             After temporary working space is delegated,  the  value  for
             WORKING   in   the   superior   directory  is  automatically
             decremented by the amount delegated.

             You should  allow  at  least  as  much  working  storage  as
             permanent  storage.   You  can  change  the  value  for this
             parameter by giving the subcommand with a new value.

             The arguments are the number of pages or INFINITY.

                                ----- Arguments -----

             The number of pages argument is a  decimal  number  where  a
             page is 512 36-bit words.  The default value is 250 pages.

             The INFINITY argument allocates an unlimited number of pages
             to  the  directory.   The  working  storage  of the superior
             directory must also be INFINITY.  The number of  pages  that
             can  be  used  by  the user is limited to the number of free
             pages on the  structure.   This  argument  is  intended  for
             special  system  directories; it is not intended for general
             users.



                                    5-38
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


                                 ----- Example -----

             To give user FOX 400 pages of working storage:

              ________ __________
             $^ECREATE <FOX><RET>
             [New]
               _______                           ________
             $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 400<RET>
               _____
             $$<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @

   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        The following are error messages  associated  with  the  ^ECREATE
        command and its subcommands.

        After some of the following error messages, you will also get the
        message:

             Please fix incorrect subcommands.

        After any error, you automatically  return  to  subcommand  level
        with  the  prompt  $$.   You  can  then  give more subcommands to
        correct the error, specify additional  directory  parameters,  or
        type ABORT and then correct the problem.

        ?6-digit value only

             The maximum value accepted is six octal digits.

        ?Can't add new group; buffer full

             You specified over 40 directory groups or user groups.

        ?Carriage return or subcommand required
        ?Does not match switch or keyword

             You typed an invalid subcommand.

        ?Directory file is mapped

             You tried to kill a directory that was being used.

        ?Directory still contains subdirectory.

             You cannot delete a directory that has subdirectories.

        ?First nonspace character is not a digit - "character"

             You must type a numeric argument.

        ?Group already exists

                                    5-39
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             The group number that you typed was previously given.

        ?Group numbers must be between 1 and 262143.

             A user group  number  or  directory  group  number  must  be
             between 1 and 262143, inclusive.

        ?Illegal to create non-files-only subdirectory under files-only
         directory.

             You cannot create  a  non-FILES-ONLY  subdirectory  under  a
             FILES-ONLY directory.

        ?Illegal to delete connected directory.

             You cannot  delete  your  connected  directory.To  delete  a
             specific directory, first connect to a different directory.

        ?Illegal to delete logged-in directory.

             You cannot delete your logged-in  directory.   To  delete  a
             specific directory you must log in to a different directory.

        ?Internal format of directory is incorrect

             You tried to kill  a  directory  whose  internal  format  is
             incorrect.  (See Hints under the KILL subcommand.)

        ?Invalid character in number

             You typed a nondigit in a numeric argument or  you  typed  a
             nonoctal digit in an octal argument.

        ?Invalid directory number.

             The number that you tried to give to  a  new  directory  has
             already been given to another directory.

        ?Invalid directory specification

             You typed a directory incorrectly.  Perhaps you  forgot  the
             right angle bracket (>).

        ?Invalid structure name - "name"

             You specified a structure  name  incorrectly.   Perhaps  you
             omitted  the  angle brackets around a directory name, or you
             omitted the colon after the structure name.

        ?Invalid user group.



                                    5-40
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             You    specified    a    number    for     USER-GROUP     or
             SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP   that   is   not  in  the  superior
             directories list of subdirectory user groups allowed.

        ?Must be 0-63

             The default number of generations to keep must be 0 to 63.

        ?No group to remove

             You tried to remove a group number that was never assigned.

        ?Not confirmed

             You must press RETURN  or  LINE  FEED  at  the  end  of  the
             command.

        ?Overflow (number is greater than 2**35)

             The argument you specified is too large.

        ?Request exceeds superior directory permanent quota.

             The number of  pages  you  specified  for  a  subdirectory's
             permanent  disk-storage  page  limit  exceeds  the permanent
             disk-storage  page  limit   remaining   for   the   superior
             directory.

        ?Request exceeds superior directory subdirectory quota.

             You  tried  to  create  a  subdirectory  when  the  superior
             directory  allows no more subdirectories, or you specified a
             value  for  MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES  that  exceeds  what   is
             allowed by the superior directory.

        ?Request exceeds superior directory working quota.

             The number of  pages  you  specified  for  a  subdirectory's
             working   disk-storage   page   limit  exceeds  the  working
             disk-storage  page  limit   remaining   for   the   superior
             directory.

        ?Structure str: not mounted

             The structure you specified, str:, has not been mounted.  Be
             sure  you typed the structure name correctly.  Also, MOUNT a
             structure before you create a directory on it.

        ?Subdirectory quota insufficient for existing subdirectories.

             You tried to specify a value for MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES that


                                    5-41
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             is  less  than  the number of subdirectories already created
             and delegated.

        ?Superior directory does not exist.

             You tried to create the  subdirectory  <directory.xxx>,  but
             <directory>, the superior directory, does not exist.

        ?Superior directory full

             Either <ROOT-DIRECTORY>  on  the  structure  where  you  are
             trying  to  create  a  directory  cannot  contain  any  more
             directories, or you are trying to create <directory.xxx> and
             <directory> cannot contain any more directories.

        ?Working space insufficient for current allocation.

             You tried to specify a value for WORKING that is  less  than
             the  current disk space already being used by the directory.
             Refer to Example 2 of the PUSH  subcommand  description  for
             help.

        ?You can't change the number of an old directory

             You cannot change the number of an existing directory.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  To create a directory with all default values:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ________ ___________ _______
            $^ECREATE <STUDENT-1> S1<RET>
            [New]
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @
















                                    5-42
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


        2.  To create a new directory with some nondefault parameters:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ________                  _______________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <WHITEMAN><RET>
            [New]
              ________ ___________
            $$PASSWORD PAULAM<RET>
              _______________             ____________
            $$ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) BANK.MC<RET>
              _______                           ________
            $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 500<RET>
              _________                           ________
            $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 300<RET>
              __________ ________ ______
            $$USER-GROUP (NUMBER) 9<RET>
              _______________ ________ ______
            $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 5<RET>
              _________
            $$LIST<RET>
             Name <WHITEMAN>
             Working disk storage page limit 500
             Permanent disk storage page limit 300
             Account default for LOGIN BANK.MC
             User of groups 9
             Directory groups 5
             TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

              ____ ____________
            $$LIST VERBOSE<RET>
             Name <WHITEMAN>
             Working disk storage page limit 500
             Permanent disk storage page limit 300
             not WHEEL
             not OPERATOR
             not CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
             not MAINTENANCE
             not IPCF
             not ENQ-DEQ
             not FILES-ONLY
|            not SERCURE
             No directory number
             Default file protection 777700
             Account default for LOGIN BANK.MC
             Protection of directory 777700
             Generations to keep 1
             Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|            Never logged in interactively
|            Never logged in non-interactively
|            Password expiration date not set
|            No interactive loging failures
|            No non-interactive login failures
             User of groups 9
             Directory groups 5
             Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
             Online expiration default 60 days
             Offline expiration default 90 days
             TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

              _____
            $$<RET>


                                    5-43
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        3.  To alter a parameter for a directory:

             ________ _______________
            $^ECREATE <WHITEMAN><RET>
            [Old]
              ____________                                _____
            $$CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)<RET>
              _____________             _____
            $$SEMI-OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)<RET>
              ____ ____________
            $$LIST VERBOSE<RET>
             Name <WHITEMAN>
             Working disk storage page limit 500
             Permanent disk storage page limit 300
             not WHEEL
             not OPERATOR
             CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
             not MAINTENANCE
             not IPCF
             not ENQ-DEQ
             SEMI-OPERATOR
             not FILES-ONLY
|            not SECURE
             Number of directory 606
             Default file protection 777700
             Account default for login BANK.MC
             Protection of directory 777700
             Generations to keep 1
             Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|            Last interactive login 11-May-90 15:30:47
|            Last non-interactive login 22-Feb-90 18:28:21
|            Password expiration date is 15-Aug-90 17:35:14
|            No interactive login failures
|            No non-interactive login failures
             Never logged in non-interactively
             Password expiration date not set
             No interactive loging failures
             No non-interactive login failures
             Last LOGIN 
             User of groups 5, 9
             Directory groups 5
             Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
             Online expiration default 60 days
             Offline expiration default 90 days
             TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @





                                    5-44
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ECREATE)
                                 (^ECREATE)


        4.  To delete a directory from the system:

             ________ _______________
            $^ECREATE <WHITEMAN><RET>
            [Old]
              _________
            $$KILL<RET>
                     _____
            [Confirm]<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        5.  To create the files-only  directory  <MANUALS>  on  structure
            DSKA with DSKA previously MOUNTed:

             ________ ___________________
            $^ECREATE DSKA:<MANUALS><RET>
            [New]
              _______________
            $$FILES-ONLY<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        6.  To create PS:<P> and allow it to have  50  subdirectories  in
            user groups 3 and/or 4:

             ________ ___________
            $^ECREATE PS:<P><RET>
            [New]
              _______ __________
            $$WORKING 12500<RET>
              _________ __________
            $$PERMANENT 12500<RET>
              ______________________ _______
            $$MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES 50<RET>
              _______________________           ______
            $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 3<RET>
              _______________________           ______
            $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 4<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        7.  To create the subdirectory <P.HURLEY> in user  group  3  when
            <P> already exists:

             ________ _______________
            $^ECREATE <P.HURLEY><RET>
            [New]
              ________ __________
            $$PASSWORD YUIOP<RET>
              __________ ______
            $$USER-GROUP 3<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @









                                    5-45
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EDEFINE)
                                 (^EDEFINE)


   ^EDEFINE - Defining and Deleting System Logical Names
   ^EDEFINE - Defining and Deleting System Logical Names



   Function
   Function

        The ^EDEFINE command creates or deletes system logical names.   A
        system logical name applies to all users on the system.  A system
        logical name is a list  of  system  directories  that  tells  the
        system  where  and  in  what  order  to search for a file for all
        users.


   Format
   Format

        ^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) lognam: (AS) filespec


   Arguments
   Arguments

        lognam:            specifies a 1-  to  39-character  alphanumeric
                           abbreviation  or  system  logical  name  to be
                           defined or deleted, or * to delete all  system
                           logical names.

        filespec           specifies  one  or  more  file  specifications
                           separated  by commas.  A file specification is
                           any combination of device or  structure  name,
                           directory    name,    filename,   file   type,
                           generation number, and wild cards.  If you are
                           deleting  a  system  logical name, do not type
                           any file specification.

   Hints
   Hints

        Whenever you give this command, you are asked to CONFIRM.  If you
        have  typed the command correctly, press RETURN.  Otherwise, type
        CTRL/U and retype the command.

        Do not confuse the ^EDEFINE command with the TOPS-20 EXEC  DEFINE
        command.   The DEFINE command defines a logical name for only the
        user that issues the command.   (See  the  TOPS-20  User's  Guide
        and/or  TOPS-20 Commands Manual for a complete description of the
        DEFINE command.)

        To check the current  list  of  system  logical  names,  use  the
        command  INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  LOGICAL  NAMES  with  the argument
        SYSTEM.  You should use this command before and after you add  or
        delete a system logical name.  For example:




                                    5-46
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EDEFINE)
                                 (^EDEFINE)


              ___________         _____________      ___________
             @INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES (OF) SYSTEM<RET>
             CR: => CDR:
             DS: => DSK:
             HLP: => SYS:
             LP: => LPT:
             NEW: => PS:<LOADTEST>,PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>
             SY: => SYS:
             SYS: => PS:<LOADTEST>,PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>,
             PS:<FIELD-IMAGE>,PS:<UNSUPPORTED>,PS:<REL>
             TT: => TTY:


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        The following is a warning message associated with  the  ^EDEFINE
        command:

        %Logical name lognam:  was not defined

             The system logical name "lognam:" that you tried  to  delete
             was not defined.

        The following are error messages  associated  with  the  ^EDEFINE
        command:

        ?Directory terminating delimiter  is  not  preceded  by  a  valid
             beginning delimiter

             You made an error in typing the file specification.  Perhaps
             you forgot a comma between two directory names.

        ?Invalid character in filename

             You typed an invalid character in the file specification.

        ?More than one name field is not allowed

             You made an error in the file specification.   You  probably
             typed a period instead of a comma.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  To define SYS:  as PS:<SUBSYS> and PS:<NEW> using  all  guide
            words and prompts:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ________                       _
            $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) ? 
             LOGICAL NAME TO DEFINE OR DELETE,
             OR "*" TO DELETE ALL
             ________                       ____      _
            $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) SYS: (AS) ?


                                    5-47
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EDEFINE)
                                 (^EDEFINE)


             DEFINITION LIST OR NULL TO DELETE
             ________                       ____ ______
            $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) SYS: -<RET>
                 _________________________
            (AS) PS:<SUBSYS>,PS:<NEW><RET>
                     _____
            [CONFIRM]<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        2.  To define BAS:  as PS:<BASIC>:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ________                       ____      _______________
            $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) BAS: (AS) PS:<BASIC><RET>
                     _____
            [CONFIRM]<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        3.  To delete the logical name BAS:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ________                       ____ _________
            $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) BAS: (AS)<RET>
                     _____
            [CONFIRM]<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        4.  To define TEST:  as PS:<TEST>TSTPAK.FOR.3:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ________ _____ __________________________
            $^EDEFINE TEST: PS:<TEST>TSTPAK.FOR.3<RET>
                     _____
            [CONFIRM]<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @























                                    5-48
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^EEDDT)
                                  (^EEDDT)


   ^EEDDT - Debugging the EXEC
   ^EEDDT - Debugging the EXEC



   Function
   Function

        The ^EEDDT command  transfers  control  to  DDT  looking  at  the
        TOPS-20 EXEC with symbols.


   Format
   Format

        ^EEDDT


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        The ^EEDDT command should be used only by  a  system  programmer.
        If necessary, it gets DDT from the file SYS.UDDT.EXE and stores a
        symbol table pointer into it.  Normally,  this  command  is  used
        only by a system programmer to debug the EXEC.

   Hint
   Hint

        If you get into EDDT by mistake, type $G to get back to the EXEC.
        For example,

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              ___________
             $^EEDDT<RET>
             ________
             DDT<RET>
              ______
             $G<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @


   Restriction
   Restriction

        You must have WHEEL capability to execute the ^EEDDT command.  If
        you  issue  the ^EEDDT command without WHEEL capability, an error
        message appears and the enabled prompt reappears.  For example,

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              ___________
             $^EEDDT<RET>
             ?Insufficient privileges
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @







                                    5-49
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EPRINT)
                                 (^EPRINT)


   ^EPRINT - Print Directory Parameters
   ^EPRINT - Print Directory Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The ^EPRINT  command  prints  on  your  terminal  the  parameters
        associated with the directory specified.


   Format
   Format

        $^EPRINT (DIRECTORY NAME) structure:<directory>,<RET>
        $$subcommand<RET>


   Arguments
   Arguments

        structure          specifies a  1-  to  6-character  alphanumeric
                           name   or   logical  name  for  the  structure
                           containing the directory for  which  you  want
                           directory  information.  If you do not specify
                           a  structure  name,  your  currently-connected
                           structure   is   assumed.   If  you  have  not
                           connected to a  specific  structure,  you  are
                           connected  by default to the public structure.
                           You cannot use recognition  on  the  structure
                           name.

        <directory>        specifies 1 to 39 letters, digits, hyphens, or
                           periods representing the name of the directory
                           for which you want information.  The directory
                           name  must be embedded in angle brackets.  You
                           can use recognition on this name.


   Subcommands
   Subcommands

        FAST                     specifies the output  be  a  short  list
                                 equivalent  to  the LIST FAST subcommand
                                 of the ^ECREATE command.   If  you  omit
                                 the  comma  and  the subcommand, FAST is
                                 assumed.

        NAME-ONLY                specifies the output be the name of  the
                                 directory.   This  is  equivalent to the
                                 LIST   NAME-ONLY   subcommand   of   the
                                 ^ECREATE command.

        VERBOSE                  specifies  the   output   be   all   the
                                 parameters    except    PASSWORD,    NOT


                                    5-50
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EPRINT)
                                 (^EPRINT)


|                                ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS,    and    NOT
|                                INTERNET-WIZARD.   This is equivalent to
                                 the  LIST  VERBOSE  subcommand  of   the
                                 ^ECREATE command.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        This command  is  equivalent  to  the  EXEC  command  INFORMATION
        DIRECTORY.

        When you specify the  NAME-ONLY  subcommand,  the  structure  and
        directory name that you specified after ^EPRINT are output.  When
        you  specify the  VERBOSE subcommand,  all the  parameters listed
        on the next page are printed except the following:

|            Not ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
|            Not INTERNET-ACCESS
             Not ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
             Not DECNET-ACCESS

        If  you  use  the  FAST  subcommand  or  no   argument,   certain
        default-value  parameters are suppressed as indicated below.  The
        values are set when you use ^ECREATE.

        PARAMETER                           SUPPRESSED BY "FAST" IF

        Name                                    -
        Password                            always suppressed
        Working disk storage page limit         -
        Permanent disk storage page limit       -
        WHEEL                               not WHEEL
        OPERATOR                            not OPERATOR
        CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS     not CONFIDENTIAL 
                                             INFORMATION ACCESS
        MAINTENANCE                         not MAINTENANCE
        IPCF                                not IPCF
        ENQ-DEQ                             not ENQ-DEQ
        SEMI-OPERATOR                       not SEMI-OPERATOR
        DECNET-ACCESS                       not DECNET-ACCESS
|       INTERNET-ACCESS                     not INTERNET-ACCESS
|       INTERNET-WIZARD                     not INTERNET-WIZARD
|       ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS           not ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-
                                             SOCKETS
        FILES-ONLY                          not FILES-ONLY
|       SECURE                              not SECURE
        Archive-online-expired-files        not ARCHIVE-ONLINE-
                                             EXPIRED-FILES
        Number of directory                     -
        Default file protection             777700
        Account default for login           none set


                                    5-51
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EPRINT)
                                 (^EPRINT)


        Protection of directory             777700
        Generations to keep                 1
        Maximum subdirectories allowed      0
|       Last interactive login              never logged in
|       Last non-interactive login          never logged in
|       Password expiration date            none set
|       Interactive login failures          no failures
|       Non-interactive login failures      no failures
        User of groups                      none set
        Directory groups                    none set
        Subdirectory user groups allowed    none set
        Online expiration default           SYSTEM DEFAULT 
                                             (USUALLY 60 DAYS)
        Offline expiration default              -
        TOPS10 project-programmer number        -

        (See ^ECREATE for a definition of the parameters.)


   Hints
   Hints

        If you want to see the values of all the parameters,  except  the
        ARPANET  ones, use the VERBOSE subcommand.  Once you are familiar
        with default values, you seldom need to use VERBOSE.

        You can also use the EXEC command, INFORMATION (ABOUT) DIRECTORY,
        instead of ^EPRINT.

        If you need to change a parameter, use ^ECREATE.


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

        The following are error  messages  associated  with  the  ^EPRINT
        command:

        ?Invalid structure name

             You specified a structure  name  incorrectly.   Perhaps  you
             omitted  the  angle brackets around a directory name, or you
             omitted the colon after the structure name.

        ?No such directory

             The user name that you  typed  does  not  exist.   Type  the
             command again with a valid user name; try recognition input.


   Examples
   Examples




                                    5-52
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EPRINT)
                                 (^EPRINT)


        1.  To print a brief list of parameters for directory <PETER>:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _______ ____________
            $^EPRINT <PETER><RET>
             Name PS:<PETER>
             Working disk storage page limit 100
             Permanent disk storage page limit 70
             MAINTENANCE
             Number of directory 523
             Account default for LOGIN INVENTORY
|            Last interactive LOGIN 24-Aug-88 13:05:52
|            Last non-interactive LOGIN 12-Sep-88 15:22:48
             TOPS10 project-programmer number 12,3553

             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        2.  To print all the parameters for directory <PETER>:

             _______ _____________
            $^EPRINT <PETER>,<RET>
              ____________
            $$VERBOSE<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             Name PS:<PETER>
             Working disk storage page limit 100
             Permanent disk storage page limit 70
             not WHEEL
             not OPERATOR
             not CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
             MAINTENANCE
             not IPCF
             not ENQ-DEQ
             not FILES-ONLY
|            not SECURE
             Number of directory 523
             Default file protection 777700
             Account default for LOGIN INVENTORY
             Protection of directory 777700
             Generations to keep 1
             Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|            Last interactive login 24-Aug-89 13:05:52
|            Last non-interactive login 23-Aug-89 20:57:07
|            Password expires on 18-Oct-89 07:01:00
|            Number of interactive login failures 1
|            Number of non-interactive login failures 2
             User of groups - none set
             Directory groups - none set
             Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
             Online expiration default 60 days
             Offline expiration default 90 days
             TOPS10 project-programmer number 12,3553



                                    5-53
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EPRINT)
                                 (^EPRINT)


             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        3.  To use recognition input, determine arguments, and then get a
            brief list of parameters:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _______                  ____________
            $^EPRINT (DIRECTORY NAME) <ALAN>,<RET>
              _
            $$? confirm with carriage return
              or one of the following:
             FAST        NAME-ONLY    VERBOSE
              _____
            $$<RET>
             NAME PS:<ALAN>
             Working disk storage page limit 800
             Permanent disk storage page limit 400
             Number of directory 142
             Account default for login 120
|            Last interactive login 27-OCT-89 07:45:30
|            Last non-interactive login 12-OCT-89 03:30:44
             TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @






























                                    5-54
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^EQUIT)
                                  (^EQUIT)


   ^EQUIT - Halting the EXEC
   ^EQUIT - Halting the EXEC



   Function
   Function

        The ^EQUIT command halts the EXEC (the TOPS-20 command processor)
        and  returns control to the program under which the EXEC is being
        run.


   Format
   Format

        ^EQUIT


   Hint
   Hint

        The ^EQUIT command should be used only by  a  system  programmer.
        For  the privileged user the command is normally used to get into
        the MINI-EXEC.  The prompt  to  indicate  that  you  are  in  the
        MINI-EXEC is MX>.  Some commands for the MINI-EXEC are documented
        in the TOPS-20 Software  Installation  Guide,  because  they  are
        useful in the installation process.

        If you get into the  MINI-EXEC  by  mistake,  type  S  after  the
        prompt.   TART will be printed immediately.  Press RETURN and you
        are back at EXEC level with the enable prompt.  (See the  example
        below.)

        Once you use ^EQUIT to enter the  MINI-EXEC,  whenever  you  type
        <CTRL/P>  thereafter,  you enter the MINI-EXEC.  The <CTRL/P> has
        this effect until you log out.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        You must have WHEEL capability to execute the ^EQUIT command.  If
        you issue the ^EQUIT command without WHEEL capability, a question
        mark appears and the enabled prompt reappears.  For example,

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              ___________
             $^EQUIT<RET>
             ?
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @


   Example
   Example

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>


                                    5-55
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^EQUIT)
                                  (^EQUIT)


              ___________
             $^EQUIT<RET>

             INTERRUPT AT 17377
                __________
             MX>START<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>
             @















































                                    5-56
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESEND)
                                  (^ESEND)


   ^ESEND - Sending Messages to Users Immediately
   ^ESEND - Sending Messages to Users Immediately



   Function
   Function

        The ^ESEND command  sends  a  single-  or  multiple-line  message
        immediately  to  a  particular  user,  a particular terminal-line
        number, or all users, or terminal numbers, on the local system or
        a remote system within the cluster.


   Format
   Format

        ^ESEND (TO) arguments


   Arguments
   Arguments

        user name          specifies a user name or an asterisk  (*)  for
                           all users.

        terminal number    specifies  a  terminal-line   number   or   an
                           asterisk (*) for all terminals.

        /NODE:node-name::  specifies  a  remote  node  name  within   the
                           cluster  or  an  asterisk (*) for all users on
                           all systems within the cluster.

        message            specifies a message of one  to  six  lines  of
                           text followed by a carriage return.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        The ^ESEND command accepts multiple-line messages with up to  six
        lines  of text.  You can continue typing the message past the end
        of a line and  onto  the  next  line,  without  pressing  RETURN.
        ^ESEND  reorganizes  the  message so that any words split between
        two lines appear on the same line on receiving terminals.

        If you want to avoid divided words while typing your message, use
        the hyphen (-) continue character.  At the end of each line, type
        a space and a hyphen, and then press RETURN.

        The  ^ESEND  command  does  not  send   the   message   to   PTYs
        (pseudo-terminals).   When  you  end  the command, the message is
        then printed on the specified terminals.





                                    5-57
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESEND)
                                  (^ESEND)


   Hints
   Hints

        Use the TOPS-20 SYSTAT command to determine a user's line number.

        If you wish to begin the message with a question mark  (?),  type
        CTRL/V  before  the  "?".   The CTRL/V allows the "?" to be taken
        literally instead of printing the help text.  Note that CTRL/V is
        required only if the "?" is in the first character position.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  To immediately tell all users to free up disk space,  because
            available disk space is getting low:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ______ _ ______ ______ ___ _______ ___________
            $^ESEND * PLEASE DELETE AND EXPUNGE UNNECESSARY
             _____ ________
             FILES NOW<RET>

            [From OPERATOR on line 130: PLEASE DELETE AND EXPUNGE
            UNNECESSARY FILES NOW]
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        2.  Send a multiple-line message to TTY20:.  Note that the  words
            "installed" and "converted" are divided between lines.

             ______  ______  ____  ___  __________  ________  _______  __
            $^ESEND  ASMITH  Your  new  short-ship  tracking  program  is
            _________  __  _____   ________  ___ ________ _____ ______ __
            installed  on  SYS:.   However,  the database files cannot be
            _________ _____ ________  ______ ____ _____ ________ __  ____
            converted until tonight.  Please wait until tomorrow to  make
            ___ _____________
            new entries.<RET>

            The message appears on the receiving terminals as:

            [From OPERATOR on line 17:
            Your new short-ship tracking program is installed on
             SYS:.  However, the database files cannot be converted
             until tonight.  Please wait until tomorrow to make new
             entries.]

        3.  Send the same message as in Example 2 only use  the  continue
            character.

             ______ ______ ____ ___ __________ ________ _______ __ ______
            $^ESEND ASMITH Your new short-ship tracking program is -<RET>
            _________ __ _____  ________ ___ ________ _____ ______
            installed on SYS:.  However, the database files -<RET>
            ______ __ _________ _____ ________  ______ ____ _____ ______
            cannot be converted until tonight.  Please wait until -<RET>
            ________ __ ____ ___ _____________
            tomorrow to make new entries.<RET>






                                    5-58
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


   ^ESET - Setting Job, System, and Terminal Parameters
   ^ESET - Setting Job, System, and Terminal Parameters



   Function
   Function

        The ^ESET command sets various parameters  for  a  job,  for  the
        system, and for terminals.


   Format
   Format

        ^ESET argument


   Arguments
   Arguments

        CLUSTER-INFORMATION
        CLUSTER-INFORMATION

             specifies to allow information (@INFORMATION SYSTEM command)
             about the local system to be reported on remote systems.


        NO CLUSTER-INFORMATION
        NO CLUSTER-INFORMATION

             specifies  to  disable  (not  allow)  information  from  the
             @INFORMATION SYSTEM command on remote systems.


        CLUSTER-SENDALLS
        CLUSTER-SENDALLS

             specifies to allow the acceptance of remote sendalls to  the
             local system or node, by way of the @SEND /NODE:  command.


        NO CLUSTER-SENDALLS
        NO CLUSTER-SENDALLS

             specifies to disallow the acceptance of remote  sendalls  to
             the  local  system  or  node,  by  way  of  the @SEND /NODE:
             command.


        DATE-AND-TIME (TO) date and time
        DATE-AND-TIME (TO) date and time

             Sets the system date and time while the system  is  running.
             This  is  helpful if you type an incorrect date or time when
             you start the system.  It is also  useful  when  the  system
             time  has fallen behind because the system has been down for
             a while and then continued.

             (See the examples of legal dates and times under the ^ECEASE


                                    5-59
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


             command.)

                              ----- Characteristic -----

             The ^ESET DATE-AND-TIME command, given from any OPR terminal
             in  a CFS cluster, sets the date and time for all systems in
             the cluster.

                                   ----- Hint -----

             If  you  set  the  time  back,  you  can  seriously   affect
             accounting and the compilation of user programs.  Therefore,
             you should notify all users that you had  to  set  the  time
             back.

             After you give the  ^ESET  DATE-AND-TIME  command,  you  can
             check  the  results  with the TOPS-20 DAYTIME command or the
             OPR command:  SHOW DAYTIME.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To change the date and time to February 29, 1980, 8 a.m.:

                   ___________
                  @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ _____________ ____ _________ ________
                  $^ESET DATE-AND-TIME (TO) 29-FEB-80 800<RET>
                   ____________
                  $DISABLE<RET>
                  @

        FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED
        FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED

             specifies that the /FAST switch is available with the  LOGIN
             command.   This  switch prevents processing of LOGIN.CMD and
             COMAND.CMD files, printing of system mail, and  printing  of
             the notice of new mail.

             This is the default setting.

        NO FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED
        NO FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED

             specifies that the /FAST switch is not  available  with  the
             LOGIN command.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To disallow the use of the /FAST  switch  with  the  TOPS-20
             LOGIN command:

                   ___________
                  @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ __ ________________________
                  $^ESET NO FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED<RET>
                   ____________
                  $DISABLE<RET>
                  @


                                    5-60
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


        LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES
        LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES

             specifies that level-one messages (messages of  interest  to
             all  users)  are  sent  to  terminals  on  the  system.  The
             INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS displays whether or not  level-one
             messages are enabled.

                                 ----- Example -----

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              _____ _______________________
             $^ESET LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>

        NO LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES
        NO LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES

             specifies that level-one messages (messages of  interest  to
             all users) are sent only to the CTY (console terminal).

                                 ----- Example -----

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              _____ __ _______________________
             $^ESET NO LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>

        LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES
        LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES

             specifies that level-zero messages  (messages  primarily  of
             interest  to operations personnel) are sent to all terminals
             on  the  system.   The  INFORMATION  SYSTEM-STATUS  displays
             whether or not level-zero messages are enabled.

                                 ----- Example -----

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              _____ ________________________
             $^ESET LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>

        NO LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES
        NO LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES

             specifies that level-zero messages  (messages  primarily  of
             interest  to  operations personnel) are sent only to the CTY
             (console terminal).

                                 ----- Example -----

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              _____ ________________________
             $^ESET LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>





                                    5-61
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


        LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal
        LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal

             specifies the terminals from which LOGINs will succeed.  The
             value of terminal can be:

                  ANY-TERMINAL
|                 INTERNET-TERMINALS
                  CONSOLE-TERMINAL
                  DECNET-TERMINALS
                  LOCAL-TERMINALS
                  PSEUDO-TERMINALS
                  REMOTE-TERMINALS

             The argument  (terminal)  you  give  adds  to  the  list  of
             terminals allowed.  It does not change the list to only what
             you just typed.

             Before SYSJOB.RUN is processed at system startup, LOGINs are
             allowed  from  PSEUDO-TERMINALS  and  the  CONSOLE-TERMINAL.
             After SYSJOB.RUN is processed, LOGINs are allowed  from  any
             terminal.

                                         NOTE

                 You cannot use this command to allow LOGINs from LAT
                 terminals.   Use  the  START  command  from  the LCP
                 command set.  See Chapter 4 (LCP COMMANDS) for  more
                 information   about   allowing   LOGINs   from   LAT
                 terminals.

                                  ----- Hints -----

             To  check  the  current  LOGINS-ALLOWED,  type  the  TOPS-20
             command INFORMATION (ABOUT) SYSTEM-STATUS.

             To disallow certain terminals, use ^ESET NO  LOGINS-ALLOWED,
             described as the next Argument to the ^ESET command.

                                 ----- Examples -----

             1.  If you previously had LOGINs  at  the  console  terminal
                 only and you also want to allow pseudo-terminal LOGINs:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ ______________      _____________________
                 $^ESET LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) PSEUDO-TERMINALS<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

             2.  To allow LOGINs from anywhere:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ ______________      _________________
                 $^ESET LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) ANY-TERMINAL<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                                    5-62
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


                 @

        NO LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal
        NO LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal

             specifies to disallow LOGINs from  certain  terminals.   The
             value terminal can be:

                  ANY-TERMINAL
|                 INTERNET-TERMINALS
                  CONSOLE-TERMINAL
                  DECNET-TERMINALS
                  LOCAL-TERMINALS
                  PSEUDO-TERMINALS
                  REMOTE-TERMINALS

             Thus, you can  prevent  certain  users  from  accessing  the
             system.   The  command  removes the specified terminals from
             the list of terminals from which LOGINs are allowed.

                                         NOTE

                 You cannot use this command to disallow LOGINs  from
                 LAT  terminals.   Use  the STOP command from the LCP
                 command set.  See Chapter 4 (LCP COMMANDS) for  more
                 information   about   disallowing  LOGINs  from  LAT
                 terminals.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To disallow LOGINs from remote terminals:

                   ___________
                  @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ __ ______________      _____________________
                  $^ESET NO LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) REMOTE-TERMINALS<RET>
                   ____________
                  $DISABLE<RET>
                  @

        MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH 'n'
        MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH 'n'

             specifies a minimum password length to help ensure directory
             security.    The   'n'  must  be  a  value  from  1  to  39,
             representing the minimum number of characters needed  for  a
             password  specification  to the directory.  You can find the
             current setting for the minimum  password  length  with  the
             EXEC command INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS.

        NO MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH
        NO MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH

             specifies that the password must be at least 8 characters in
             length.    This   is   the   default   when   the   argument
             MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH  is  not  specified  in  the   ^ESET
             command.

        OFFLINE-STRUCTURES (timeout interval) mm:ss
        OFFLINE-STRUCTURES (timeout interval) mm:ss
                                    5-63
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


             specifies to enable the offline structure facility  and  set
             the  timeout interval to "mm:ss", where mm is minutes and ss
             is seconds.  The default is  one  (1:00)  minute.   You  can
             specify  from one second (00:01) to fifteen minutes (15:00).
             The time you specify is the length of time  between  when  a
             disk  unit is noticed as offline by the monitor and the time
             when the monitor marks the structure as offline.

        NO OFFLINE-STRUCTURES
        NO OFFLINE-STRUCTURES

             specifies to disable the offline  structure  facility.   The
             TOPS-20  monitor  resumes structure operation as in previous
             releases.

        OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE
        OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE

             specifies that there is an operator present on  the  system.
             It  also  notifies  OPR/ORION  that  form  changing  can  be
             performed on the line printers.

                                 ----- Example -----

             When you return after no operator was present, type:

                   ___________
                  @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ ___________________________
                  $^ESET OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE<RET>
                   ____________
                  $DISABLE<RET>
                  @

        NO OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE
        NO OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE

             specifies there is no operator present on the system.   (The
             INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  SYSTEM-STATUS command displays whether
             or not an operator is in attendance.) This command  prevents
             certain   system   programs,   for   example,  PLEASE,  from
             indefinitely waiting for an operator to  respond.   It  also
             notifies  OPR/ORION  to  not allow any forms changing on the
             line printers.  Be sure to give this command  if  you  leave
             the computer room temporarily or if your shift is ending and
             no operator is coming on duty.

             This is the default setting.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To indicate that  there  is  no  operator  present,  send  a
             message to all users that you are leaving, and then type:

                   ___________
                  @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ __ ___________________________
                  $^ESET NO OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE<RET>
                   ____________
                  $DISABLE<RET>


                                    5-64
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


                  @

        PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|       PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|  
|            specifies  that  certain  combinations  of  characters   are
|            illegal  for  use as passwords.  You can place such words in
|            the   file   SYSTEM:PASSWORD.DICTIONARY   and   have    them
|            automatically matched against newly requested passwords.  If
|            a match occurs, the password is denied and another  must  be
|            selected.
|  
|                                ----- Example -----
|  
                   ___________
|                 @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ ________________________
|                 $^ESET PASSWORD-DICTIONARY<RET>
                   ____________
|                 $DISABLE<RET>
|                 @
|  
        NO PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|       NO PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|  
|            specifies  to  disable  the   PASSWORD-DICTIONARY   feature.
|            Newly-supplied  passwords  are not checked against a list of
|            non-acceptable password combinations.
|  
        PASSWORD-EXPIRATION n
|       PASSWORD-EXPIRATION n
|  
|            specifies the number of days a password is valid  since  the
|            time it was last changed.  The value of n is a number from 1
|            366.  The default number of days is 30.   After  a  password
|            has  expired, the user is allowed to log in, but must change
|            the password immediately.   (The  INFORMATION  SYSTEM-STATUS
|            command displays the number of days a password is valid.)
|  
|                                ----- Example -----
|  
|            To set the password expiration to 45 days, type:
|  
                   ___________
|                 @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ ___________________ _______
|                 $^ESET PASSWORD-EXPIRATION 45<RET>
                   ____________
|                 $DISABLE<RET>
|                 @
|  
        NO PASSWORD-EXPIRATION
|       NO PASSWORD-EXPIRATION
|  
|            specifies to diable the  password-expiration  feature.   The
|            TOPS-20  monitor  does  not  obligate  users to change their
|            password in a specified number of days.

        PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)
        PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)

             specifies that the EXEC is to communicate with your  private


                                    5-65
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


             copy  of the Galaxy subsystem, rather than with the system's
             copy.  For example, when you issue such Galaxy-related  EXEC
             commands  as PRINT or SUBMIT, your private copy of QUASAR (a
             major component of the Galaxy subsystem) gets control.

        NO PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)
        NO PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)

             specifies that the EXEC is no longer to recognize your  copy
             of  the  Galaxy subsystem.  After this command, the system's
             copy handles your GALAXY-related EXEC commands.

        RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) n (TO) m (PERCENT)
        RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) n (TO) m (PERCENT)

             specifies a guarantee of at least a certain  percentage  (m)
             of  run-time  to  a  particular  job  (n).  The n is the job
             number and the m is the percentage of runtime from 1 to 100.
             Then,  from  the  time  a  job  wants  to  run,  the TOPS-20
             scheduler tries to give  the  job  at  least  the  specified
             percentage  of  central  processing time, for as long as the
             job continues to run.  Be extremely cautious about giving  a
             job 100 percent, because you may not be able to give another
             command.  Note that this  command  has  no  effect  if  your
             system is running the class scheduler.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To guarantee 5 percent runtime to job 11:

                   ___________
                  @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ __________________           ________
                  $^ESET RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) 11-<RET>
                        _          _____
                   (TO) 5 (PERCENT)<RET>
                   ____________
                  $DISABLE<RET>
                  @

        NO RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) number
        NO RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) number

             specifies to cancel a run-time guarantee  for  a  particular
             job.

                                 ----- Example -----

             To cancel the runtime guarantee for job 11:

                   ___________
                  @ENABLE<RET>
                   _____ __ __________________           _______
                  $^ESET NO RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) 11<RET>
                   ____________
                  $DISABLE<RET>
                  @

        SYSTEM-ACCESS-CONTROL-JOB
|       SYSTEM-ACCESS-CONTROL-JOB
|  
|            specifies that the Access Control Job (ACJ) is  run  by  the


                                    5-66
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


|            monitor  as part of job 0, where it is more secure.  The ACJ
|            helps govern access to many of the  system's  resources  and
|            services,  reduce  or  prevent  unauthorized  access  to the
|            system, and investigate occurrences of unauthorized  access.
|            It  can  control scheduling classes, the bias control, batch
|            background queue, logging  in,  use  of  physical  resources
|            (tape   drives,   terminals,   structures),   and   enabling
|            capabilities.
|  
|            There  is  no  corresponding  NO   SYSTEM-ACCESS-CONTROL-JOB
|            command.

        TERMINAL n m SPEED (OF INPUT) r (OF OUTPUT) t
        TERMINAL n m SPEED (OF INPUT) r (OF OUTPUT) t

             specifies that terminal (n), or a range of terminals  (n m),
             where  n  is  the  lowest  terminal line number and m is the
             highest, have an input speed of r and an output speed of  t;
             r is the receive baud rate; and t is the transmit baud rate.
             The legal baud rates are 0, 75, 50, 110, 134, 150, 200, 300,
             600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, and 9600.

             This command works like the user command TERMINAL SPEED, but
             it also allows you to set the speeds for any terminal on the
             system.  If you give only one  speed,  it  applies  to  both
             input and output.

                                 ----- Example -----

             1.  To set a terminal's receive and transmit speed to 300:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ ________ __ _____ ________
                 $^ESET TERMINAL 20 SPEED 300<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

             2.  To set all terminals from terminal 30 to terminal 45 to
                 receive speeds of 
                 4800 and transmit speeds of 9600:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ ________ __ __ _____ ____ _________
                 $^ESET TERMINAL 30 45 SPEED 4800 9600<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

        WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
        WORKING-SET-PRELOADING

             specifies that the  entire  working  set  of  a  process  is
             brought  into memory at once when the process is selected to
             run.  Otherwise, this action occurs on a page-by-page  basis
             (demand paging).



                                    5-67
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


             You should enable working set preloading only if your system
             runs  large  compute-bound  jobs.   If your system runs many
             interactive jobs, disable working set  preloading  with  the
             ^ESET NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING command.

             The INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command  displays  whether  or
             not working set preloading is enabled.














































                                    5-68
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


                                 ----- Example -----

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              _____ ___________________________
             $^ESET WORKING-SET-PRELOADING<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>

        NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
        NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING

             specifies that the minimum pages in a process's working  set
             are brought into memory.  Pages are added to the working set
             on a page-by-page  basis  as  they  are  referenced  (demand
             paging).

                                 ----- Example -----

              ___________
             @ENABLE<RET>
              _____ __ ___________________________
             $^ESET NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING<RET>
              ____________
             $DISABLE<RET>


   Restrictions
   Restrictions

   The following are error messages associated with the ^ESET command:

        ?Invalid date format

             You typed the date incorrectly.

        ?Invalid terminal range

             You  must  type  the  lowest  terminal  number  first   when
             specifying a range.

        ?Invalid time format

             You typed the time incorrectly.

        ?Must be between 1 and 39

             You must type a value between 1  and  39  for  the  password
             length (MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH).

        ?Non-digit typed where number required

             You must type a number for the argument value.

        ?Non-octal digit typed where octal number required

             You must type an octal number for the argument value.

        ?Nonexistent job


                                    5-69
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                  (^ESET)
                                  (^ESET)


             You typed a job number that does not exist.

        ?Run time guarantee percentage must be from 1-100

             When you specify the percentage for RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE,  you
             must give a number from 1 to 100.


   Example
   Example

        To see the various arguments to the ^ESET command, type a  ?   in
        place of the argument.


         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         _____ _
        $^ESET ? one of the following:
         CLUSTER-INFORMATION     CLUSTER-SENDALLS
         DATE-AND-TIME           FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED
         LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGE       LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGE
         LOGINS-ALLOWED          MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH
         NO                      OFFLINE-STRUCTURES
         OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE  PRIVATE-QUASAR
         RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE      TERMINAL
         WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
         ____________
        $DISABLE<RET>
        @            



























                                    5-70
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESPEAK)
                                 (^ESPEAK)


   ^ESPEAK - Giving Commands To SYSJOB
   ^ESPEAK - Giving Commands To SYSJOB


   Function
   Function

        The ^ESPEAK command sends commands to SYSJOB, which is run  under
        job  0.   SYSJOB  is  a  system  task  that controls other system
        processes and jobs.  ^ESPEAK allows you to check  the  status  of
        the processes under SYSJOB and restart them, if necessary.


   Format
   Format

        ^ESPEAK (TO SYSJOB)<RET>
        [Please type SYSJOB commands  - end with  ^Z]
         text               (SYSJOB commands)


   Subcommands
   Subcommands

        The SYSJOB commands, which  you  must  use  to  communicate  with
        processes  run  under  SYSJOB,  are explained below.  For ease of
        discussion, they are not alphabetical.


        PROCESS COMMANDS
        PROCESS COMMANDS

             RUN filespec of program
             RUN filespec of program

                  This command creates an inferior process and  runs  the
                  specified  program in it.  The process is identified by
                  a name consisting of the first six  characters  of  the
                  name portion of the file specification.

             KILL name
             KILL name

                  This command kills the process of the specified name.

             PURGE process number
             PURGE process number

                  This command kills the process of the specified number.
                  Process  numbers  appear  in  the  first  column of the
                  STATUS command display.  With the  PURGE  command,  you
                  can distinguish among processes having the same name.

             FREEZE name
             FREEZE name

                  This command  temporarily  suspends  execution  of  the
                  specified  process (name).  This may later be undone by
                  the RESUME command.



                                    5-71
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESPEAK)
                                 (^ESPEAK)


             RESUME name
             RESUME name

                  This command continues execution of the process  having
                  the  specified  name,  thus  undoing  the  effect  of a
                  previous FREEZE.

             DUMP process number
             DUMP process number

                  This command allows you  to  obtain  a  snapshot  of  a
                  process'    memory   without   disturbing   operations.
                  Execution of the process is temporarily suspended;  the
                  ACs  and  memory  contents  are  saved in file xxx.DMP,
                  where xxx  is  the  process  name;  then  execution  is
                  resumed.  Refer to Example 4.


        JOB COMMANDS
        JOB COMMANDS

             JOB ident text-string
             JOB ident text-string

                  This command transmits text to a job via  a  PTY.   The
                  ident  is an arbitrary small integer not related to the
                  system job number of the  job  being  controlled.   You
                  should  choose  the  smallest number (beginning with 0)
                  not presently  in  use  when  a  new  job  is  desired.
                  Thereafter, that number identifies that job for SYSJOB.

                  The  text-string  is  a  string  of   system   commands
                  surrounded  by  any  character not occurring within the
                  string, for example, /a  string  of  characters/.   The
                  string   may   include   <RET>,  other  format  control
                  characters, and control characters.  You must  indicate
                  a  control character by typing an up-arrow (^) followed
                  by the character.  If you want to indicate an up-arrow,
                  when  it  is  not  being  used  to  indicate  a control
                  character, type two up-arrows.  If there is no  job  in
                  existence  when a JOB command is executed, a ^C is sent
                  ahead of the  specified  text  to  create  one.   Note,
                  however,  that  the job is not automatically logged in,
                  so a LOGIN command must be given via the JOB command.

                  Any output from the job is handled by SYSJOB and  typed
                  on  the  CTY.   Each  line  is  prefixed with the ident
                  number of the job which produced the output.  Output is
                  only  typed  at the end of a line, so prompt characters
                  coming from a job are not seen until the  remainder  of
                  the line has been input.

             KILLJOB ident
             KILLJOB ident

                  This command forces a LOGOUT of the specified job.


                                    5-72
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESPEAK)
                                 (^ESPEAK)


             CCJOB ident
             CCJOB ident

                  This command transmits two ^C's to  the  specified  job
                  and  holds  any  further input until the ^C's have been
                  processed.


        OTHER COMMANDS
        OTHER COMMANDS

             STATUS
             STATUS

                  This command prints, on the  CTY,  the  status  of  all
                  existing inferior processes and jobs presently known to
                  SYSJOB.

             RELOAD
             RELOAD

                  This  command  causes  SYSJOB  to  reload  and  restart
                  itself.  Use this command with great caution, as it can
                  cause an abrupt termination of all  inferior  processes
                  and  detach  any PTY-controlled jobs.  If possible, you
                  should kill all processes and log out all  jobs  before
                  the RELOAD is executed.  This command allows you to put
                  a  new  version  of  SYSJOB   into   operation   during
                  timesharing  and  provides  the possibility of recovery
                  after a severe SYSJOB malfunction.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        All text on the line following the prompt message up to CTRL/Z is
        input  to  SYSJOB.   Actually,  the text is written into the file
        SYSTEM:SYSJOB.COMMANDS.  Then, a  wakeup  request  is  issued  to
        SYSJOB  which  reads  the  file  and performs the commands in it.
        Thus, it is equivalent to:

             COPY (FROM) TTY: (TO) SYSTEM:SYSJOB.COMMANDS

        as soon as SYSJOB wakes up and reads the file.

        The text must consist of SYSJOB commands, which are described  in
        this  section  under  the Subcommands heading.  The same commands
        are  recognized  in  both  the  SYSJOB.COMMANDS  file   and   the
        SYSJOB.RUN  file,  which  SYSJOB  reads  at  system startup.  The
        commands are in the form  of  a  keyword,  possibly  followed  by
        arguments.  The commands (text) can be divided into three types:

             1.  Those affecting an inferior process:

                      RUN, KILL, FREEZE, RESUME



                                    5-73
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESPEAK)
                                 (^ESPEAK)


             2.  Those  affecting  a  job  being  controlled  by  a   PTY
                 (pseudo-terminal):

                      JOB, KILLJOB, CCJOB

             3.  Others:

                      STATUS, RELOAD

   Hint
   Hint

        All SYSJOB output appears on the CTY.  Therefore, if you are at a
        terminal  other  than  the CTY and you want to see SYSJOB output,
        enable for OPERATOR or WHEEL capability,  TALK  to  the  terminal
        that  is  the  CTY,  give  the ^ESPEAK command followed by SYSJOB
        commands, and type BREAK after you have seen the output.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        The following  error  message  is  associated  with  the  ^ESPEAK
        command:

        ? CAN'T GET JFN ON <SYSTEM>SYSJOB.COMMANDS

             You have typed ENABLE but you do not have OPERATOR or  WHEEL
             capability.       Therefore,      you      cannot      write
             SYSTEM:SYSJOB.COMMANDS.  You should log into an account that
             has  OPERATOR  capability  (for example, OPERATOR), and then
             type ENABLE and reissue the ^ESPEAK command.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  A sample SYSTEM:SYSJOB.RUN file:

            RUN SYS:INFO
            JOB 0 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR
            ENABLE
            ^ESET LOGIN PSEUDO
            ^ESET LOGIN CONSOLE
            ^ESET OPERATOR
            PTYCON
            GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO
            / 
            JOB 1 \LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR
            ENABLE
|           GET SYS:MOUNTR
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:MAILER
|           START/STAY


                                    5-74
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESPEAK)
                                 (^ESPEAK)


|           GET SYS:MAPPER
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:SPRINT
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:NMAIL
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:DMAILR
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:MLSRV
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:ORION
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:QUASAR
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:LPTSPL
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:LPTSPL
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:CDRIVE
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:BATCON
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:FAL
|           START/STAY
            \
            JOB 2 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR
            ENABLE
|           RUN SYS:NMLT20
            /

        2.  To check the status of SYSJOB's inferior processes and jobs:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ____________
            $^ESPEAK<RET>
             [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH ^Z]
            STATUS<RET>
            ^Z
             ^
             |
            <CTRL/Z>

            Remember that the output will go to the CTY.  If you  are  at
            another terminal, see the Hint above.

            A sample of the CTY output follows.

            OPR>STATUS
            SYSJOB status at 25-Sep-79 1008
|             0 INFO   DISMS at 1012  25-Sep-79 1008
              0: No job
              1: Job 2, TTY207, (PRIV)


                                    5-75
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESPEAK)
                                 (^ESPEAK)


              2: Job 3, TTY210, (PRIV)

            OPR>

        3.  To restart INFO:

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ____________
            $^ESPEAK<RET>
             [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMAND - END WITH ^Z]
            RUN SYS:INFO<RET>
            ^Z
             ^
             |
            <CTRL/Z>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

        4.  To examine a process, first give the STATUS command to obtain
            the number assigned to that process:

             _______            _____
            $^ESPEAK (TO SYSJOB)<RET>
             [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH Z]

            ___________
            STATUS<RET>
            <CTRL/Z>
            @STATUS
            SYSJOB status at 22-Jul-81 1110
              0 ACS    DISMS at 151  22-Jul-81 1110

            The output  above  shows  that  there  is  only  one  process
            currently  known  to  SYSJOB.   To  examine it, give the DUMP
            command, and specify the process number, which appears in the
            leftmost column of the status display:

             _______            _____
            $^ESPEAK (TO SYSJOB)<RET>
             [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH Z]

            ____ ______
            DUMP 0<RET>
            <CTRL/Z>

            Output similar to the following appears on the CTY, providing
            you  with  the  name  of  the  file  that  contains the saved
            process-related information:

            DUMP 0
              0 ACS    DISMS at 151  22-Jul-81 1111
            %DUMPING FORK ADDRESS SPACE TO FILE ACS.DMP.3

            Use the FILDDT program to examine the file.




                                    5-76












                                 CHAPTER 6
                                 CHAPTER 6

                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



   6.1  INTRODUCTION TO PTYCON
   6.1  INTRODUCTION TO PTYCON

   Your TOPS-20 operating system considers all  jobs  to  be  timesharing
   jobs;  thus,  each  job must be associated with a timesharing terminal
   (TTY).  In some situations, however, it is inconvenient to  require  a
   timesharing  terminal  to  be associated with every job on the system;
   for example, where many jobs are  needed  for  a  single  application.
   PTYCON  provides  a  method whereby a single job running from a single
   timesharing terminal can control many subjobs simultaneously.  This is
   accomplished by implementing a "device" called a pseudo-terminal (PTY)
   that, in  effect,  is  a  software  simulation  of  a  terminal.   The
   controlling  job,  PTYCON,  can  send information to a PTY and receive
   information from a PTY.

   PTYCON  starts  running  subjobs  by  means  of  pseudo-terminals  and
   controls  each subjob by sending appropriate information (for example,
   the commands and/or data you give it) over  the  PTY  controlling  the
   subjob.   You can run as many subjobs as there are PTYs on the system,
   up to a maximum of 24.  PTYCON allows you to remain  at  one  terminal
   and still control multiple jobs by means of multiple PTYs.



   6.2  STARTING PTYCON
   6.2  STARTING PTYCON

   PTYCON is normally started  automatically  on  your  console  terminal
   (CTY)  by  SYSJOB when the system is brought up.  At this time, PTYCON
   reads and processes the file <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO (usually  referred  to
   as   an   "Auto-File").   This  file  contains  commands  for  PTYCON.
   Following is example of a <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO  file  that  defines  and
   starts the subjobs OPR, CHECKD, and FILCOM:

        SILENCE
        LOG
        DEFINE 0 OPR
        OPR-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
        DEFINE 1 CKD


                                    6-1
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



        CKD-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
        DEFINE 2 FIL
        FIL-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
        OPR-ENABLE
        OPR-OPR
        CKD-ENABLE
        CKD-CHECKD
        FIL-FILCOM
        NO SILENCE
        WHAT ALL
        CONNECT OPR
          <RET>                  ;Line contains a carriage return

   This processing consists of bringing up OPR  and  any  other  programs
   that you might need such as CHECKD and FILCOM.  If PTYCON does not use
   PTYCON.ATO automatically, you can attach to PTYCON and, after you  see
   the prompt PTYCON>, type:

        ___ _______________________
        GET <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO<RET>

   For example,

         ______ _____________
        @SYSTAT OPERATOR<RET>

           0   DET  SYSJOB  OPERATOR
           1   205  PTYCON  OPERATOR
           2   207  MFORK   OPERATOR
           3   210  NETCON  OPERATOR
           4   211  OPR     OPERATOR
           6   212  ACJ     OPERATOR
           7   213  FRECHK  OPERATOR
           8   DET  PERF    OPERATOR
           9   214  IBMSPL  OPERATOR
          22     3  EXEC    OPERATOR
          27   DET  EXEC    OPERATOR
         ______ ________ ______
        @ATTACH OPERATOR 1<RET>
                                      _____
         [ATTACHED TO TTY102, CONFIRM]<RET>
                         _____
        PASSWORD:        <RET>
        _____
        <RET>
                ___ _______________________
        PTYCON> GET <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO<RET>
        PTYCON> SILENCE
        PTYCON.LOG.1
        PTYCON> WHAT ALL
        OPR(0)     39       OPERATOR      OPR       TO         0:0:0
        CKD(1)     36       OPERATOR      CHECKD    TO         0:0:0
        FIL(2)     32       OPERATOR      FILCOM    TO         0:0:0
        PTYCON>
        **** OPR(0) 09:00:38 ****
        OPR>
        **** CKD(1) 09:00:39 ****
        CHECKD>


                                    6-2
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



        **** FIL(2) 09:00:40 ****
        *
        PTYCON> CONNECT OPR
        [Connected to subjob OPR(0)]

        OPR>

   You could also follow the GET with a different file  specification  to
   use a special ATO file.

   If the output from SYSTAT OPERATOR showed that PTYCON was not running,
   you must start it yourself.  To do this, type PTYCON at system command
   level.  When PTYCON responds with its prompt, type the GET command  to
   run the auto file.

         ___________
        @PTYCON<RET>
                ___ _______________________
        PTYCON> GET <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO<RET>
        PTYCON> SILENCE
        PTYCON.LOG.1
                .
                .
                .
        OPR>

   The following is an example of the output generated  by  PTYCON  after
   the TOPS-20 monitor starts.

        SJ  0: $PTYCON
        SJ  0: PTYCON> GET <SYSTEM>:PTYCON.ATO
        SJ  0: PTYCON> SILENCE
        SJ  0: PTYCON.LOG.1
        SJ  0: PTYCON> WHAT ALL
        SJ  0: OPR(0)      39     OPERATOR   OPR       TO       0:0:0
        SJ  0: CKD(1)      36     OPERATOR   CHECKD    TO       0:0:0
        SJ  0: FIL(2)      32     OPERATOR   FILCOM    TO       0:0:0
        SJ  0: PTYCON>
        SJ  0: **** OPR(0) 09:00:38 ****
        SJ  0: OPR>
        SJ  0: **** CKD(1) 09:00:39 ****
        SJ  0: CHECKD>
        SJ  0: **** FIL(2) 09:00:40 ****
        SJ  0: *
        SJ  0: PTYCON> CONNECT OPR
        SJ  0: 
        SJ  0: OPR>

   It is important to look at this output when the system starts to check
   whether  the  proper programs have been started.  If you attach to the
   PTYCON job, you should also give a WHAT ALL command to PTYCON to check
   the status of these programs.



                                    6-3
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



   The commands to start and control programs under  PTYCON  are  in  the
   file  SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO.   Your  System Manager must decide what those
   commands should be.  If they differ from those in the PTYCON.ATO  file
   supplied,  you  must  change the file with an editor.  The commands in
   this file can be in uppercase or lowercase.

   The PTYCON.ATO file normally runs OPR, and any other service  programs
   that your System Manager decides to run as subjobs of PTYCON.



   6.3  COMMUNICATION WITH PTYCON AND ITS SUBJOBS
   6.3  COMMUNICATION WITH PTYCON AND ITS SUBJOBS

   6.3.1  Subjobs
   6.3.1  Subjobs

   A subjob is a job running on a pseudo-terminal (PTY) under control  of
   PTYCON.   PTYCON allows you to start and control as many jobs as there
   are pseudo-terminals (PTYs) available on your system, but  never  more
   than 24.  To find out how many PTYs are available on your system, type
   the EXEC command INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE DEVICES.  To  find  out
   how many PTYs are in use by PTYCON, type the PTYCON command WHAT ALL.

   Each subjob is identified by a unique number from 0 to n-1, where n is
   the  maximum number of PTYs available on your system.  For example, if
   your system can have 24 PTYs, the subjobs can be numbered  from  0  to
   23.   Each  subjob  is  assigned  a  number when you use the DEFINE or
   CONNECT command to start the subjob.

   To make it easier for you to keep track of the subjobs, you  can  also
   use  the  DEFINE  command  to give a subjob a name.  A subjob name can
   consist of up to five alphanumeric characters.  If you  type  in  more
   than  five  characters,  PTYCON  (in most cases) truncates the name to
   five characters.

   Before you try to start a subjob under PTYCON, be sure that PTYCON  is
   running.   If  it  is,  you should see the prompt PTYCON>.  To get the
   prompt, you might have to type POP or  the  PTYCON  escape  character,
   which  is  <CTRL/X>  by default.  (See the PTY commands CONNECT, PUSH,
   and REDEFINE.

   When PTYCON is running and has printed its prompt,  PTYCON>,  you  can
   communicate with it or its subjobs in the following ways:

        1.  You can type a single- or multiple-line PTYCON  command  (see
            Section   6.5  for  a  complete  description  of  all  PTYCON
            commands).

        2.  You can type a single-line  subjob  command  to  an  existing
            subjob.  A subjob command is:

                 PTYCON>n-text


                                    6-4
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



            where n is the subjob name or number and text  is  a  TOPS-20
            command or input to a program running under subjob n.


                                    NOTE

                  n cannot be a subjob  name  longer  than
                  five  characters.   You must type in the
                  subjob name exactly as  shown  when  you
                  type  in  a  question  mark  (?)  at the
                  PTYCON prompt (PTYCON>).


   3.  You can give the CONNECT command to PTYCON to connect to a subjob.
       Then  you  can  communicate  directly  with  the  subjob by typing
       exactly what you would type to a job not under PTYCON.   To  later
       return  to PTYCON command level, type the PTYCON escape character,
       which is <CTRL/X> by default.

   4.  You can give the PUSH command to  PTYCON  to  perform  a  task  at
       TOPS-20  command  level.  You can type commands or run programs as
       you would under any job, but you do not have to log in a job.   To
       return to PTYCON command level, type POP.

   In communicating with a subjob, you can use all the  standard  TOPS-20
   features.    You  can  use  <CTRL/C>,  <CTRL/T>,  <CTRL/R>,  <CTRL/U>,
   recognition, rubout, DDT, EDIT, TV, languages,  and  system  commands.
   However, there are some restrictions.

        1.  You can never pass the current PTYCON escape character  to  a
            subjob,  because  it has a special purpose.  (See the CONNECT
            command.)

        2.  <CTRL/\> (control backslash) cannot be passed  to  a  job  or
            subjob  from  the  CTY,  because  it  causes you to enter the
            console processor command language  (PARSER).   If  you  type
            <CTRL/\> by mistake, immediately type QUIT.

        3.  If you are giving a single-line subjob command as:

                         _________ ____________ ______
                 PTYCON> OPR-ABORT BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>

            you cannot use recognition, because the command is not passed
            to the system until you press RETURN or LINE FEED.

        4.  <CTRL/H> does not reprint a faulty command up to the point of
            error.






                                    6-5
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



   6.3.2  Creating Subjobs
   6.3.2  Creating Subjobs

   To create a subjob, use either the CONNECT or  DEFINE  command.   When
   you  give  either command with a number that has not yet been assigned
   to a subjob, you create a subjob with that number.  If you type ESCAPE
   in  place  of a number in the DEFINE command, you create a subjob with
   the next free subjob number.  The DEFINE command also  allows  you  to
   associate a name with the subjob.

                                    NOTE

           Whenever you create a subjob, you must then log in  to
           get  a system job number, as you do for any other job.
           If you enable your privileges,  you  can  use  a  null
           password if you log in under the same name that PTYCON
           is logged in under.

   For example, you use CONNECT to create a subjob:

                _______ ______
        PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
        [Connected to subjob 0]

          Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4(3167)
         ___ ________ ___ _____________
        @LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
          Job 26 on TTY211 29-JAN-79 12:41
         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ________
        $OPR<RET>
        OPR>

   At this point, you can give commands directly to the  job.   When  you
   want to return to PTYCON command level, type CTRL/X.

   Once a subjob exists, you can communicate with it by:

         o  Sending commands through PTYCON

         o  Connecting directly to the subjob



   6.3.3  Communicating with Subjobs through PTYCON
   6.3.3  Communicating with Subjobs through PTYCON

   You can send commands to subjobs while your terminal is at the PTYCON>
   prompt.  The format is:

        PTYCON> n-text

   where

        n         is the subjob name or number, followed by a hyphen



                                    6-6
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



        text      is a TOPS-20 command or program input to be sent to the
                  subjob

                                    NOTE

              n cannot be  a  subjob  name  longer  than  five
              characters.   You  must  type in the subjob name
              exactly as shown when you  type  in  a  question
              mark (?) at the PTYCON prompt (PTYCON>).

   The subjob name is an alternate way to  specify  a  subjob.   Use  the
   DEFINE command to define a subjob name.

   When you are giving commands to a subjob, be sure  that  you  know  if
   your subjob is waiting for program input or if it is at system command
   level.  The last character output by the subjob is "@" or "$" if it is
   at  system  command  level,  and  a  program-specific  prompt if it is
   awaiting program input.  If it is awaiting program input and you  want
   to  give it a system command, first send a <CTRL/C> (followed by <RET>
   to end the command).  Then, send the desired system command.   In  the
   case  of  OPR  as  a subjob, type EXIT to the OPR> prompt (followed by
   <RET>) to get to system command level.

   PTYCON accepts single- or  multiple-line  commands  after  the  prompt
   PTYCON>.   If  the PTYCON command line is longer than the maximum line
   length allowed by your terminal, you can continue typing  the  command
   past  the  end  of  the  line and onto the next line, without pressing
   RETURN.  PTYCON accepts command components that  are  divided  between
   lines.   If  you  want  to  avoid  divided  words,  use the hyphen (-)
   continuation character.  At the end of the first line, type  a  hyphen
   and press RETURN.  Then, continue typing the command on the next line.
   At the end of the command, press RETURN to confirm the command.

   The following example sends a multiple line command to a subjob.

               ______ _______ ____ ________ __ __ __ __ __ ___ ______
        PTYCON>ACCEPT (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS) 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, -<RET>
        ___ ___ _______
        14, 16, 17<RET>

   The following example creates OPR as a subjob, logs it in, enables it,
   and starts it:

         ___________
        @PTYCON<RET>
                ______ _ ________
        PTYCON> DEFINE 0 OPR<RET>
                _______ ________ ___ _____________
        PTYCON> OPR-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
        PTYCON>
        **** OPR(0) 11:32:28 ****
         Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
        @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
         Job 55 on TTY222 1-Dec-84 11:32:28,
         Last Login 28-Nov-84 10:11:37
        @


                                    6-7
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



                _______________
        PTYCON> OPR-ENABLE<RET>
        **** OPR(0) 11:32:45 ****
        ENABLE
        $
                ____________
        PTYCON> OPR-OPR<RET>
        **** OPR(0) 11:32:50 ****
        OPR
        PTYCON>
        **** OPR(0) 11:32:53 ****
        OPR>
        PTYCON>

   Another example of creating a subjob, logging it in,  and  sending  it
   other commands follows:

         ___________
        @PTYCON<RET>
                ______ ______
        PTYCON> DEFINE 2<RET>
                _____ ____ ___ __________
        PTYCON> 2-LOG DEMO FOO 10400<RET>
        PTYCON>
        **** 2 12:28:39 ****

         Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
        @LOG DEMO 10400
         Job 17 on TTY225 1-Dec-84 12:28:39,
         Last Login 28-Nov-84 11:58:16
        @
                _____________
        PTYCON> 2-FILCOM<RET>
        PTYCON>
        **** 2 12:28:55 ****
        FILCOM
        *
                ___________________
        PTYCON> 2-=A.ATO,B.ATO<RET>
        PTYCON>
        **** 2 12:29:09 ****
        =A.ATO,B.ATO

        No differences encountered

        *
                _________
        PTYCON> 2-^C<RET>
        PTYCON>
        **** 2 12:29:20 ****
        ^C
        @
        @
                ________ ______
        PTYCON> 2-SYSTAT .<RET>
        PTYCON>
        **** 2 12:29:34 ****
        SYSTAT .
          17*  103  EXEC    DEMO
        @
        PTYCON>

                                    6-8
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



   6.3.4  Communicating Directly with Subjobs
   6.3.4  Communicating Directly with Subjobs

   To communicate with a subjob by direct  connection,  use  the  CONNECT
   command, type exactly what you want to communicate to the subjob, then
   finish with the PTYCON escape character, normally CTRL/X.

   When you connect to a subjob that has not been logged  in,  the  first
   character that you type causes the identification message to be output
   on your terminal.  For example,

                _______ ______
        PTYCON> CONNECT 3<RET>
        [Connected to subjob 3]
        _____
        <RET>
         Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
         ___ ________ _____________
        @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR<RET>
         Job 19 on TTY210 18-Nov-84 11:12:00,
         Last Login 17-Dec-84 10:12:51
         ___________
        @DIRECT<RET>

          <OPERATOR>
         A.ATO.1
         B.ATO.1
         PTYCON.ATO.1
           .LOG.1

         Total of 4 files
        @^X
          ^
          |
        <CTRL/X>
        PTYCON>

   You can also start the subjob OPR with the CONNECT command.   This  is
   helpful  when  OPR has not been started or when you want multiple OPRs
   at your installation.  For example,

         ___________
        @PTYCON<RET>
                _______ ______
        PTYCON> CONNECT 3<RET>
        [Connected to subjob 3]
        _____
        <RET>
         BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
         ___ ________ _____________
        @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR<RET>
         Job 53 on TTY232 2-Dec-84 08:37:25,
         Last Login 1-Dec-84 08:15:27
         ___________
        @ENABLE<RET>
         ________
        $OPR<RET>
            _
        OPR>? one of the following:
         ABORT      ALIGN     BACKSPACE      CANCEL     CLOSE
         CONTINUE   DEFINE    DISABLE        DISMOUNT   ENABLE
         ENTER      EXIT      FORWARDSPACE   HELP       HOLD
         IDENTIFY   MODIFY    MOUNT          NEXT       PUSH


                                    6-9
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



         RELEASE    REPORT    REQUEUE        RESPOND    ROUTE
         SEND       SET       SHOW           SHUTDOWN   START
         STOP       SUPPRESS  SWITCH         TAKE       UNDEFINE
         WAIT
          or one of the following:
         LCP   NCP















































                                    6-10
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



        OPR>^X
             ^
             |
          <CTRL/X>
                  
        PTYCON>

                                    NOTE

           You cannot send the current PTYCON escape character to
           a subjob, because that character returns you to PTYCON
           command level if you are connected to a subjob, or  it
           aborts  the  current  command  if  you  are  at PTYCON
           command level.  However, you can change that character
           with the REDEFINE command to PTYCON.



   6.3.5  Subjob Output
   6.3.5  Subjob Output

   You can do the following with the output from subjobs of PTYCON.

         o  Allow it to be typed on your terminal

         o  Buffer it until you request it

         o  Save it in a file

         o  Discard it

   The PTYCON commands that control the  output  of  the  subjobs  either
   collectively or individually are:

         o  ACCEPT

         o  REFUSE

         o  LOG

         o  DISCARD

   If REFUSE is set for a subjob, its output is typed  on  your  terminal
   only  when  you are connected to the subjob.  Otherwise, the output is
   buffered until you request it with the ACCEPT (or NO  REFUSE)  command
   or  until  you connect to the subjob.  If DISCARD is set for a subjob,
   again its output is  printed  on  your  terminal  only  when  you  are
   connected  to  the subjob.  Otherwise, the output is discarded, except
   for recording it in a file if the PTYCON LOG command was given.

   If neither REFUSE nor DISCARD has been set for a subjob, the  subjob's
   output  is  printed  on your terminal.  If PTYCON is at command level,


                                    6-11
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



   output from each subjob is preceded by a header containing the  subjob
   name and/or number and the time.  If you are connected to a subjob:

         o  All output from the  connected  subjob  is  printed  on  your
            terminal without headers.

         o  All other subjob output  is  printed  on  your  terminal  and
            preceded by a header containing the name and/or number of the
            subjob giving output and the time.  The output is followed by
            a  trailer containing the name and/or number of the connected
            subjob and the time.

                                        NOTE

                    If you are  at  command  level  and  you  are
                    entering   a   command,   PTYCON  temporarily
                    suspends output from the  subjobs  until  the
                    command  is  confirmed with a carriage return
                    or line feed.
   For example, you are connected to subjob 3 and output  is  typed  from
   subjob   0,   which  is  defined  as  OPR,  beginning  with  a  header
   (**** OPR(0) hh:mm:ss ****).   (Where  hh:mm:ss   is   the   time   in
   hours:minutes:seconds.)  When  the  output  from subjob 0 is done, the
   trailer is output, indicating that the currently connected subjob is 3
   (**** 3 hh:mm:ss ****).

                _______ ______
        PTYCON> CONNECT 3<RET>
        [Connected to subjob 3]
        **** OPR(0) 12:34:27 ****

        12:34:32        Printer 1         --End--
                        Job DEMO1 Seq # 2599 For: CCOOK
        OPR>

        **** 3 12:34:37 ****
         BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
        @



   6.3.6  Logging Out Subjobs
   6.3.6  Logging Out Subjobs

   When you have completely finished using a subjob, you can log  it  out
   and  deassign  its  subjob  number  with  the  KILL command.  (See the
   description of the KILL command to PTYCON.

   You can log out a subjob by specifying either the subjob name  or  the
   subjob  number.   For  example,  to  log  out  subjob 0, which is also
   defined as subjob OPR:

                ____ ________
        PTYCON> KILL OPR<RET>


                                    6-12
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



        PTYCON>

        or

                ____ ______
        PTYCON> KILL 0<RET>
        PTYCON>

   To leave PTYCON permanently, you should be certain that  you  have  no
   more  use  for any of the subjobs; then use KILL ALL and EXIT.  During
   timesharing, you should never do this to  the  PTYCON-controlling  OPR
   and  any other utility program (such as, DUMPER or CHECKD) because you
   might need them to service users.

   For example, you log out all subjobs and EXIT  from  PTYCON  before  a
   system shutdown for preventive maintenance:

                ____ ________
        PTYCON> KILL ALL<RET>
                _________
        PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
        @

   If you want to leave PTYCON temporarily  to  do  something  at  system
   command level and not use a subjob, use the PUSH command, perform your
   commands, and return to PTYCON with POP.  (See the example  under  the
   description of the PUSH command.)



   6.4  PTYCON COMMAND FEATURES
   6.4  PTYCON COMMAND FEATURES

   PTYCON has the same command recognition, question  mark,  and  control
   character  features  offered  by  the  EXEC,  OPR,  and  other TOPS-20
   programs.  Following is a summary of these features:



   6.4.1  Listing Available Commands and Arguments with a Question Mark
   6.4.1  Listing Available Commands and Arguments with a Question Mark


        1.  To list all the PTYCON commands, type a question mark at  the
            PTYCON prompt.

                    _
            PTYCON> ? a command, one of the following:
            ACCEPT  BELL     CONNECT  DEFINE  DISCARD  EXIT      GET
            HELP    KILL     LOG      NO      PUSH     REDEFINE  REFUSE
            SAVE    SILENCE  WHAT
             or a subjob name, ALL
             or a subjob number
            PTYCON>

        2.  To list all the PTYCON commands that  begin  with  a  certain
            letter, type the letter followed by a question mark.


                                    6-13
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



                    __
            PTYCON> R?  a command, one of the following:
            REDEFINE   REFUSE
            PTYCON>

        3.  To list the arguments to a PTYCON command, type  the  command
            name followed by a space and a question mark.

                    _______ _
            PTYCON> CONNECT ?  subjob number or subjob name
            PTYCON>



   6.4.2  Using Recognition Input
   6.4.2  Using Recognition Input

   PTYCON recognition input works with commands and subjob names.  To use
   recognition  input, type enough letters of a command or subjob name to
   make it unique,  and  then  type  <ESC>.   PTYCON  responds  with  the
   remainder  of  the  command  and its guidewords or the complete subjob
   name.

   PTYCON recognizes command names before subjob names.  For example,  if
   you  have  a  subjob  named LOOK and you type LO<ESC>, PTYCON responds
   with the LOG command.



   6.5  PTYCON COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
   6.5  PTYCON COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

   The commands to PTYCON with their guide words in parentheses are shown
   in the PTYCON help message below.

        ACCEPT (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS)   *
        BELL (WHEN OUTPUT WAITING)   *
        CONNECT (TO SUBJOB)
        DEFINE (SUBJOB #)
        DISCARD (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOB)   *
        EXIT (FROM PTYCON)
        GET (COMMANDS FROM FILE)
        HELP (MESSAGE)
        KILL (SUBJOB)
        LOG (OUTPUT TO FILE)   *
        PUSH (EXEC LEVEL)
        REDEFINE (PTYCON ESCAPE CHARACTER TO BE)
        REFUSE (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS)   *
        SAVE (INPUT IN FILE)   *
        SILENCE (ALL OUTPUT TO TERMINAL)   *
        WHAT (IS STATE OF SUBJOB)

        "*" MEANS THE COMMAND CAN BE PRECEDED BY "NO" TO REVERSE ITS
        MEANING



                                    6-14
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



        THE ESCAPE CHARACTER TO RETURN TO COMMAND LEVEL IS:  ^X

                                    NOTE

           In the descriptions of  the  PTYCON  commands  in  the
           sections  that  follow,  n represents a subjob name or
           number.  ALL represents all subjobs.














































                                    6-15
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (ACCEPT)
                                  (ACCEPT)


   ACCEPT - Accepting Output on Your Terminal
   ACCEPT - Accepting Output on Your Terminal



   Function
   Function

        The ACCEPT command sets your terminal to receive output from  the
        specified subjobs.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> ACCEPT n,...,n

        PTYCON> ACCEPT ALL

        or

        PTYCON> NO ACCEPT n,...,n

        PTYCON> NO ACCEPT ALL


   Argument
   Argument

        n                  specifies a subjob number.  You can specify up
                           to  24  (0  -  23) subjob numbers separated by
                           commas.  If you defined a name for the subjob,
                           you can specify the name instead of the subjob
                           number.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        The ACCEPT command is the normal mode of operation.

        When  used  after  NO  ACCEPT  or  REFUSE,  the  ACCEPT   command
        immediately  types on your terminal any available output from the
        specified subjobs and continues to do so as it becomes available.
        If  you  do not specify any subjobs, ALL is automatically printed
        and assumed.

        NO ACCEPT is equivalent to REFUSE.  If you  do  not  specify  any
        subjobs, ALL is assumed.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You ACCEPT output from all subjobs on your terminal:

                    ______ ________
            PTYCON> ACCEPT ALL<RET>


                                    6-16
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (ACCEPT)
                                  (ACCEPT)


            PTYCON>

        2.  You specify NO ACCEPT for subjobs 7, 15, 19,  and  23,  which
            are  OPRs,  so  that  your terminal receives output only from
            subjob OPR(0):

                    __ ______ _______________
            PTYCON> NO ACCEPT 7,15,19,23<RET>
            PTYCON>













































                                    6-17
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (BELL)
                                   (BELL)


   BELL - Sounding Bell for Output Waiting
   BELL - Sounding Bell for Output Waiting



   Function
   Function

        The BELL command rings your terminal bell every  ten  seconds  to
        indicate  that  a subjob has output waiting to be printed on your
        terminal.  This is referred to as a refused subjob.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> BELL

        or

        PTYCON> NO BELL


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        The BELL command is the normal mode of operation.

        Therefore, you need to give the BELL command only when  you  want
        to cancel a NO BELL command that you previously issued.

        When you give the PUSH command to PTYCON,  the  output  from  all
        subjobs  is  refused, unless it is already being discarded (refer
        to the DISCARD command).  The BELL command also applies to  these
        refused subjobs.

        NO BELL suppresses any bell, indicating that a refused subjob has
        some  output.   Consequently,  you  are  not warned that there is
        output waiting.


   Example
   Example

        1.  You specify NO BELL to turn off the  bell  sound  for  output
            waiting:

                    __ _________
            PTYCON> NO BELL<RET>
            PTYCON>









                                    6-18
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (CONNECT)
                                 (CONNECT)


   CONNECT - Connecting to a Subjob
   CONNECT - Connecting to a Subjob



   Function
   Function

        The CONNECT command connects your terminal to a specified subjob,
        such  that the subjob appears to be a normal timesharing job that
        is not running under PTYCON.


   Format
   Format

        PTYCON> CONNECT n


   Argument
   Argument

        n                  specifies a subjob number.   You  can  specify
                           any  number  from  0  to 23.  If you defined a
                           name for  the  subjob,  you  can  specify  the
                           subjob name instead of the subjob number.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        After issuing the CONNECT command, all commands that you type are
        passed  directly  to  the subjob until you type the PTYCON escape
        character, which is CTRL/X by  default.   You  can  redefine  the
        escape character with the REDEFINE command to PTYCON.

        As soon as you connect to  a  subjob,  you  receive  the  message
        [Connected  to  subjob name(n)] or [Connected to subjob n].  Then
        any output that was being buffered for that subjob by the  REFUSE
        or NO ACCEPT command is printed on your terminal.

        If you do not specify a subjob,  PTYCON  connects  your  terminal
        either  to  the  last  connected  subjob  or  to  the last subjob
        defined, whichever was done most  recently.   If  you  specify  a
        valid  subjob number that you have not defined, a new subjob with
        that number is created for you.  However, you  cannot  specify  a
        subjob name that has not been defined.


   Hint
   Hint

        When you are connected  to  a  subjob,  type  the  PTYCON  escape
        character,  CTRL/X by default, to return to PTYCON.  Then you see
        the PTYCON prompt.




                                    6-19
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (CONNECT)
                                 (CONNECT)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You CONNECT to subjob 4, which was not previously defined:
                    _______ ______
            PTYCON> CONNECT 4<RET>
            [Connected to subjob 4]

             BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
             ___ ________ _____________
            @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR<RET>
              Job 37 on TTY213 13-Nov-84 11:34:03,
             Last Login 12-Nov-84 11:15:36
             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ___________
            $CHECKD<RET>
            CHECKD>^X
                    ^
                    |
                 <CTRL/X>
            PTYCON>

        2.  You CONNECT to subjob OPR(0), which was previously defined:

                    _______ ______
            PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
            [Connected to subjob OPR(0)]
            _____
            <RET>
            OPR>





























                                    6-20
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (DEFINE)
                                  (DEFINE)


   DEFINE - Defining a Subjob
   DEFINE - Defining a Subjob



   Function
   Function

        The DEFINE command defines a subjob.  For example, it can  create
        a new subjob, and it can associate a name with a subjob.  You can
        also define a new name for  an  existing  subjob  by  giving  the
        DEFINE command again with the desired new name.


   Format
   Format

        PTYCON> DEFINE number name


   Arguments
   Arguments

        number             specifies the subjob  number  to  be  defined.
                           You  can  specify any number from 0 to 23.  If
                           you press ESCape twice after you  type  DEFINE
                           (see  Example  1.),  the  system uses the next
                           available number.

        name               specifies an optional  name  for  the  subjob.
                           The   name   can   consist   of   up  to  five
                           alphanumeric   characters.    PTYCON    simply
                           ignores   any   characters   after  the  fifth
                           character.  If  you  use  any  nonalphanumeric
                           characters,  PTYCON  also ignores them and the
                           characters  that  follow  the  nonalphanumeric
                           characters.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        If you press ESCape for the subjob number, the next  free  subjob
        number  in  the system is chosen.  This is the recommended way to
        define a new subjob.

        If you define a subjob with  a  name  already  given  to  another
        subjob, you get the message:

             % Name already in use, reassigned to this subjob

        and the name is given to the new  subjob.   Also,  defined  names
        take  precedence  over subjob numbers when you define a subjob to
        be another number.  If ALL is the name of a subjob, whenever  you
        use ALL in a PTYCON command, it refers only to that subjob.



                                    6-21
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (DEFINE)
                                  (DEFINE)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You DEFINE the next available subjob number as DUMPER:

                        <ESC>        <ESC>
                          |            |
                          V            V
                    ______            _      ___________
            PTYCON> DEFINE (SUBJOB #) 5 (AS) DUMPER<RET>
                    _____ ________ ___ _____________
            PTYCON> 5-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
            PTYCON>
            **** DUMPER(5) 11:12:03 ****
             BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6144)
            @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
              Job 37 on TTY221 13-Nov-84 11:12:04,
             Last Login 12-Nov-84 8:26:02
                    _____________
            PTYCON> 5-DUMPER<RET>
            PTYCON>
            **** DUMPER(5) 11:12:09 ****
            DUMPER
            PTYCON>
            **** DUMPER(5) 11:12:13 ****
            DUMPER>
            PTYCON>

        2.  You DEFINE subjob 6 as OPR while subjob 0 is also defined  as
            OPR:

                    ______ _ ________
            PTYCON> DEFINE 6 OPR<RET>
            % Name already is use, reassigned to this subjob
                    _____ ________ ___ _____________
            PTYCON> 6-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
            PTYCON>
            **** OPR(6) 11:23:28 ****

             BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6144)
            @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
             Job 63 on TTY230 4-Dec-84 11:23:29,
             Last Login 3-Dec-84 11:12:29
            @
                    _______________
            PTYCON> OPR-ENABLE<RET>
            PTYCON>
            **** OPR(6) 11:23:32 ****
            ENABLE
            $
                    __________
            PTYCON> 6-OPR<RET>
            PTYCON>
            **** OPR(6) 11:23:37 ****
            OPR
            PTYCON>
            **** OPR(6) 11:23:41 ****
            OPR>
            PTYCON>


                                    6-22
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (DISCARD)
                                 (DISCARD)


   DISCARD - Eliminating Subjob Output
   DISCARD - Eliminating Subjob Output



   Function
   Function

        The DISCARD command eliminates output to your terminal  from  the
        specified subjob when you are not connected to that subjob.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> DISCARD n,...,n

        PTYCON> DISCARD ALL

        or

        PTYCON> NO DISCARD n,...,n

        PTYCON> NO DISCARD ALL


   Argument
   Argument

        n                  specifies a subjob number.  You can specify up
                           to  24  (0  -  23) subjob numbers separated by
                           commas.  If you defined a name for the subjob,
                           you can specify the subjob name instead of the
                           subjob number.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        The output is thrown away as far as your  terminal  is  concerned
        with  the  use  of the DISCARD command.  However, output from the
        subjob does go into the LOG file, if you  previously  issued  the
        LOG command to PTYCON.

        DISCARD differs from REFUSE, because REFUSE keeps the output  for
        acceptance  at  a  later  time.   Yet,  if you discard a subjob's
        output after you have refused it, the output buffered  by  REFUSE
        is  not  typed  on  your  terminal.   However, at the time of the
        DISCARD, any output buffered by REFUSE goes into  the  LOG  file,
        providing the LOG command to PTYCON is in effect.

        NO DISCARD is the default and allows all output to appear on your
        terminal.   However, if you issued a REFUSE for the subjob before
        the DISCARD, NO DISCARD  restores REFUSE mode for the subjob  and
        buffers the output.  (See the REFUSE command.)



                                    6-23
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (DISCARD)
                                 (DISCARD)


   Example
   Example

        1.  You DISCARD the output to your terminal for subjobs 3 and 5:

                    _______ ________
            PTYCON> DISCARD 3,5<RET>
            PTYCON>















































                                    6-24
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (EXIT)
                                   (EXIT)


   EXIT - Leaving PTYCON Command Level
   EXIT - Leaving PTYCON Command Level



   Function
   Function

        The EXIT command exits from PTYCON and gets you  back  to  system
        command level.


   Format
   Format

        PTYCON> EXIT


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        Use the EXIT command only when  you  want  to  permanently  leave
        PTYCON.   To  return  to  system  command level temporarily while
        subjobs are running, use the PUSH command.

        If there are subjobs active when you type EXIT, you get:

             Caution: Exiting may log out the still active subjobs!
             Confirm:  (type <CTRL/A> to get back to PTYCON)

        where "A" is the current  PTYCON  escape  character.   Type  that
        control  character to return to PTYCON immediately.  If you press
        RETURN to CONFIRM, you exit from PTYCON and you  might  lose  the
        subjobs.


   Hint
   Hint

        If  you  mistakenly  type  EXIT  and  press  RETURN  to  CONFIRM,
        immediately  type  CONTINUE  to return to PTYCON and preserve any
        subjobs.

        If you first run a program or give some  command  and  then  type
        CONTINUE,  you  might not be able to get back to PTYCON.  If this
        happens, subjobs become detached and are automatically logged out
        in five minutes unless corrective measures are taken.  Therefore,
        to recover them, immediately run PTYCON again.   Then,  for  each
        subjob  that  became detached, connect to a new subjob and attach
        to a system job corresponding to a  detached  subjob.   (Use  the
        SYSTAT  command  to  see  what jobs were detached.) Note that you
        cannot refer to the former  subjob  numbers;  you  must  use  the
        system job numbers until you establish PTYCON subjobs again.





                                    6-25
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (EXIT)
                                   (EXIT)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You EXIT from PTYCON,  but  you  have  not  killed  all  your
            subjobs.   Press  CTRL/X  to  return to PTYCON, KILL ALL your
            subjobs, and then EXIT:

                    _________
            PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
            Caution:  Exiting may log out the still active subjobs!
            Confirm:  (type CTRL/X to get back to PTYCON)^X
                                                         ^
                                                         |
                                                      <CTRL/X>
                    ____ ________
            PTYCON> KILL ALL<RET>
                    _________
            PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
            @

        2.  You attach system jobs 6 and 7 that became detached  and  you
            make them subjobs with their former names (TV and EDIT):

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ___________
            $PTYCON<RET>
                    _______ ______
            PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
            [Connected to subjob 0]
            _____
            <RET>
             BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4(3167)
             ______ ________ ______
            @ATTACH OPERATOR 6<RET>
            @^X
              ^
              |
            <CTRL/X>
                    ______ _ _______
            PTYCON> DEFINE 0 TV<RET>
                    _______ ______
            PTYCON> CONNECT 1<RET>
            [Connected to subjob 1]
            _____
            <RET>
             BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4(3167)
             ______ ________ ______
            @ATTACH OPERATOR 7<RET>
            @^X
              ^
              |
            <CTRL/X>
                    ______ _ _________
            PTYCON> DEFINE 1 EDIT<RET>
            PTYCON>

        3.  You issued the EXIT command and five minutes have passed  and
            the  former  subjobs  have  become logged-out jobs.  You have
            lost  all  the  operator   jobs   originally   started   from
            SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO.  You can do the following:

             ___________
            @PTYCON<RET>
                    ___ ______________________
            PTYCON> GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO<RET>



                                    6-26
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (GET)
                                   (GET)


   GET - Executing an Auto-File
   GET - Executing an Auto-File



   Function
   Function

        The GET command reads and executes the commands in the  specified
        file.


   Format
   Format

        PTYCON> GET filespec


   Argument
   Argument

        filespec           specifies the file specification of  the  file
                           that   contains  the  PTYCON  commands  to  be
                           executed automatically.

                                Default
                                Default filename and type - PTYCON.ATO


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        When the system is first started, SYSJOB normally  starts  PTYCON
        and  has PTYCON do a GET on SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO.  When the commands
        in the file are processed, they are echoed on your terminal as if
        they had been typed in directly (unless SILENCE is in effect).


   Hints
   Hints

        Certain characters in the command file must be typed  differently
        than  if  they  were  typed  directly  on your terminal.  Control
        characters must be typed as ^a,  where  ^  is  the  up-arrow,  or
        circumflex,  and  "a"  is the character.  Do not use the CTRL key
        for typing control characters in the command file.   ESCape  must
        be  typed  as  two  characters  ^$  (up-arrow  dollar-sign).   An
        up-arrow must be typed as ^^ (two up-arrows).

        The PTYCON command file can contain leading and  trailing  spaces
        and tabs, lowercase letters and blank lines.

        When you run PTYCON under OPERATOR (the  normal  case),  for  any
        subjob  you  log  in  under  OPERATOR,  you can give a fictitious
        password, for example, FOO in the examples below.





                                    6-27
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (GET)
                                   (GET)


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  The  following  is  a  sample  SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO  file   with
            comments added:

            SILENCE                   ;silence output to CTY
            LOG                       ;create LOG file PTYCON.LOG
            DEFINE 0 OPR              ;define subjob 0 as OPR
            CONNECT 0                 ;connect to subjob 0
            LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR ;log in
            ENABLE                    ;enable capabilities
            OPR                       ;run OPR
            ^X                        ;return to PTYCON
            NO SILENCE                ;allow output to CTY
            WHAT ALL                  ;print status of subjob 

            You now execute the PTYCON.ATO file with the GET command:

             ___________
            @PTYCON<RET>
                    ___ ______________________
            PTYCON> GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO<RET>
            PTYCON> SILENCE
            PTYCON.LOG.1
            PTYCON> WHAT ALL
            OPR(0)     44         OPERATOR      OPR      RN        0:0:0
            PTYCON>
            **** OPR(0) 15:08:08 ****
            OPR>
            PTYCON>

        2.  The following is a  sample  special  ATO  file  that  creates
            subjob 5 as DUMPER with comments added:

            LOG                       ;create LOG file PTYCON.LOG
            CONNECT 5                 ;connect to subjob 5
            <RET>                     ;Line contains a carriage 
                                      ;return
            LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR ;log in
            DUMPER                    ;start DUMPER as subjob 5

            You now execute DUMPER.ATO with the GET command:

             ___________
            @PTYCON<RET>
                    ___ _________________________
            PTYCON> GET <OPERATOR>DUMPER.ATO<RET>
            PTYCON> LOG
             PTYCON.LOG.2
            PTYCON> CONNECT 5

             BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
            @
            @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
             Job 65 on TTY222 4-Dec-84 15:28:35,


                                    6-28
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (GET)
                                   (GET)


             Last Login 3-Dec-84 15:05:42

            @DUMPER
            DUMPER>

















































                                    6-29
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (HELP)
                                   (HELP)


   HELP - Printing PTYCON Commands
   HELP - Printing PTYCON Commands



   Function
   Function

        The HELP command prints a list  of  PTYCON  commands  with  guide
        words.


   Format
   Format

                _________
        PTYCON> HELP<RET>


   Example
   Example

                _________
        PTYCON> HELP<RET>

|       PTYCON 7(35) commands:
|  
|       * ACCEPT (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|       * BELL (WHEN OUTPUT WAITING)
|         CONNECT (TO SUBJOB) lastsubjob
|         DEFINE (SUBJOB  ) number (AS) name
|       * DISCARD (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOB) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|         EXIT (FROM PTYCON)
|         GET (COMMANDS FROM FILE) ptycon.ato
|         HELP (MESSAGE)
|         KILL (SUBJOB) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|       * LOG (OUTPUT TO FILE) ptycon.log
|         PUSH (EXEC LEVEL)
|         REDEFINE (PTYCON ESCAPE CHARACTER TO BE) controlcharacter
|       * REFUSE (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|       * SAVE (INPUT IN FILE) saved-input.txt
|       * SILENCE (ALL OUTPUT TO TERMINAL)
|         WHAT (IS STATE OF SUBJOB) subjob or ALL
|  
|       "subjob,subjob,..." means a list of subjobs or ALL for all active
|       subjobs.
|       "*" means the command can be preceded by "NO" to reverse its
|       meaning.
|       The escape character to return to command level is:  X
|       PTYCON>









                                    6-30
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (KILL)
                                   (KILL)


   KILL - Killing PTYCON Subjobs
   KILL - Killing PTYCON Subjobs



   Function
   Function

        The KILL command kills the indicated subjobs (logs them out)  and
        deassigns  the  subjob  numbers,  provided that PTYCON is running
        with OPERATOR or WHEEL capability enabled, or  that  the  subjobs
        are logged in under the same user name as PTYCON.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> KILL n,...,n

        or

        PTYCON> KILL ALL


   Argument
   Argument

        n                  specifies a subjob number.  You can specify up
                           to  24  (0  - 23) subjobs separated by commas.
                           If you defined a name for the subjob, you  can
                           use the name instead of the subjob number.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        If the subjob is not logged in under the same user as PTYCON, the
        KILL command does not succeed, and you receive the message:

             Could not kill subjob n

        Then, you must connect to the subjob, log out, return to  PTYCON,
        and  issue  the  KILL command.  For KILL ALL you must type ALL in
        its entirety.

        The KILL command  is  necessary  to  deassign  a  subjob  number.
        Simply logging out a subjob does not deassign the subjob number.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You KILL subjob 7 which was defined as ULIST:

                    ____ __________
            PTYCON> KILL ULIST<RET>
            PTYCON>



                                    6-31
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (KILL)
                                   (KILL)


        2.  You KILL ALL subjobs before you exit from PTYCON:

                    ____ ________
            PTYCON> KILL ALL<RET>
                    _________
            PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
            @
















































                                    6-32
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (LOG)
                                   (LOG)


   LOG - Recording Interactions with PTYCON
   LOG - Recording Interactions with PTYCON



   Function
   Function

        The LOG  command  causes  all  interactions  with  PTYCON  to  be
        recorded in the specified file specification.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> LOG filespec

        or 

        PTYCON> NO LOG


   Argument
   Argument

        filespec           specifies the file specification of  the  file
                           that  contains  the  recording of interactions
                           with PTYCON and its subjobs.

                                Default
                                Default file name and type - PTYCON.LOG


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        If you specify a file that already  exists,  any  new  output  is
        appended  after  the  last  entry of the existing file.  Use this
        command to keep a  record  of  what  was  typed  at  the  console
        terminal.

        NO LOG, which is the normal mode, stops output to a log file  and
        closes  the  file.  This is the only command that stops output to
        the LOG file.

        Once the LOG command is  given,  the  log  file  contains  PTYCON
        prompts,  commands, and error messages, all input to subjobs, and
        all output from subjobs.  The order of information  in  the  file
        resembles the input and output to PTYCON at your terminal.


   Hints
   Hints

        If you do a DISCARD for a subjob, or GET a file that  contains  a
        SILENCE  command,  the log file contains all interactions as they
        occur, but your terminal  output  does  not.   (See  DISCARD  and
        SILENCE.)


                                    6-33
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (LOG)
                                   (LOG)


        When you do a DISCARD for a subjob after a REFUSE, the  log  file
        gets  all  the  output  buffered by the REFUSE, and then gets all
        output from the subjob as it occurs.  However, your terminal does
        not  get  output  from  a  subjob once a DISCARD command has been
        issued.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You specify LOG with a filename of  NOV18-79  to  record  all
            interactions with PTYCON.  The default file type is LOG.

                    ___ _____________
            PTYCON> LOG NOV18-79<RET>
            PTYCON>

        2.  You specify NO LOG after system startup to close the log file
            from  the  PTYCON.ATO  and then you create a new log file for
            the day's interactions with PTYCON.

                    __ ________
            PTYCON> NO LOG<RET>
                    ___ ______________
            PTYCON> LOG DEC28.TXT<RET>
            PTYCON>































                                    6-34
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (PUSH)
                                   (PUSH)


   PUSH - Performing Tasks at EXEC Level
   PUSH - Performing Tasks at EXEC Level



   Function
   Function

        The PUSH command allows you to perform a task at  system  command
        level without affecting subjobs.


   Format
   Format

        PTYCON> PUSH


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        When you give the  PUSH  command,  the  output  from  subjobs  is
        suspended.  Like REFUSE, PUSH causes a bell or beep to sound when
        output is waiting, providing the BELL command is in effect.  When
        you return to PTYCON, waiting output is printed on your terminal.

        The advantage of this command is that you  do  not  have  to  use
        another subjob or job number to do a task at system command level
        (EXEC level).  However, commands given after a PUSH  from  PTYCON
        and before a POP are not entered in the LOG file.


   Hint
   Hint

        To return to PTYCON, type POP.

                                      NOTE

                Do not run PTYCON at the new EXEC command  level.
                Return   to  PTYCON  by  using  the  TOPS-20  POP
                command.


   Restriction
   Restriction

        You cannot give the LOGOUT command when you have  PUSHed  out  of
        PTYCON.   If  you  do,  you  receive  the following error message
        instead of being logged out:

             ?LOG capability required
              Not logged off

        This prevents you  from  accidently  losing  your  subjobs  under
        PTYCON.



                                    6-35
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (PUSH)
                                   (PUSH)


   Example
   Example

        1.  You PUSH to system command level to  EDIT  a  file  and  then
            return to PTYCON's subjob OPR.

            OPR>^X
                 ^
                 |
              <CTRL/X>
                    _________
            PTYCON> PUSH<RET>

             TOPS-20 Command processor 4(554)
             ____ _______________
            @EDIT PTYCON.ATO<RET>
            Edit: PTYCON.ATO.1
             _________
            *I850<RET>
                    __ ________
            00850   NO LOG<RET>
             ________
            *ENU<RET>

            [PTYCON.ATO.2]

             ________
            @POP<RET>
                    _______ ________
            PTYCON> CONNECT OPR<RET>
            [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB OPR(0)]
             _____
             <RET>
            OPR>




























                                    6-36
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (REDEFINE)
                                 (REDEFINE)


   REDEFINE - Changing the PTYCON ESCape Character
   REDEFINE - Changing the PTYCON ESCape Character



   Function
   Function

        The REDEFINE command changes the ESCape character  to  return  to
        PTYCON  command  level.   By  default,  the  ESCape  character is
        <CTRL/X>.  With this command you can change  it  to  any  control
        character that is not treated specially by the system.


   Format
   Format

        PTYCON> REDEFINE <CTRL/character>


   Argument
   Argument

        <CTRL/character>   specifies the control character to be used  as
                           the   PTYCON  subjob  ESCape  character.   The
                           character can be one of the following:   A, B,
                           D, E, H, K, N, P, T, X, Y, or Z.   Do  not use
                           <CTRL/Q> or <CTRL/S>,  if  you  have  TERMINAL
                           PAGE mode set.  You must press the key labeled
                           CTRL and the desired character.


   Example
   Example

        1.  You REDEFINE escape character to be <CTRL/Z>:

                    ________ _______
            PTYCON> REDEFINE ^Z<RET>
                              ^
                              |
                           <CTRL/Z>
                    _______ ________
            PTYCON> CONNECT OPR<RET>
            [Connected to subjob OPR(0)]
             _____
             <RET>
            OPR>^Z
                 ^
                 |
              <CTRL/Z>
            PTYCON>









                                    6-37
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (REFUSE)
                                  (REFUSE)


   REFUSE - Refusing Output from Unconnected Subjobs
   REFUSE - Refusing Output from Unconnected Subjobs



   Function
   Function

        The REFUSE command refuses output from the specified  unconnected
        subjobs.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> REFUSE n,...,n

        PTYCON> REFUSE ALL

        or

        PTYCON> NO REFUSE n,...,n

        PTYCON> NO REFUSE ALL


   Argument
   Argument

        n                  specifies the subjob number.  You can  specify
                           up  to 24 (0 - 23) subjob numbers separated by
                           commas.  If  you  specified  a  name  for  the
                           subjob,   you  can  specify  the  subjob  name
                           instead of the subjob number.  If you  do  not
                           give a subjob name or number, ALL is assumed.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        A bell or beep sounds every ten seconds if a refused  subjob  has
        output  waiting.   (See  the BELL command to PTYCON.) Because the
        output is buffered, you can later get the output on your terminal
        by  typing ACCEPT or NO REFUSE for the subjob or by connecting to
        the subjob.  At that time, the output is also  written  into  the
        log file, providing the PTYCON LOG command is in effect.


   Hint
   Hint

        NO REFUSE, which is the normal mode, is equivalent to ACCEPT.







                                    6-38
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (REFUSE)
                                  (REFUSE)


   Example
   Example

        1.  You REFUSE output from subjob OPR(0) while you PUSH to system
            command  level  and  perform  a SYSTAT.  When you POP back to
            PTYCON and give the NO REFUSE command, all  temporarily  held
            OPR messages are printed on your terminal.

                    ______ ________
            PTYCON> REFUSE OPR<RET>
                    _________
            PTYCON> PUSH<RET>

             TOPS-20 Command processor 4(554)
             ___________
            @SYSTAT<RET>
                   .
                   .
                   .
                   .
                   .
             ________
            @POP<RET>
                    __ ______ ________
            PTYCON> NO REFUSE OPR<RET>
            PTYCON>
            **** OPR(0) 12:17:43 ****

            12:17:29 Printer 0         --Begin--
            Job COMREF Seq # 3914 For: LATTA
            OPR>
            PTYCON>



























                                    6-39
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (SAVE)
                                   (SAVE)


   SAVE - Recording Input to PTYCON Subjobs
   SAVE - Recording Input to PTYCON Subjobs



   Function
   Function

        The SAVE command  records  all  input  to  PTYCON  subjobs  in  a
        specified file.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> SAVE filespec

        or

        PTYCON> NO SAVE

   Argument
   Argument

        filespec       specifies the file specification of the file  that
                       contains   the   recording  of  inputs  to  PTYCON
                       subjobs.

                            Default
                            Default file name and type - SAVED-INPUT.TXT


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        If you specify a file that  already  exists,  all  new  input  to
        subjobs is recorded after the last entry in the existing file.

        NO SAVE, which is the normal mode, stops recording and closes the
        file.    This  is  the  only  command  that  stops  output  to  a
        saved-input file.

        The SAVE command  records  only  the  input  to  PTYCON  subjobs.
        PTYCON  prompts,  commands, error messages, and subjob output are
        not recorded.


   Hint
   Hint

        The SAVE command can be used to create a command file such  as  a
        PTYCON.ATO  or a batch control file.  Edit the file to delete the
        file  header  and  any  editing  control  characters  that   were
        recorded, such as <CTRL/U> and <CTRL/W>.

        If the file is to be executed with the PTYCON  GET  command,  use
        CONNECT commands to direct input to the proper subjobs.



                                    6-40
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (SAVE)
                                   (SAVE)


   Restriction
   Restriction

        Command-recognition input  is  not  recorded  accurately  in  the
        saved-input  file.   For  example,  if  you  give  the EXEC START
        command by typing ST<ESC>, the EXEC responds with ART  (PROGRAM).
        However,  the  saved-input  file contains only the letters ST and
        the escape symbol, ^$.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  You specify SAVE with a saved-input file name of  OPR-CMD.TXT
            to record all input to PTYCON subjobs.

                    ____ ________________
            PTYCON> SAVE OPR-CMD.TXT<RET>
            PTYCON>

        2.  You specify NO SAVE to close the saved-input file,  and  then
            you create a new saved-input file.

                    __ _________
            PTYCON> NO SAVE<RET>
                    ____ ________________
            PTYCON> SAVE FTS-CMD.TXT<RET>
            PTYCON>






























                                    6-41
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (SILENCE)
                                 (SILENCE)


   SILENCE - Silencing Output to Your Terminal
   SILENCE - Silencing Output to Your Terminal



   Function
   Function

        The SILENCE command silences any output that  would  normally  be
        output on your terminal while PTYCON processes the file specified
        in the GET command.


   Formats
   Formats

        SILENCE

        or

        NO SILENCE


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        The SILENCE and NO SILENCE commands are effective only when given
        in the file on which you do a GET.

        SILENCE does not stop output to a log file.

        NO SILENCE, which is the normal mode, allows all output  on  your
        terminal  while  PTYCON  processes  the  file  specified in a GET
        command.


   Hint
   Hint

        If you have a SILENCE command in a file on which you intend to do
        a  GET, you should then include a NO SILENCE in the file.  If you
        do not include  the  NO  SILENCE  command,  the  SILENCE  command
        suppresses the last PTYCON prompt on your terminal.


   Examples
   Examples

        1.  Your PTYCON.ATO file  might  contain  SILENCE  as  the  first
            command  to  silence  output  to  your  terminal  when SYSJOB
            executes the GET PTYCON.ATO command at system startup.

             ____ _______________
            @TYPE PTYCON.ATO<RET>
            00100   SILENCE
            00200   LOG
            00300   DEFINE 0 OPR
                    .


                                    6-42
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (SILENCE)
                                 (SILENCE)


                    .
                    .
                    .

        2.  In the same PTYCON.ATO file above,  the  NO  SILENCE  command
            might  be  one  of the last commands so that output prints on
            your terminal after the execution of the PTYCON.ATO file.

                    .
                    .
                    .
                    .
            01000   NO SILENCE
            01100   WHAT ALL
            01200   CONNECT OPR
                    .

            (For  actual  examples,  see  the  examples  under  the   GET
            command.)


































                                    6-43
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (WHAT)
                                   (WHAT)


   WHAT - Displaying the Status of Subjobs
   WHAT - Displaying the Status of Subjobs



   Function
   Function

        The WHAT command gives you a status report for specified subjobs.


   Formats
   Formats

        PTYCON> WHAT n

        or

        PTYCON> WHAT ALL


   Argument
   Argument

        n                  specifies the subjob number.  You can  specify
                           any  number  from 0 to 23.  If you specified a
                           name for the subjob, you can specify the  name
                           instead  of the subjob number.  If you specify
                           a nonexistent subjob number, the message:

                                Subjob "n" not in use.

                           appears on your terminal (n is the number  you
                           specified).   If  there  are  no  subjobs, the
                           message  None   active!    appears   on   your
                           terminal.


   Characteristics
   Characteristics

        If you do not specify a subjob  number  or  name  with  the  WHAT
        command,  PTYCON  gives the status for all the subjobs.  One line
        of information is given for each subjob.

        The information for a logged-in subjob is:

        1.  Subjob name    (if it has one)

        2.  Subjob number  (in parentheses if there is a subjob name)

        3.  System job number

        4.  User logged in under the subjob




                                    6-44
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (WHAT)
                                   (WHAT)


        5.  Program running under the subjob

        6.  State of the job:

            a.  RN meaning running

            b.  TI meaning ready for terminal input

            c.  TO meaning the subjob has terminal output waiting

            d.  Any of the three  above  followed  by  (R),  meaning  the
                REFUSE  or NO ACCEPT command is in effect for the subjob,
                or (D), meaning the DISCARD command is in effect for  the
                subjob

        7.  Run time of the job is in hours:minutes:seconds

        The information for a subjob that is defined but  not  logged  in
        is:

        1.  Subjob name    (if it has one)

        2.  Subjob number  (in parentheses if there is a subjob name)

        3.  System job number  (if assigned, or, if the subjob  has  only
            been defined, the message:  NO JOB NUMBER ASSIGNED)

        4.  Message:  NOT LOGGED IN  (if the login is not complete)

        5.  State of the job  (see above)

        6.  Run time of the job  (hours:minutes:seconds)


   Example
   Example

        1.  You specify the WHAT command to display  the  status  of  the
            PTYCON subjobs.  ALL is the default.

                    _________
            PTYCON> WHAT<RET>
            OPR(0)     19         OPERATOR   OPR        TI        2:15:26
            FIL(1)     22         OPERATOR   FILCOM     TO        0:05:01
            2          NO JOB NUMBER ASSIGNED           TI        0:00:00
            DUM(3)     27         OPERATOR   DUMPER     RN        0:21:15
            WAT(4)     25         OPERATOR   WATCH      RN        0:37:13
            5          31         OPERATOR   OPR        TI(R)     1:09:37
            EXEC(6)    32         OPERATOR   EXEC       TO        0:45:21
            7          NOT LOGGED IN                    TI        0:00:00
            PTYCON>




                                    6-45
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (WHAT)
                                   (WHAT)


   6.6  PTYCON WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES
   6.6  PTYCON WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES



   Warning Message
   Warning Message


   %Name already in use, reassigned to this subjob

        You have defined a subjob with a name that was  already  assigned
        to  another  subjob.  Therefore, PTYCON has removed the name from
        the other subjob and assigned it to the  one  you  just  defined.
        You  can still reference the other subjob by its subjob number or
        name.


   %This is only effective from within a command file

        You have issued a SILENCE command at PTYCON command  level.   The
        SILENCE  and NO SILENCE commands can only be used in a PTYCON.ATO
        file.


   Error Messages
   Error Messages


   ?Doing a "GET" within a "GET" is illegal

        You are not allowed to process a GET from a file upon  which  you
        have done a GET.


   ?Error while converting ATO file - conversion and GET aborted

        This error is not a result of any error on your part.  This is an
        I/O  error  that occurred while converting a control character in
        the ATO file.  Notify your software contact  or  System  Manager.
        PTYCON continues to run.


   ?Fatal JSYS error

        This error is not a result of any error  on  your  part.   PTYCON
        does not continue to run.  Notify your software contact or System
        Manager.  You can try CONTINUE immediately after the message  and
        check the status of the subjobs.


   ?Illegal PTYCON escape character

        You typed an escape CTRL character that is not the default CTRL/X


                                    6-46
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (WHAT)
                                   (WHAT)


        or the CTRL character defined with the PTYCON REDEFINE command.


   ?Illegal subjob designator

        You referenced a subjob name that did not exist, or you tried  to
        assign  to  a  subjob  a number that is larger than the number of
        PTYs on the system.


   ?Insufficient system resources - no resident free space

        You tried to  create  another  subjob;  but  there  was  no  more
        resident free space for a PTY.


   ?Line too long

        You entered a line that  is  too  long  for  the  PTYCON  command
        buffer.


   ?No EXEC

        You did a  PUSH,  and  there  was  no  system  command  language,
        SYSTEM:EXEC.EXE, to run.  Notify your system manager.


   ?No lower forks available

        You did  a  PUSH  command,  and  there  were  no  free  processes
        available.


   ?No more PTY's available

        You tried to create another subjob, but there were no  free  PTYs
        to  run the job.  To find out how many PTYs are available on your
        system, type  the  EXEC  command  INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  AVAILABLE
        DEVICES.   To  find out how many PTYs are in use by PTYCON (up to
        24), type the PTYCON command WHAT ALL.


   ?Subjobs active, use "PUSH" command

        You typed a CTRL/C to PTYCON and there were subjobs  active.   If
        you  want to do a task at system level, use the PUSH command.  If
        you really want to exit from PTYCON,  see  the  EXIT  command  to
        PTYCON.




                                    6-47
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (WHAT)
                                   (WHAT)


   ?Too few arguments

        You did not give the proper arguments for the command you  typed.
        Because  of  the  severity of the DISCARD and KILL commands, they
        require either a subjob name or  number,  or  ALL  typed  in  its
        entirety.   Also, these two commands do not accept ESCape for the
        argument.


   ?Too many arguments

        You typed more than 23 subjob numbers.


   ?Type "EXIT" to exit from PTYCON

        You typed a CTRL/C to PTYCON and there were  no  subjobs  active.
        However, you must still type EXIT to exit from PTYCON.


   ?Unexpected PTYCON error - cannot enable for CONTROL-C intercept

        You  cannot  run   PTYCON   if   you   have   done   a   SET   NO
        CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY.  Do a SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY and then run
        PTYCON.


   ?Unexpected PTYCON error - couldn't get handle on TTY for binary
    channel

        This is an unexpected error and is not a result of any  error  on
        your  part.  Notify your software contact or system manager.  You
        can try START immediately after the message and check the  status
        of  the  subjobs.   If  that does not work, run PTYCON again, and
        within five minutes attach to the subjobs  that  became  detached
        jobs.


   ?Unexpected PTYCON error - couldn't open the TTY in binary for PTY
    communication

        This is an unexpected error and is not a result of any  error  on
        your  part.  Notify your software contact or system manager.  You
        can try START immediately after the message and check the  status
        of  the  subjobs.   If  that does not work, run PTYCON again, and
        within five minutes attach to the subjobs  that  became  detached
        jobs.


   ?Unexpected PTYCON error - NOUT failed



                                    6-48
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                   (WHAT)
                                   (WHAT)


        This is an unexpected error and is not a result of any  error  on
        your  part.   Notify  your  software  contact  or system manager.
        PTYCON continues to run.


   ?Unexpected PTYCON error - panic level interrupt occurred - reason

        This is an unexpected error and is not the result of any error on
        your  part.   Notify  your  software  contact  or system manager.
        PTYCON will continue to run.


   ?Unrecognized PTYCON command - reason

        You typed something to PTYCON which was  not  a  PTYCON  command.
        Type HELP to PTYCON for a list of PTYCON commands and their guide
        words.




































                                    6-49
                                        
                                        


                                   INDEX



               -A-
               -A-                     Defining nodes, 3-30
                                       Defining printer names, 3-34
                                       D
   Aborting jobs from OPR, 3-2         Device
   Alias names                           displaying parameters, 3-187
     printers, 3-168                   Device
   Aligning printer, 3-8                 displaying parameters, 3-201
   Allowing system process features,     setting on-line, 3-132
       3-52                              setting parameters, 3-115
   Answering messages, 3-101             starting a, 3-217
                                         stopping a, 3-212, 3-222
               -B-
               -B-                     Device parameters
                                         setting, 3-115
   Backspacing printer, 3-13           Directory
   Batch stream control file             changing parameters of, 5-8
     displaying, 3-180                   creating a, 5-8
   Batch stream parameters               deleting a, 5-8
     displaying, 3-201                   displaying parameters of, 5-50
     setting, 3-116                    Disabling system process features,
                                           3-39
               -C-
               -C-                     Disk-drive configuration, 3-177
                                       Disk-drive parameters
   Canceling jobs, 3-18                  displaying, 3-201
   Card punch parameters                 setting, 3-123
     displaying, 3-201                 Dismounting structures, 3-48
     setting, 3-119                    Dismounting tapes, 3-48
                                       D
   Changing job priorities, 3-77       Displaying
   CI                                    device parameters, 3-187
     starting, 3-140                   Displaying
     stopping, 3-140                     batch stream control file,
   Closing ORION log buffer file,            3-180
       3-22                              cluster link status
   Cluster                                 Galaxy, 3-175
     Galaxy                              date, 3-211
       link status, 3-175                disk-drive configuration, 3-177
   Command files                         job requests, 3-193
     taking, 3-233                       messages, 3-182
   Comments (to SYSERR), 3-93            node routing, 3-197
   Configuration                         operators, 3-184
     disk-drive, 3-177                   ORION messages status, 3-173
   Control file                          printer aliases names, 3-168
     displaying, 3-180                   scheduler, 3-199
                                         system parameters, 3-167
               -D-
               -D-                       time, 3-211
    
                                                   -E-
   Date                                            -E-
     displaying, 3-211
   DDT                                 Enabling system process features,


                                  Index-1
                                        
                                        


     to debug the EXEC, 5-49               3-52




















































                                  Index-2
                                        
                                        


   Entering                            Jobs (Cont.)
     another command level, 3-61         Rescheduling, 3-90
     LCP, 3-61                           rescheduling, 3-95
     NCP, 3-61                           restarting, 3-24
   Error messages                        selecting, 3-83
     OPR, 2-16
                                                   -L-
   Errors                                          -L-
     reporting, 3-93
   EXEC                                LCP
     debugging the, 5-49                 CLEAR command, 4-8
     halting, 5-55                       entering, 3-61
     returning to, 3-88                  SET command, 4-11
   Exiting OPR, 3-63, 3-88               SHOW command, 4-14
                                         START command, 4-19
               -F-
               -F-                       STOP command, 4-20
                                       Link status
   Form-feeds                            cluster
     suppressing, 3-227                    Galaxy, 3-175
   Forwardspacing printer, 3-64        Log buffer file
                                         ORION, 3-22
               -G-
               -G-                     Logical name
                                         defining a, 5-46
   Galaxy                                deleting a, 5-46
     displaying
       cluster link status, 3-175
                                                   -M-
                                                   -M-
               -H-
               -H-
                                       Messages
   HELP                                  displaying, 3-182
     OPR, 3-68                           OPR, 2-15
   Holding jobs, 3-70                    responding to, 3-101
                                         sending
               -I-
               -I-                         with ^ESEND, 5-57
                                           with OPR, 3-112
   Identifying mount requests, 3-73    Modifying job priorities, 3-77
                                       Mount requests
               -J-
               -J-                       identifying, 3-73
                                       Mounting structures, 3-80
   Job                                 Multiple OPRs, 2-6
     displaying requests, 3-193
     setting parameters, 3-126, 5-59
                                                   -N-
   Job parameters                                  -N-
     setting, 3-126, 5-59
   Job priorities                      NCP
     changing, 3-77                      entering, 3-61
     modifying, 3-77                   NI
   Jobs                                  starting, 3-145
     aborting, 3-2                       stopping, 3-145
     canceling, 3-18                   Node
     holding, 3-70                       defining, 3-30
     releasing, 3-90                     displaying routing, 3-197


                                  Index-3
                                        
                                        


     requeueing, 3-95                    parameters, 3-128




















































                                  Index-4
                                        
                                        


               -O-
               -O-                     Printer
                                         aligning, 3-8
   Operators                             backspacing, 3-13
     displaying, 3-184                   forwardspacing, 3-64
   OPR                                   suppressing form-feeds, 3-227
     exiting, 2-2, 3-63, 3-88          Printer names
     HELP, 3-68                          aliases, 3-168
     more than one, 2-6                  defining, 3-34
     starting, 2-2                     Printer parameters
   OPR error messages, 2-16              displaying, 3-201
   ORION log buffer file                 setting, 3-147
     closing, 3-22                     Printer specifications
   ORION messages                        defining name for, 3-34
     remote broadcasting status,
                                                   -Q-
         3-173                                     -Q-
   Output
     redirecting, 3-104                Quitting OPR, 3-63
     routing, 3-104
                                                   -R-
                                                   -R-
    
               -P-
               -P-                     Reader parameters
                                         displaying, 3-201
   Paper tape punch parameters         Redirecting output, 3-104
     displaying, 3-201                 Releasing jobs, 3-90
     setting, 3-134                    Remote broadcasting
   P
   Parameters                            ORION messages
     displaying, 3-187                     status, 3-173
   Parameters                          Remote stations, 2-5
     batch stream, 3-116, 3-201        Requeueing jobs, 3-95
     card punch, 3-119, 3-201          Rescheduling jobs, 3-90, 3-95
     devices, 3-115                    Responding to messages, 3-101
     disk-drive, 3-123, 3-201          Restarting jobs, 3-24
     displaying, 3-167                 Returning to EXEC, 3-88
       device, 3-201                   Returning to TOPS-20, 3-88
       directory, 5-50                 Routing output, 3-104
     job, 3-126, 5-59
                                                   -S-
     node, 3-128                                   -S-
     paper tape punch, 3-134, 3-201
     plotter, 3-137, 3-201             Scheduler
     printer, 3-147, 3-201               displaying parameters, 3-199
     reader, 3-201                     Scheduler parameters
     removing structure, 3-235           setting, 3-153
     scheduler, 3-153                  Selecting jobs, 3-83
     structure, 3-156                  Stopping system process features,
     system, 5-59                          3-39
     tape-drive, 3-161, 3-201          Structure parameters
     terminal, 5-59                      setting, 3-156
   Performance                           undefining, 3-235
     controlling, 3-153                Structures
   Plotter parameters                    dismounting, 3-48
     displaying, 3-201                   mounting, 3-80


                                  Index-5
                                        
                                        


     setting, 3-137                    SYSERR, 3-93




















































                                  Index-6
                                        
                                        


   SYSJOB                              Tape-drive parameters
     giving commands to, 5-71            displaying, 3-201
   System parameters                     setting, 3-161
     setting, 5-59                     Tapes
                                         dismounting, 3-48
                                       Terminal parameters
                                         setting, 5-59
               -T-
               -T-                     Time
                                         displaying, 3-211
   Tape-drive                          TOPS-20
     switching, 3-231                    returning to, 3-88










































                                  Index-7
